Operation Manual

DVD AV RECEIVER
AVH-P3100DVD
English
Thank you for purchasing this PIONEER product.
Please read through this manual before using the product for the first time, to en-
sure proper use. After reading, please keep the manual in a safe and accessible place
for future reference.
Be sure to read this
! DVD video disc region numbers 7
! When an operation is prohibited 10
! Handling guideline of discs and player 100
Precautions
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS 5
To ensure safe driving 5
When using a rear view camera 6
To avoid battery exhaustion 6
Before You Start
Information to User 7
For Canadian model 7
About this unit 7
About this manual 7
After-sales service for Pioneer products 8
Visit our website 8
Features 8
When an operation is prohibited 10
Resetting the microprocessor 10
Feature demo mode 10
What’s what
Head unit 11
Optional remote control 11
Basic Operations
Power ON/OFF 12
Selecting a source 12
Adjusting the volume 13
Touch panel key basic operation 13
Built-in DVD player basic operations 15
Radio
Listening to the radio 17
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies 17
Introduction of advanced tuner
operation 18
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies 18
Tuning in strong signals 18
Playing DVD discs
Watching a DVD 19
Skipping back or forward to another title 20
Operating the DVD menu 20
Resume playback (Bookmark) 20
CM skip/CM back 20
Frame-by-frame playback 21
Slow motion playback 21
Pausing playback 21
Searching for the part you want to play 21
Changing audio language during playback
(Multi-audio) 21
Changing the subtitle language during
playback (Multi-subtitle) 22
Changing the viewing angle during playback
(Multi-angle) 22
Return to the specified scene 22
Automatic playback of DVDs 22
Introduction of advanced DVD operation 23
Repeating play 23
Selecting audio output 23
Playing Video CDs
Watching a Video CD 24
PBC playback 24
Frame-by-frame playback 25
Slow motion playback 25
Pausing playback 25
Searching for a desired scene, starting
playback from a specified time 25
Introduction of advanced Video CD
operation 25
Repeating play 26
Selecting audio output 26
Playing CDs
Listening to a CD 27
Selecting tracks from the track title list 27
Contents
En
2
Pausing playback 27
Switching the media file type 28
Using advanced sound retriever 28
Introduction of advanced CD operation 28
Repeating play 28
Playing tracks in random order 28
Scanning tracks of a CD 28
Playing compressed audio
Listening to compressed audio 29
Selecting files from the file name list 30
Pausing playback 30
Switching the media file type 30
Using advanced sound retriever 30
Introduction of advanced compressed audio
operation 30
Repeating play 31
Playing tracks in random order 31
Scanning folders and tracks 31
Playing DivX/JPEG files
Watching a DivX/JPEG 32
Viewing a JPEG slideshow 33
Playing DivX® VOD content 33
Selecting files from the file name list 33
Displaying text information on DivX/JPEG
disc 34
Pausing playback 34
Switching the media file type 34
Searching for the part you want to play 34
Changing audio language during playback
(Multi-audio) 34
Changing the subtitle language during
playback (Multi-subtitle) 34
Capture an image in JPEG files 34
Introduction of advanced DivX/JPEG
operation 35
Repeating play 35
Playing tracks in random order 35
Playing songs in a USB storage device
Basic Operations 36
Selecting files from the file name list 36
Pausing compressed audio playback 37
Switching the media file type 37
Using advanced sound retriever 37
Introduction to advanced operations 37
Using iPod
Basic Operations 38
Playing video 39
Browsing for a song/video 39
Displaying text information on iPod
Video 40
Pausing playback 40
Using advanced sound retriever 40
Repeating play 40
Playing songs/videos in a random order
(shuffle) 41
Playing all songs in a random order (shuffle
all) 41
Operating this unit’s iPod function from your
iPod 41
Selecting songs from lists related to the
currently playing song 41
Changing audiobook speed 41
Changing the screen mode 42
Audio Adjustments
Introduction of audio adjustments 43
Using balance adjustment 43
Using the equalizer 43
Adjusting loudness 44
Using subwoofer output 44
Boosting the bass 44
Using the high pass filter 45
Adjusting source levels 45
Setting up the DVD player
Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 46
Setting the subtitle language 46
Setting the audio language 46
Setting the menu language 47
Setting the angle icon display 47
En
3
Contents
Setting the aspect ratio 47
Setting the slide show interval 47
Setting the parental lock 48
Setting the DivX subtitle file 48
Displaying your DivX® VOD registration
code 49
Setting for digital output 49
Initial Settings
Adjusting initial settings 50
Switching the auxiliary setting 50
Setting the rear output and subwoofer
controller 50
Changing languages for CAUTION 51
Switching the sound muting/attenuation 51
Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless
connection 51
Correcting distorted sound 52
Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and
auto-equalizing) 52
Resetting the audio functions 52
System settings
Introduction of system adjustments 53
Changing the wide screen mode 53
Changing the picture adjustment 54
Setting the AV input 54
Setting the clock 55
Setting for rear view camera (back up
camera) 55
Entertainment settings
Introduction of entertainment settings 56
Selecting the background display 56
Selecting the illumination color 56
Selecting the OSD color 57
Other Functions
Adjusting the response positions of the
touch panels (Touch Panel
Calibration) 58
Using the AUX source 58
Using the external unit 59
Available accessories
Multi-CD Player 61
XM tuner 63
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner 66
HD Radio™ tuner 70
Bluetooth Audio 72
Bluetooth Telephone 74
TV tuner 81
Digital Signal Processor 83
Additional Information
Troubleshooting 94
Error messages 96
Understanding auto TA and EQ error
messages 98
Understanding messages 99
Handling guideline of discs and player 100
DVD discs 100
DVD-R/DVD-RW discs 101
AVCHD recorded discs 101
CD-R/CD-RW discs 101
Dual Discs 101
Compressed audio compatibility 101
Handling guideline and supplemental
information 102
Example of a hierarchy 103
iPod compatibility 103
About handling the iPod 104
JPEG picture files 104
DivX video files 104
Using the display correctly 105
Language code chart for DVD 107
Copyright and trademark notice 108
Terms 110
Specifications 113
Index 115
Contents
En
4
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Please read all of these instructions regarding
your display and retain them for future refer-
ence.
1 Read this manual fully and carefully be-
fore operating your display.
2 Keep this manual handy as a reference for
operating procedures and safety informa-
tion.
3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this
manual and follow the instructions care-
fully.
4 Do not allowother persons to use this sys-
tem until they have read and understood
the operating instructions.
5 Do not install the display where it may (i)
obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) impair the
performance of any of the vehicle’s oper-
ating systems or safety features, includ-
ing air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii)
impair the driver’s ability to safely oper-
ate the vehicle.
6 Do not operate this display if doing so in
any way will divert your attention from
the safe operation of your vehicle. Always
observe safe driving rules and follow all
existing traffic regulations. If you experi-
ence difficulty in operating the system or
reading the display, park your vehicle in a
safe location and make necessary adjust-
ments.
7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at
all times while operating your vehicle. If
you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe if your
seat belt is not properly buckled.
8 Never use headphones while driving.
9 To promote safety, certain functions are
disabled unless the parking brake is on,
and the vehicle is not in motion.
10 Never set the volume of your display so
high that you cannot hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
WARNING
! Do not attempt to install or service your
display by yourself. Installation or servi-
cing of the display by persons without
training and experience in electronic
equipment and automotive accessories
may be dangerous and could expose you
to the risk of electric shock or other
hazards.
To ensure safe driving
WARNING
! LIGHT GREEN LEAD AT POWER CON-
NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT
PARKED STATUS AND MUST BE CON-
NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPLY SIDE
OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH. IM-
PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF
THIS LEAD MAY VIOLATE APPLICABLE
LAW AND MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS IN-
JURY OR DAMAGE.
! To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the
potential violation of applicable laws, this unit
is not for use with a video screen that is visible
to the driver.
! To avoid the risk of accident and the potential
violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or
TV (sold separately) feature should never be
used while the vehicle is being driven. Also,
rear displays should not be in a location
where they are visibly distracting to the driver.
! In some countries or states the viewing of
images on a display inside a vehicle even by
persons other than the driver may be illegal.
Where such regulations apply, they must be
obeyed and this unit’s DVD features should
not be used.
When you attempt to watch a DVD, Video CD
or TV while driving, the warning Viewing of
front seat video source while driving is
strictly prohibited. will appear on the front
display.
Precautions
En
5
Section
01
P
r
e
c
a
u
t
i
o
n
s
To watch a DVD, Video CD or TV on the front
display, park your vehicle in a safe place and
apply the parking brake.
Parking brake interlock
Certain functions (DVD/TV viewing and certain
touch panel keys) offered by this unit could be
dangerous and/or unlawful if used while driv-
ing. To prevent such functions from being
used while the vehicle is in motion, there is an
interlock system that senses when the parking
brake is set. If you attempt to use the functions
described above while driving, they will be-
come disabled until you stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and (1) apply the parking brake, (2)
release the parking brake, and then (3) apply
the parking brake again. Please keep the
brake pedal pushed down before releasing the
parking brake.
When using a display
connected to V OUT
This unit’s V OUT is for connection of a dis-
play to enable passengers in the rear seats to
watch the DVD or TV.
WARNING
NEVER install the rear display in a location that
enables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while
driving.
When using a rear view
camera
With an optional rear view camera, you are
able to use this unit as an aid to keep an eye
on trailers, or backing into a tight parking
spot.
WARNING
! SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR RE-
VERSED.
! USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR
MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA.
OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY
OR DAMAGE.
CAUTION
! The rear view camera function is to be used
as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or while
backing up. Do not use for entertainment pur-
poses.
! Please note that the edges of the rear view
camera images may differ slightly according
to whether full screen images are displayed
when backing up, and whether the images are
used for checking the rear when the vehicle is
moving forward.
To avoid battery exhaustion
Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using
this unit. Using this unit without running the
engine can result in battery drainage.
! When no power is supplied to this unit be-
cause of a replacement of the vehicle bat-
tery or for some similar reason, the
microcomputer of this unit is returned to
its initial condition. We recommend that
you transcribe the audio adjustment data.
WARNING
Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an
ACC position.
Precautions
En
6
Section
01
Information to User
Alteration or modifications carried out without
appropriate authorization may invalidate the
user’s right to operate the equipment.
For Canadian model
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
About this unit
The tuner frequencies on this unit are allo-
cated for use in North America. Use in other
areas may result in poor reception.
WARNING
Handling the cord on this product or cords asso-
ciated with accessories sold with the product
may expose you to chemicals listed on proposi-
tion 65 known to the State of California and other
governmental entities to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION:
USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES
OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN
MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION
EXPOSURE.
CAUTION:
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE
EYE HAZARD.
CAUTION
! Do not allow this unit to come into contact
with liquids. Electrical shock could result.
Also, damage to this unit, smoke, and over-
heating could result from contact with liquids.
! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op-
erating procedures and precautions.
! Always keep the volume low enough so that
you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle.
! Protect this unit from moisture.
! If the battery is disconnected or discharged,
the preset memory will be erased and must be
reprogrammed.
Important (Serial number)
The serial number is located on the bottom of
this unit. For your own security and convenience,
be sure to record this number on the enclosed
warranty card.
DVD video disc region numbers
DVD video discs that have incompatible region
numbers cannot be played on this player. The
region number of the player can be found on
the bottom of this unit and this manual (refer
to Specifications on page 113).
About this manual
This unit features a number of sophisticated
functions ensuring superior reception and op-
eration. All the functions have been designed
for the easiest possible use, but many are not
self-explanatory. This operation manual will
help you benefit fully from this unit’s potential
and to maximize your listening enjoyment.
We recommend that you familiarize yourself
with the functions and their operation by read-
ing through the manual before you begin
using this unit. It is especially important that
you read and observe WARNINGs and CAU-
TIONs in this manual.
Before You Start
En
7
Section
02
B
e
f
o
r
e
Y
o
u
S
t
a
r
t
After-sales service for
Pioneer products
Please contact the dealer or distributor from
where you purchased this unit for after-sales
service (including warranty conditions) or any
other information. In case the necessary infor-
mation is not available, please contact the
companies listed below:
Please do not ship your unit to the companies
at the addresses listed below for repair without
advance contact.
U.S.A.
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.
CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION
P.O. Box 1760
Long Beach, CA 90801-1760
800-421-1404
CANADA
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT
300 Allstate Parkway
Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
For warranty information please see the Lim-
ited Warranty sheet included with this unit.
Visit our website
Visit us at the following site:
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
1 Register your product. We will keep the details
of your purchase on file to help you refer to
this information in the event of an insurance
claim such as loss or theft.
2 Receive updates on the latest products and
technologies.
3 Download owner’s manuals, order product
catalogues, research new products, and
much more.
4 Your feedback is important in our continual ef-
fort to design and build the most advanced,
cunsumer-focused product in the industry.
Serial number
Features
Touch panel key operation
It is possible to operate this unit by using
touch panel key.
Also, scroll bar and scrubber bar can be con-
trolled at your fingertip.
DVD-R/RW compatibility
It is possible to play back DVD-R/RW discs re-
corded with the video format and Video Re-
cording format. (Refer to DVD-R/DVD-RW discs
on page 101.)
Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility
It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring
PBC (playback control).
CD playback
Music CD/CD-R/RW playback is possible.
MP3 file playback
You can play back MP3 files recorded on CD-
R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 stan-
dard), DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level
2 standard, UDF 1.02) and USB storage device
(FAT 16, FAT 32).
WMA file playback
You can play back WMA files recorded on CD-
R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 stan-
dard), DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level
2 standard, UDF 1.02) and USB storage device
(FAT 16, FAT 32).
Before You Start
En
8
Section
02
AAC file playback
You can play back AAC files recorded on CD-
R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 stan-
dard), DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level
2 standard, UDF 1.02) and USB storage device
(FAT 16, FAT 32).
DivX
®
video compatibility
Refer to DivX compatibility on page 104.
JPEG picture file playback
You can play back JPEG picture files recorded
on CD-R/RW/ROM and USB storage device.
Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility
When using this unit with a Pioneer multi-
channel processor, you can enjoy the atmo-
sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie
and music software featuring 5.1 channel re-
cordings.
Portable audio player compatibility
! Make inquiries to the manufacturer about
your USB portable audio player/USB mem-
ory.
This unit corresponds to the following.
— USB MSC (Mass Storage Class) compliant
portable audio player and memory
— WMA, MP3 and AAC file playback
— JPEG file playback
iPod compatibility
This unit can control, listen to songs and view
videos on an iPod.
For details about the supported iPod, refer to
iPod compatibility on page 103.
Hands-free phoning
Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200),
this unit realizes effortless hands-free phoning
with Bluetooth wireless technology.
Bluetooth audio player compatibility
Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200),
you can control Bluetooth audio player featur-
ing Bluetooth wireless technology.
About DivX
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-
ated by the DivX
®
video codec from DivX, Inc.
This unit can play DivX video files recorded on
CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs.
Keeping the same terminology as DVD video,
individual DivX video files are called “Titles”.
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a
DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind
that by default they will be played in alphabeti-
cal order.
Official DivX
®
Certified product
Plays all versions of DivX
®
video (including
DivX
®
6) with standard playback of DivX
®
media files
About the SAT RADIO READY mark
The SAT RADIO READY mark indicates that
the Satellite Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i.e., XM
tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold
separately) can be controlled by this unit.
Please inquire to your dealer or nearest
authorized Pioneer service station regarding
the satellite radio tuner that can be connected
to this unit. For satellite radio tuner operation,
please refer to the satellite radio tuner owner’s
manual.
! The system will use direct satellite-to-recei-
ver broadcasting technology to provide lis-
teners in their cars and at home with
crystal-clear sound seamlessly from coast
to coast. Satellite radio will create and
package over 100 channels of digital-quality
music, news, sports, talk and children’s
programming.
Before You Start
En
9
Section
02
B
e
f
o
r
e
Y
o
u
S
t
a
r
t
When an operation is
prohibited
When you are watching a DVD and attempt to
perform an operation, it may not be performed
because of the programming on the disc.
When this happens, the icon appears on
the screen.
! The icon may not appear with certain
discs.
Resetting the microprocessor
Pressing RESET lets you reset the micropro-
cessor to its initial settings without changing
the bookmark information.
The microprocessor must be reset under the
following conditions:
! Prior to using this unit for the first time
after installation
! If the unit fails to operate properly
! When strange or incorrect messages ap-
pear on the display
1 Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other
pointed instrument.
RESET button
Note
After completing connections or when you want
to erase all memorized settings or return the unit
to its initial (factory) settings, switch your engine
ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before
pressing RESET.
Feature demo mode
The feature demo automatically starts when
you select the source Off. The demo continues
while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON.
To cancel the feature demo, press and hold
MUTE. To restart the feature demo, press and
hold MUTE again. Remember that if the fea-
ture demo continues operating when the car
engine is turned off, it may drain battery
power.
Important
The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be con-
nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch
on/off operations. If this is not done, the vehicle
battery may be drained.
Before You Start
En
10
Section
02
Head unit
1 c/d (TRK) buttons
Press to do manual seek tuning, fast for-
ward, reverse and track search controls.
2 +/– (VOL) buttons
Press to increase or decrease the volume.
3 RESET button
Press to return to the factory settings (initial
settings).
4 h(eject) button
Press to eject a disc from this unit.
5 Disc loading slot
Insert a disc to play.
6 DISP OFF button
Press to turn the information display on or
off.
7 USB port
Use to connect a USB storage device and
an iPod.
! When connecting, open up the USB con-
nector lid.
! Use an optional Pioneer USB cable (CD-
U50E) to connect the USB audio player/
USB memory to the USB port. Since the
USB audio player/USB memory is pro-
jected forward from the unit, it is danger-
ous to connect directly.
Do not use the unauthorized product.
8 AUX1 input jack (3.5 mm stereo/video
jack)
Use to connect an auxiliary device.
9 MUTE button
Press to turn off the sound. To turn on the
sound, press again.
a SRC/OFF button
Press to cycle through all the available
sources. Press and hold to turn the source
off.
Optional remote control
The remote control CD-R55 is sold separately.
For details concerning operations, see the re-
mote control manual.
·
· '
| · ·
´ ¨
What’s what
En
11
Section
03
W
h
a
t

s
w
h
a
t
Power ON/OFF
¨¨¨
1 Source icon
Turning the unit on
% When using the touch panel keys,
touch the source icon and then touch the
desired source name.
The source names are displayed and select-
able ones are highlighted.
% When using the button, press SRC/OFF
to turn the unit on.
Turning the unit off
% When using the touch panel keys,
touch the source icon and then touch Off.
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
% When using the button, press SRC/OFF
and hold until the unit turns off.
Selecting a source
You can select a source you want to listen to.
To switch to the DVD player, load a disc in the
unit.
% When using the touch panel keys,
touch the source icon and then touch the
desired source name.
The source names are displayed and select-
able ones are highlighted.
! Disc – Built-in DVD player
! Radio – Radio
! M-CD – Multi-CD player
! TV – Television
! AV – AV input
! EXT-1 – External unit 1
! EXT-2 – External unit 2
! AUX-1 – AUX 1
! AUX-2 – AUX 2
! USB/iPod – USB/iPod
! TEL – Bluetooth telephone
! BT Audio – Bluetooth audio player
! XM – XM tuner
! SIRIUS – SIRIUS tuner
! HD Radio – HD Radio tuner
! RearView – Rear view camera
! Off – Turn the unit off
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
# While operating the menu, you cannot select
a source by touching the source icon.
# To close source select menu, touch ESC.
% When using the button, press SRC/OFF
repeatedly to select a desired source.
Notes
! In the following cases, the sound source will
not change.
— When no unit corresponding to the se-
lected source is connected.
— When there is no disc or magazine in the
player.
— When AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off
(refer to page 50).
— When the AV (AV input) is not set to Video
(refer to page 54).
! If the HD Radio tuner is connected to this
unit, tuner source is skipped.
! In the following cases, USB/iPod icon will be
changed.
— USB is displayed when USB storage device
is connected.
— iPod is displayed when iPod is connected.
— USB/iPod is displayed when no device is
connected.
Basic Operations
En
12
Section
04
! AUX1 is set to Video by default. Set the AUX1
to Off when not in use (refer to Switching the
auxiliary setting on page 50).
! Charging the portable audio player using
car’s DC power source while connecting it to
AUX input may generate noise. In this case,
stop charging.
! RearView (rear view camera) cannot be se-
lected by pressing SRC/OFF.
! Image from rear view camera can be dis-
played automatically when the appropriate
setting is conducted. For details, refer to Set-
ting for rear view camera (back up camera) on
page 55.
! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such
as ones available in the future) that, although
incompatible as a source, enables control of
basic functions with this unit. Two external
units can be controlled with this unit. When
two external units are connected, the external
unit is automatically allocated to external unit
1 or external unit 2 by this unit.
! When this unit’s blue/white lead is connected
to the vehicle’s auto-antenna relay control
terminal, the vehicle’s antenna extends when
this unit’s source is turned on. To retract the
antenna, turn the source off.
Adjusting the volume
% Press + or – to adjust the sound level.
Touch panel key basic
operation
Activating the touch panel keys
¨
´
1 Information area
Shows the various information depending
on the source.
2 Touch panel keys
Touch to do various operations.
1 Touch the screen to activate the touch
panel keys corresponding to each source.
The touch panel keys appear on the display.
# To go to the next group of touch panel keys,
touch NEXT.
# To return to the previous group of touch panel
keys, touch PREV.
2 Touch Hide to hide the touch panel
keys.
# If you do not use the touch panel keys within
30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically
when selecting video sources.
Basic Operations
En
13
Section
04
B
a
s
i
c
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
Operating the menu
¨´ · '
·
1 Function Menu key
Touch to switch to the functions for each
source.
2 Audio Menu key
Touch to switch to the sound quality control
menu.
3 System Menu key
Touch to switch to the setup functions
menu.
4 Entertainment Menu key
Touch to switch to the entertainment setup
menu.
5 ESC key
Touch to cancel the control mode of func-
tions.
6 Back key
Touch to return to the previous display.
1 Touch AV Menu to display Menu.
The menu names are displayed and operable
ones are highlighted.
# When AV Menu is not displayed, you can dis-
play it by touching the screen.
2 Touch the desired key to display the
function names you want to operate.
3 Touch ESC to return to the display of
each source.
Operating the scroll bar and the
scrubber bar
¨¨¨
´
1 Scroll bar
2 Scrubber bar
This unit features touch operation of scroll bar
and scrubber bar.
If the menu has multiple pages or list has
more than five selections, you can drag the
scroll bar on the left side of the menu to view
the hidden objects. For the disc and USB sto-
rage device operation, you can specify the
playback point by dragging the scrubber bar.
Basic Operations
En
14
Section
04
Scroll bar operation
% If you see the scroll bar on the left side
of the screen, drag upward or downward
to view the hidden object.
# Touching or can also display the hidden
object.
Scrubber bar operation
This operation is available for the following
sources:
! DVD-video
! Video CD
! CD
! Compressed audio files (disc/USB)
! DivX
% Drag the scrubber bar on the screen to
specify the playback point.
# Drag operation is not available when the
scrubber bar is grayout.
Built-in DVD player basic
operations
Playing a disc
% Insert a DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) into
the disc loading slot.
Playback will automatically start.
# Be sure to turn up the label side of a DVD
(-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW).
# After a DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) has been
inserted, use touch panel keys to select the DVD
player.
# When a DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) is loaded
in this unit, touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select Disc.
# If you are playing a DVD or Video CD, a menu
may appear. Refer to Operating the DVD menu on
page 20 and PBC playback on page 24.
# When the automatic playback function is on,
this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automati-
cally start playback from the first chapter of the
first title. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on
page 22.
# To eject a DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW), press h
(eject).
Notes
! The DVD player plays one, standard, 12-cm
DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) at a time. Playing
back an 8-cm disc is not possible with this
unit.
! Do not insert anything other than a DVD (-R/-
RW), CD (-R/-RW) into the disc loading slot.
! If bookmark function is on, DVD playback re-
sumes from the selected point. For more de-
tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on
page 20.
! If a DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) contains a mix-
ture of various media file types such as DivX
and MP3, you can switch between media file
types to play. Refer to Switching the media file
type on the next page.
! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if
after you insert a disc the disc does not play,
check that the label side of the disc is up.
Press hto eject the disc, and check the disc
for damage before inserting it again.
! There is sometimes a delay between starting
up disc playback and the sound being issued.
When being read, Format Read is displayed.
! If an error message is displayed, refer to Error
messages on page 96.
Basic playback controls
The table below shows the basic controls for
playing discs. The following chapters cover
other playback features in more details.
Key What it does
f
Starts playback, pauses a disc that’s playing
or restarts a paused disc.
g Stops playback.
Basic Operations
En
15
Section
04
B
a
s
i
c
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
o
Skips to the start of the current track, chapter
or file, then to previous tracks/chapters/files.
! Performs fast reverse by touching and
holding o.
p
Skips to the next track, chapter or file.
! Performs fast forward by touching and
holding p.
Note
You may find with some DVD or Video CD discs
that some playback controls do not work in cer-
tain parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction.
Switching the media file type
When playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types such as DivX and
MP3, you can switch between media file types
to play.
! This unit allows playback of the following
media file type recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM
discs.
— Audio data (CD-DA)
— Compressed audio files
— DivX video files
— JPEG picture files
! In case of DVD-R/RW/ROM, this unit does
not allow playback of audio data (CD-DA)
or JPEG picture files.
% Touch Media to switch between media
file types.
Touch Media repeatedly to switch between
the following media file types:
CD (audio data (CD-DA))—ROM-Audio (com-
pressed audio)—DivX (DivX video files)—
JPEG (JPEG picture files)
Basic Operations
En
16
Section
04
Listening to the radio
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
· '
These are the basic steps necessary to operate
the radio. More advanced tuner operation is
explained starting in the following section.
Refer to the next page.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Band indicator
Shows which band the radio is tuned to, AM
or FM.
3 Preset number indicator
Shows which preset has been selected.
4 Frequency indicator
Shows the frequency to which the tuner is
tuned.
5 Local indicator
Appears when local seek tuning is on.
6 5(stereo) indicator
Appears when the selected frequency is
being broadcast in stereo.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Radio to select the radio.
2 Touch Band to select a band.
Touch Band until the desired band (FM1,
FM2, FM3 for FM or AM) is displayed.
3 To perform manual tuning, briefly
touch c or d.
# You can also perform manual tuning by press-
ing c or d (TRK).
4 To perform seek tuning, keep touching
c or d for about one second and release.
The tuner will scan the frequencies until a
broadcast strong enough for good reception is
found.
# You can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching
either c or d.
# If you keep touching c or d you can skip sta-
tions. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release
the key.
# You can also perform seek tuning by pressing
and holding c or d (TRK).
Note
Listening AM radio while an iPod is charged from
this unit may generate noise. In this case, discon-
nect the iPod from this unit.
Storing and recalling
broadcast frequencies
You can easily store up to six broadcast fre-
quencies for later recall.
! Six stations for each band can be stored in
memory.
1 Touch List to display the preset list.
2 When you find a frequency that you
want to store in memory keep touching
one of preset tuning keys P1 to P6 until the
beep sounds.
The selected radio station frequency has been
stored in memory.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key the radio station frequency is recalled
from memory.
# When P1 to P6 are not displayed, you can dis-
play them by touching List.
Radio
En
17
Section
05
R
a
d
i
o
# You can also use a and b to recall radio sta-
tion frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys
P1 to P6.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Introduction of advanced
tuner operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the frequency
display.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Storing the strongest
broadcast frequencies
BSM (best stations memory) automatically
stores the six strongest broadcast frequencies
in the order of their signal strength.
! Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have saved using P1 to P6.
% Touch BSM on the function menu to
turn BSM on.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be
stored under preset tuning keys P1 to P6 in
order of their signal strength. When finished,
BSM stops flashing.
# To cancel the storage process, touch BSM
again.
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals
for good reception.
% Touch Local on the function menu to
set the sensitivity.
Touch Local repeatedly until the desired level
of sensitivity appears in the display.
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and
two levels for AM:
FM: Off—Level1—Level2—Level3—Level4
AM: Off—Level1—Level2
Larger setting number is higher level. The
highest level setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings let
you receive progressively weaker stations.
Radio
En
18
Section
05
Watching a DVD
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
' · · ·
These are the basic steps necessary to play a
DVD with your DVD player. More advanced
DVD operation is explained starting in the fol-
lowing section. Refer to page 23.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Title number indicator
Shows the title currently playing.
3 Chapter number indicator
Shows the chapter currently playing.
4 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent chapter.
5 Audio language indicator
Shows which audio language has been se-
lected.
6 Digital format indicator
Shows when a signal encoded in the corre-
sponding format is detected.
7 Channel/sampling frequency/quantiza-
tion bits
Depending on the file format, some informa-
tion may not be displayed.
8 Subtitle language indicator
Shows which subtitle language has been
selected.
9 Viewing angle indicator
Shows which viewing angle has been se-
lected.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select the DVD player.
# If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se-
lect Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit.
(Refer to page 15.)
# With some discs, a menu may be displayed.
(Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next
page.)
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
3 To skip back or forward to another
chapter, touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next
chapter. Touching oonce skips to the start
of the current chapter. Touching it again will
skip to the previous chapter.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
chapter by pressing c or d (TRK).
4 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
If you keep touching oor pfor five sec-
onds, the icon mor nis highlighted.
When this happens, fast reverse/fast forward
continues even if you release oor p. To
resume playback at a desired point, touch
f.
# Fast forward/fast reverse may not be possible
at certain locations on some discs. If this hap-
pens, normal playback automatically resumes.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRK).
Playing DVD discs
En
19
Section
06
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
D
V
D
d
i
s
c
s
Skipping back or forward
to another title
% To skip back or forward to another title,
touch a or b.
Touching a skips to the start of the next title.
Touching b skips to the start of the previous
title.
Title numbers are displayed for eight sec-
onds.
Operating the DVD menu
Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc
contents using a menu.
! You can display the menu by touching
Menu or Top Menu while a disc is playing.
Touching either of these keys again lets you
start playback from the location selected
from the menu. For details, refer to the in-
structions provided with the disc.
Using DVD menu direct touch
control
This function allows you to operate the DVD
menu by touching the menu item directly.
% Touch the desired menu item on the
DVD menu directly.
# Depending on the contents of DVD discs, this
function may not work properly. In this case,
using touch panel keys operate the DVD menu.
Using the touch panel keys
1 Touch to display touch panel keys
to operate the DVD menu.
# When the touch panel keys are not displayed,
you can display them by touching the screen.
# To switch to the DVD menu direct touch con-
trol, touch Touch.
2 Touch a, b, c or d to select the desired
menu item.
3 Touch .
Playback starts from the selected menu item.
# The way to display the menu differs depending
on the disc.
Resume playback (Bookmark)
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-
back from a selected scene the next time the
disc is loaded.
% During playback, touch Bookmark at
the point you want to resume playback
next time.
The selected scene will be bookmarked so that
playback resumes from that point next time.
# To clear the bookmark on a disc, keep touch-
ing Bookmark during playback.
# You can also bookmark a disc by pressing and
holding hat the point you want to bookmark.
Next time you load the disc, playback will resume
from the bookmarked point. Note that you can
only bookmark one disc using this method. To
clear the bookmark on a disc, press h.
# You can bookmark up to six discs including
the disc that is bookmarked using h.
# The oldest bookmark is replaced by the new
one.
CM skip/CM back
This function skips a reproduced image for a
specified time. If the currently playing disc
contains commercials, it is possible to skip
them.
% To skip progressively backward or for-
ward, touch or .
Each time you touch or it changes steps
in the following order:
CM back
5 sec.—15 sec.—30 sec.—1.0 min.—2.0
min.—3.0 min.—0 sec.
CM skip
30 sec.—1.0 min.—1.5 min.—2.0 min.—3.0
min.—5.0 min.—10.0 min.—0 sec.
Playing DVD discs
En
20
Section
06
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
% Touch rduring playback.
Each time you touch r, you move ahead one
frame.
# To return to normal playback, touch f.
# With some discs, images may be unclear dur-
ing frame-by-frame playback.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
% Keep touching runtil is displayed
during playback.
The icon is displayed, forward slow motion
playback begins.
# Touching qor rduring slow motion play-
back, you can change the playback speed in four
steps as follows:
1/16—1/8—1/4—1/2
# To return to normal playback, touch f.
Notes
! There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
! With some discs, images may be unclear dur-
ing slow motion playback.
! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Pausing playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Searching for the part you
want to play
You can use the search function to find the
part you want to play.
You can select Title (title), Chapter (chapter),
Time (time) or 10key (numeric keypad).
! Chapter search and time search are not
possible when disc playback has been
stopped.
1 Touch Search.
2 Touch the desired search option (e.g.,
Chapter).
3 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired num-
ber.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
# In the time search function, to select 1 hour
11 minutes, convert the time into 071 minutes 00
seconds and touch 0, 7, 1, 0 and 0 in that order.
4 Touch .
This starts playback from the selected part.
Note
With discs featuring a menu, you can also touch
Menu or Top Menu and then make selections
from the displayed menu.
Changing audio language
during playback (Multi-audio)
DVDs can provide audio playback with differ-
ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di-
gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi-
audio recordings, you can switch between lan-
guages/audio systems during playback.
% Touch Audio during playback.
Each time you touch Audio it switches be-
tween audio systems.
Notes
! With some DVDs, switching between lan-
guages/audio systems may only be possible
using a menu display.
! You can also switch between languages/audio
systems using Setup. For details, refer to Set-
ting the audio language on page 46.
Playing DVD discs
En
21
Section
06
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
D
V
D
d
i
s
c
s
! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If
this unit’s optical digital outputs are not con-
nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select
an audio setting other than DTS.
! Display indications such as Dolby D and
5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on
the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback
may not be with the same audio system as
that indicated.
! Touching Audio during fast forward/fast re-
verse, pause or slow motion playback returns
you to normal playback.
Changing the subtitle
language during playback
(Multi-subtitle)
With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings,
you can switch between subtitle languages
during playback.
% Touch Subtitle during playback.
Each time you touch Subtitle it switches be-
tween subtitle languages.
Notes
! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle
languages may only be possible using a menu
display.
! You can also switch between subtitle lan-
guages using Setup. For details, refer to Set-
ting the subtitle language on page 46.
! Touching Subtitle during fast forward/fast re-
verse, pause or slow motion playback returns
you to normal playback.
Changing the viewing angle
during playback (Multi-angle)
With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot
from multiple angles) recordings, you can
switch among viewing angles during play-
back.
! During playback of a scene shot from mul-
tiple angles, the angle icon is dis-
played. Turn angle icon display on or off
using Setup. For details, refer to Setting the
angle icon display on page 47.
% Touch Angle during playback of a scene
shot from multiple angles.
Note
Touching Angle during fast forward/fast reverse,
pause or slow motion playback returns you to
normal playback.
Return to the specified scene
You can return to the specified scene where
the DVD you are currently playing has been
preprogrammed to return.
% Touch Return to return to the specified
scene.
# If a specified scene has not been prepro-
grammed in DVD disc, this function is not possi-
ble.
Automatic playback of DVDs
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-
cally and start playback from the first chapter
of the first title.
! Some DVDs may not operate properly. If
this function is not fully operated, turn this
function off and start playback.
% Touch Auto Play to turn automatic play-
back on.
# To turn automatic playback off, touch
Auto Play again.
# When the automatic playback is on, you can-
not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to
Repeating play on the next page).
Playing DVD discs
En
22
Section
06
Introduction of advanced
DVD operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Repeating play
There are three repeat play ranges for DVD
playback.
% Touch Repeat on the function menu to
select the repeat range.
! Disc – Play through the current disc
! Chapter – Repeat the current chapter
! Title – Repeat the current title
# If you perform chapter search or fast forward/
reverse, the repeat play range changes to Disc.
Selecting audio output
When playing DVD video discs recorded with
LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output.
! This function is not possible when disc
playback has been stopped.
! If you select Linear PCM, when playing a
disc recorded on a dual mono mode, you
can operate this function. (Refer to Setting
for digital output on page 49.)
% Touch L/R Select on the function menu
to select the audio output.
Touch L/R Select repeatedly until the desired
audio output appears in the display.
! L+R – left and right
! Left – left
! Right – right
! Mix – mixing left and right
# Depending on the disc and the playback loca-
tion on the disc, the function may not be select-
able, indicating that operating this function is not
possible.
Playing DVD discs
En
23
Section
06
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
D
V
D
d
i
s
c
s
Watching a Video CD
´´´ ¨¨¨
These are the basic steps necessary to play a
Video CD with your DVD player. More ad-
vanced Video CD operation is explained start-
ing in the following section. Refer to the next
page.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Track number indicator
Shows the number of the track playing.
3 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent track.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select the DVD player.
# If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se-
lect Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit.
(Refer to page 15.)
# With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback
control) function, a menu is displayed. (Refer to
PBC playback on this page.)
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
3 To skip back or forward to another
track, briefly touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next
track. Touching oonce skips to the start of
the current track. Touching it again will skip to
the previous track.
# During PBC playback, a menu may be dis-
played if you perform these operations.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
track by pressing c or d (TRK).
4 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
If you keep touching oor pfor five sec-
onds, the icon mor nis highlighted.
When this happens, fast reverse/fast forward
continues even if you release oor p. To
resume playback at a desired point, touch
f.
# Fast forward/fast reverse may not be possible
at certain locations on some discs. If this hap-
pens, normal playback automatically resumes.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRK).
PBC playback
During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC
(Playback Control), PBC ON is displayed. You
can operate PBC menu with 10Key.
1 When PBC menu is displayed, touch
Search and then touch 10key.
# Depending on the discs, the menu may be
two or more pages long. In such case, touch o
or pto display the next or previous menu.
2 Touch 0 to 9 corresponding to a menu
number and then touch to start play-
back.
Playback starts from the selected menu item.
3 Touch ESC to hide the touch panel keys.
Notes
! You can display the menu by touching Return
during PBC playback. For details, refer to the
instructions provided with the disc.
! PBC playback of Video CD cannot be can-
celed.
Playing Video CDs
En
24
Section
07
! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC
(Playback Control), PBC ON, search and time
search functions cannot be used nor can you
select the range for repeat play.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
% Touch rduring playback.
Each time you touch r, you move ahead one
frame.
# To return to normal playback, touch f.
# With some discs, images may be unclear dur-
ing frame-by-frame playback.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
% Keep touching runtil is displayed
during playback.
The icon is displayed, forward slow motion
playback begins.
# Touching qor rduring slow motion play-
back, you can change the playback speed in four
steps as follows:
1/16—1/8—1/4—1/2
# To return to normal playback, touch f.
Notes
! There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
! With some discs, images may be unclear dur-
ing slow motion playback.
! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Pausing playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Searching for a desired
scene, starting playback
from a specified time
You can use the search function to search for
a desired scene by specifying a track, and the
time search function to specify the time on a
disc at which play starts.
! During playback of Video CDs featuring
PBC (playback control), this function can-
not be operated.
! Time search is not possible when disc play-
back has been stopped.
1 Touch Search.
2 Touch Track (track), Time (time) or
10key (numeric keypad).
3 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired num-
ber.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
# In the time search function, to select 1 hour
11 minutes, convert the time into 071 minutes 00
seconds and touch 0, 7, 1, 0 and 0 in that order.
4 Touch .
This starts playback from the selected
scene.
Introduction of advanced
Video CD operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Playing Video CDs
En
25
Section
07
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
V
i
d
e
o
C
D
s
Repeating play
There are two repeat play ranges for the Video
CD playback: Track (track repeat) and Disc
(disc repeat).
! During playback of Video CDs featuring
PBC (playback control), this function can-
not be operated.
% Touch Repeat on the function menu to
select the repeat range.
! Disc – Repeat the current disc
! Track – Repeat the current track
# If you perform track search or fast forward/re-
verse, the repeat play range changes to Disc.
Selecting audio output
You can switch between stereo and monaural
audio output.
! This function is not possible when disc
playback has been stopped.
% Touch L/R Select on the function menu
to select the audio output.
Touch L/R Select repeatedly until the desired
audio output appears in the display.
! L+R – left and right
! Left – left
! Right – right
! Mix – mixing left and right
Playing Video CDs
En
26
Section
07
Listening to a CD
´´´ ¨¨¨
·
'
·

These are the basic steps necessary to play a
CD with your DVD player. More advanced CD
operation is explained starting in the following
section. Refer to the next page.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Track number indicator
Shows the number of the track playing.
3 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent track.
4 Disc title indicator
Shows the title of the currently playing disc
only when playing CD TEXT discs.
5 Disc artist name indicator
Shows the artist name of the currently play-
ing disc only when playing CD TEXT disc.
6 Track name list display
Shows the track name list only when playing
CD TEXT disc.
7 Track artist name indicator
Shows the artist name of the currently play-
ing track only when playing CD TEXT disc.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select the DVD player.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
# If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se-
lect Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit.
(Refer to page 15.)
2 To skip back or forward to another
track, briefly touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next
track. Touching oonce skips to the start of
the current track. Touching it again will skip to
the previous track.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
track by pressing c or d (TRK).
3 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRK).
Note
If specific information has not been recorded on
a CD TEXT disc, No xxxx will be displayed (e.g.,
No Name).
Selecting tracks from the
track title list
Track title list lets you see the list of tracks on
a disc and select one of them to play back.
When playing a CD TEXT disc, track titles are
displayed.
1 Touch List.
2 Touch your favorite track title.
That selection will begin to play.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Pausing playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Playing CDs
En
27
Section
08
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
C
D
s
Switching the media file type
If a disc contains a mixture of various media
file types such as DivX and MP3, you can
switch between media file types to play. Refer
to Switching the media file type on page 16.
% Touch Media to switch between media
file types.
Using advanced sound
retriever
Advanced sound retriever function automati-
cally enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound.
% Touch ASR repeatedly to select the de-
sired setting.
Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2
# ASR2 is more effective than ASR1.
Note
When you use this unit with a multi-channel pro-
cessor (DEQ-P8000) and switch the advanced
sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2, the vo-
lume will become slightly lower. The volume will
become much lower for ASR2 than it will for
ASR1. Take care when you increase the volume
for ASR2 and then switch to Off, because the vo-
lume will suddenly seem much louder.
Introduction of advanced
CD operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Repeating play
There are two repeat play ranges for the CD
playback: Track (track repeat) and Disc (disc
repeat).
% Touch Repeat on the function menu to
select the repeat range.
! Disc – Repeat the current disc
! Track – Repeat the current track
# If you perform track search or fast forward/re-
verse, the repeat play range changes to Disc.
# When playing discs with compressed audio
and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play performs
within the currently playing data type even if Disc
is selected.
Playing tracks in random order
Random play lets you play back tracks on the
CD in a random order.
% Touch Random on the function menu to
turn random play on.
Tracks play in a random order.
# To turn random play off, touch Random
again.
Scanning tracks of a CD
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of
each track on the CD.
1 Touch Scan on the function menu to
turn scan play on.
The first 10 seconds of each track is played.
2 When you find the desired track touch
Scan again.
# After scanning of a CD is finished, normal
playback of the tracks will begin again.
Playing CDs
En
28
Section
08
Listening to compressed audio
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
'
·

·
·
These are the basic steps necessary to play a
compressed audio with your DVD player. More
advanced compressed audio operation is ex-
plained starting in the following section. Refer
to the next page.
1 Source icon
Shows the media type currently playing.
2 Folder number indicator
Shows the folder number currently playing.
3 File number indicator
Shows the file number currently playing.
4 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent file.
5 File name indicator
Shows the name of the currently playing
file.
6 Album title indicator
Shows the title of the currently playing
album.
7 Artist name indicator
Shows the artist name of the currently play-
ing file.
8 Track title indicator
Shows the name of the currently playing
track.
9 Folder name indicator
Shows the name of the currently playing
folder.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select the DVD player.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
# If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se-
lect Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit.
(Refer to page 15.)
2 Touch a or b to select a folder.
# You cannot select a folder that does not have
a compressed audio file recorded in it.
3 To skip back or forward to another file,
touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next file.
Touching oonce skips to the start of the
current file. Touching it again will skip to the
previous file.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
file by pressing c or d (TRK).
4 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRK).
Notes
! This DVD player can play back a compressed
audio recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-
R/RW/ROM. (Please see the following section
for files that can be played back. Refer to page
102)
! Playback is carried out in order of file number.
Folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If
folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback
commences with folder 02.)
! When playing back files recorded as VBR
(variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be
correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse
operations are used.
! If specific information has not been recorded
on a compressed audio disc, No xxxx will be
displayed (e.g., No Name).
Playing compressed audio
En
29
Section
09
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
c
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d
a
u
d
i
o
! If the characters recorded on the disc are not
compatible with this unit, those characters
will not be displayed.
! Text information may not be correctly dis-
played depending on the recorded en-
vironment.
Selecting files from the file
name list
File name list lets you see the list of file names
(or folder names) and select one of them to
playback.
1 Touch List.
2 Touch your favorite file name (or folder
name).
That selection will begin to play.
# You can start playback throughout the se-
lected list by touching .
# When you have selected a folder, a list of the
names of the files (or the folders) in it can be
viewed. Repeat this operation to select the de-
sired file name.
# To return to the previous list (the folder one
level higher), touch Back.
# To return to folder 01 (ROOT), touch and hold
Back. However, if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no
files, playback commences with folder 02.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Pausing playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Switching the media file type
If a disc contains a mixture of various media
file types such as DivX and MP3, you can
switch between media file types to play. Refer
to Switching the media file type on page 16.
% Touch Media to switch between media
file types.
Using advanced sound
retriever
Advanced sound retriever function automati-
cally enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound.
% Touch ASR repeatedly to select the de-
sired setting.
Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2
# ASR2 is more effective than ASR1.
Note
When you use this unit with a multi-channel pro-
cessor (DEQ-P8000) and switch the advanced
sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2, the vo-
lume will become slightly lower. The volume will
become much lower for ASR2 than it will for
ASR1. Take care when you increase the volume
for ASR2 and then switch to Off, because the vo-
lume will suddenly seem much louder.
Introduction of advanced
compressed audio operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Playing compressed audio
En
30
Section
09
Repeating play
For compressed audio playback, there are
three repeat play ranges: Folder (folder re-
peat), File (one-track repeat) and Disc (repeat
all tracks).
% Touch Repeat on the function menu to
select the repeat range.
! Disc – Repeat all tracks
! File – Repeat the current track
! Folder – Repeat the current folder
# If you select another folder during repeat play,
the repeat play range changes to Disc.
# If you perform track search or fast forward/re-
verse during File, the repeat play range changes
to Folder.
# When Folder is selected, it is not possible to
play back a subfolder of that folder.
# When playing discs with compressed audio
and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play performs
within the currently playing data type even if Disc
is selected.
Playing tracks in random order
Random play lets you play back tracks in a
random order within the repeat range, Folder
and Disc.
% Touch Random on the function menu to
turn random play on.
Tracks will play in a random order within the
previously selected repeat range.
# To turn random play off, touch Random
again.
Scanning folders and tracks
While you are using Folder, the beginning of
each track in the selected folder plays for
about 10 seconds. When you are using Disc,
the beginning of the first track of each folder
is played for about 10 seconds.
1 Touch Scan on the function menu to
turn scan play on.
The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur-
rent folder (or the first track of each folder) is
played.
2 When you find the desired track (or
folder) touch Scan again.
# After track or folder scanning is finished, nor-
mal playback of the tracks will begin again.
Playing compressed audio
En
31
Section
09
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
c
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d
a
u
d
i
o
Watching a DivX/JPEG
´´´ ¨¨¨
'
···
These are the basic steps necessary to play a
DivX/JPEG with your DVD player. More ad-
vanced DivX/JPEG operation is explained start-
ing in the following section. Refer to page 35.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Folder number indicator
Shows the folder number currently playing.
3 File number indicator
Shows the file number currently playing.
4 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent file.
! When playing a JPEG disc, play time in-
dicator does not appear.
5 File name indicator
Shows the name of the currently playing
file.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select the DVD player.
# If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se-
lect Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit.
(Refer to page 15.)
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
3 Touch a or b to select a folder.
# You cannot select a folder that does not have
a DivX/JPEG file recorded in it.
4 To skip back or forward to another file,
touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next file.
Touching oonce skips to the start of the
current file. Touching it again will skip to the
previous file.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
file by pressing c or d (TRK).
5 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
When DivX disc is playing, if you keep touch-
ing oor pfor five seconds, the icon m
or nis highlighted. When this happens, fast
reverse/fast forward continues even if you re-
lease oor p. To resume playback at a de-
sired point, touch f.
# This is fast forward and reverse operation only
for the file being played. This operation is can-
celed when the previous or next file is reached.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRK).
# When playing JPEG file, performing this op-
eration enables you to search every 10 files.
Notes
! This DVD player can play back a DivX file re-
corded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/
ROM. (Please see the following section for
files that can be played back. Refer to page
104.)
! This unit can play back a JPEG file recorded
on CD-R/RW/ROM or USB storage device.
(Please see the following section for files that
can be played back. Refer to page 104.)
! Playback is carried out in order of file number.
Folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If
folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback
commences with folder 02.)
Playing DivX/JPEG files
En
32
Section
10
Viewing a JPEG slideshow
When loading a CD/CD-R/RW containing
JPEG picture files, this unit automatically
starts a slideshow from the first folder/picture
on the disc. The player displays the pictures in
each folder in alphabetical order.
The table below shows the controls for viewing
a slideshow.
Key What it does
f
Starts the slideshow, pauses the slideshow or
restarts a paused disc.
o Displays the previous picture.
p Displays the next picture.
Rotates the displayed picture 90° clockwise.
Playing DivX
®
VOD content
Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content
may only be playable a fixed number of times.
When you load a disc containing this type of
DivX VOD content, the remaining number of
plays is shown on-screen and you then have
the option of playing the disc (thereby using
up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If
you load a disc that contains expired DivX
VOD content (for example, content that has
zero remaining plays), Rental Expired. is dis-
played.
! If your DivX VOD content allows an unlim-
ited number of plays, then you may load
the disc into your player and play the con-
tent as often as you like, and no message
will be displayed.
! Playable number of times is displayed with
Remaining Views:.
Important
! In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit,
you first need to register the unit with your
DivX VOD content provider. About your regis-
tration code, refer to Displaying your DivX
®
VOD registration code on page 49.
! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Di-
gital Rights Management) system. This re-
stricts playback of content to specific,
registered devices.
% If the message is displayed after load-
ing a disc containing DivX VOD content,
touch Play.
Playback of the DivX VOD content will start.
# To skip to the next file, touch Next Play.
# If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con-
tent, touch Stop.
Selecting files from the file
name list
File name list lets you see the list of file names
(or folder names) and select one of them to
playback.
1 Touch List.
2 Touch your favorite file name (or folder
name).
That selection will begin to play.
# When you have selected a folder, a list of the
names of the files (or the folders) in it can be
viewed. Repeat this operation to select the de-
sired file name.
# You can start playback throughout the se-
lected list by touching .
# To return to the previous list (the folder one
level higher), touch Back.
# To return to folder 01 (ROOT), touch and hold
Back. However, if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no
files, playback commences with folder 02.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Playing DivX/JPEG files
En
33
Section
10
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
D
i
v
X
/
J
P
E
G
f
i
l
e
s
Displaying text information
on DivX/JPEG disc
Text information recorded on a DivX/JPEG disc
can be displayed.
% Touch INFO.
Touch INFO repeatedly to switch between the
following settings:
Folder Name (folder name)—File Name (file
name)
# If the characters recorded on the disc are not
compatible with this unit, those characters will
not be displayed.
Pausing playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Switching the media file type
If a disc contains a mixture of various media
file types such as DivX and MP3, you can
switch between media file types to play. Refer
to Switching the media file type on page 16.
% Touch Media to switch between media
file types.
Searching for the part you
want to play
You can use the time search function to speci-
fy the time on a disc at which play starts.
! This function is available for DivX disc.
! This function is not possible when disc
playback has been stopped.
1 Touch Search.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired num-
ber.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
# To select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time
into 071 minutes 00 seconds and touch 0, 7, 1, 0
and 0 in that order.
3 Touch .
This starts playback from the selected part.
Changing audio language
during playback (Multi-audio)
You can switch audio language during play-
back when playing a file recorded with dialog
in two or more languages.
! This function is available for DivX disc.
% Touch Audio during playback.
Each time you touch Audio it switches be-
tween audio systems.
# Touching Audio during fast forward/fast re-
verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you
to normal playback.
Changing the subtitle
language during playback
(Multi-subtitle)
You can switch subtitle language during play-
back when playing file recorded with subtitles
in one or more languages.
! This function is available for DivX disc.
% Touch Subtitle during playback.
Each time you touch Subtitle it switches be-
tween subtitle languages.
# Touching Subtitle during fast forward/fast re-
verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you
to normal playback.
Capture an image in JPEG files
Image data can be captured in order to use it
for wallpaper. Images can be stored in this
unit, and recall easily.
! This function is available for JPEG disc.
Playing DivX/JPEG files
En
34
Section
10
! This unit can store only one image data.
Old image is overwitten with new one.
1 Touch fto pause the slideshow
when the desired image is displayed.
2 Touch Capture.
Captureing the image is displayed.
3 When Do you save this image? is dis-
played, touch Yes.
While storing the image to this unit, Saving
the image Don't switch off the battery. is
displayed. After stored completely, Image
saved is displayed.
# To cancel the strorage process, touch No.
Introduction of advanced
DivX/JPEG operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Repeating play
For DivX video file playback, there are three re-
peat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat), File
(file repeat) and Disc (repeat all files).
For JPEG picture file playback, there are two
repeat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat) and
Disc (repeat all files).
% Touch Repeat on the function menu to
select the repeat range.
! Disc – Repeat all files
! Folder – Repeat the current folder
! File – Repeat just the current file
# If you select another folder during repeat play,
the repeat play range changes to Disc.
# If you perform track search or fast forward/re-
verse during File, the repeat play range changes
to Folder.
# When Folder is selected, it is not possible to
play back a subfolder of that folder.
Playing tracks in random order
When playing a JPEG disc, random play lets
you play back files in a random order within
the repeat range, Folder and Disc.
! This function is available for JPEG disc.
% Touch Random on the function menu to
turn random play on.
Files will play in a random order within the pre-
viously selected Folder or Disc ranges.
# To turn random play off, touch Random
again.
Playing DivX/JPEG files
En
35
Section
10
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
D
i
v
X
/
J
P
E
G
f
i
l
e
s
Basic Operations
´´´ ¨¨¨
'
···
For details about the supported device, refer to
Portable audio player compatibility on page 9.
Operation of JPEG in a USB storage device is
the same as JPEG on a disc.
1 Source icon
Shows the media type currently playing.
2 Folder number indicator
Shows the folder number currently playing.
3 File number indicator
Shows the file number currently playing.
! Last four-digit can be displayed as the
file number.
4 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent file.
5 Song information
Shows detailed information of currently
playing song.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
USB to select the USB.
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
2 Touch a or b to select a folder.
# You cannot select a folder that does not have
a compressed audio file recorded in it.
3 To skip back or forward to another file,
touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next file.
Touching oonce skips to the start of the
current file. Touching it again will skip to the
previous file.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
file by pressing c or d (TRK).
4 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRK).
Notes
! Optimum performance of this unit may not be
obtained depending on the connected USB
portable audio player/USB memory.
! If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback
commences with folder 02.
! If an error message or icon is displayed, refer
to Error messages on page 96.
! When the USB portable audio player having
battery charging function is connected to this
unit and the ignition switch is set to ACC or
ON, the battery is charged.
! You can disconnect the USB portable audio
player/USB memory anytime you want to fin-
ish listening to it.
! If the characters recorded on the audio file are
not compatible with this unit, those charac-
ters will not be displayed.
! Text information may not be correctly dis-
played depending on the recorded en-
vironment.
Selecting files from the file
name list
The operation is the same as that of the built-
in DVD player.
Refer to Selecting files from the file name list
on page 30.
Playing songs in a USB storage device
En
36
Section
11
Pausing compressed audio
playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Switching the media file type
The operation is the same as that of the built-
in DVD player.
If a USB portable audio player/USB memory
contains compressed audio files and JPEG
file, you can switch between media file types
to play. Refer to Switching the media file type
on page 16.
Using advanced sound
retriever
Advanced sound retriever function automati-
cally enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound.
% Touch ASR repeatedly to select the de-
sired setting.
Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2
# ASR2 is more effective than ASR1.
Note
When you use this unit with a multi-channel pro-
cessor (DEQ-P8000) and switch the advanced
sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2, the vo-
lume will become slightly lower. The volume will
become much lower for ASR2 than it will for
ASR1. Take care when you increase the volume
for ASR2 and then switch to Off, because the vo-
lume will suddenly seem much louder.
Introduction to advanced
operations
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Function and operation
Repeat, Random and Scan operations are ba-
sically the same as that of the built-in DVD
player.
Function name Operation
Repeat
Refer to Repeating play on page 31.
However, the repeat play ranges
you can select are different from
that of the built-in DVD player. The
repeat play ranges of the USB por-
table audio player/USB memory
are:
! File – Repeat just the current
file
! Folder – Repeat the current
folder
! All – Repeat all files
Random
Refer to Playing tracks in random
order on page 31.
Scan
Refer to Scanning folders and
tracks on page 31.
Notes
! If you select another folder during repeat play,
the repeat play range changes to All.
! If you perform track search or fast forward/re-
verse during File, the repeat play range
changes to Folder.
! When Folder is selected, it is not possible to
play back a subfolder of that folder.
! After file or folder scanning is finished, nor-
mal playback of the files begins again.
Playing songs in a USB storage device
En
37
Section
11
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
s
o
n
g
s
i
n
a
U
S
B
s
t
o
r
a
g
e
d
e
v
i
c
e
Basic Operations
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
'
! You can use this unit to control an iPod by
using a cable (e.g., CD-IU50), which is sold
separately.
! If an iPod with video capabilities is con-
nected to this unit via interface cable (e.g.
CD-IU50V), which is sold separately, you can
enjoy the video contents of the iPod as the
iPod source. In this case, set the AUX1 to
iPod. Refer to Switching the auxiliary setting
on page 50.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Repeat indicator
Shows when repeat range is set to or .
3 Song number indicator
Up to 65 535 can be displayed as the song
number.
4 Shuffle indicator
Shows when random play is set to Songs or
Albums.
5 Song information
Shows detailed information of currently
playing song.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
iPod to select the iPod.
While connected to this unit, PIONEER, Acces-
sory Attached or (check mark) is displayed
on the iPod.
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
# Before connecting the dock connector of this
unit to the iPod, disconnect the headphones from
the iPod.
# Depending on the model of iPod or the data
size in the iPod, there may be a delay to start play-
ing after connection.
# After the iPod has been connected to this
unit, use touch panel keys to select the iPod.
# When removing the iPod from this unit, this
unit is turned off.
2 To skip back or forward to another
song/video, touch oor p.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
song/video by pressing c or d (TRK).
3 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
When video is playing, if you keep touching
oor pfor five seconds, the icon mor
nis highlighted. When this happens, fast
reverse/fast forward continues even if you re-
lease oor p. To resume playback at a de-
sired point, touch f.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRK).
4 When playing a file with chapter, touch
oor pto select a chapter.
Notes
! Read the precautions for iPod in the following
section. Refer to page 104.
! If an error message or icon is displayed, refer
to Error messages on page 96.
! Connect directly the dock connector cable to
the iPod so that this unit works properly.
! When the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON,
the iPod’s battery is charged while the iPod is
connected to this unit.
! While the iPod is connected to this unit, the
iPod cannot be turned on or off.
! The iPod is turned off about two minutes after
the ignition switch is set to OFF.
! If specific information is not recorded on the
iPod, No xxxx will be displayed (e.g.,
No Name).
Using iPod
En
38
Section
12
! If the characters recorded on the iPod are not
compatible with this unit, those characters
are not displayed.
! This unit can display the album art. While
loading the album art information from iPod,
functions may not work properly.
— List operation may not function promptly.
— Time display and actual time may not
match.
If many songs and album art have been stored
in iPod, loading may take long time.
Playing video
This unit can play video if an iPod with video
capabilities is connected.
! To pause video playback, touch MENU.
! This unit can play back “Movies”, “Music vi-
deos”, “Video Podcast” and “TV show”
which are downloaded from iTunes store.
! Change the video setting on the iPod so
that the iPod can output the video to an ex-
ternal device, before you display the video
screen.
! iPod video image is not displayed on the
PAL rear monitor.
— When the control mode is set to iPod, it
is possible to change the signal be-
tween PAL and NTSC from iPod.
— When the control mode is set to this
unit, it is not possible to display the
video on the PAL monitor.
— For about control mode, see the follow-
ing section. Refer to Operating this
unit’s iPod function from your iPod on
page 41.
! For details, refer to the iPod’s manuals.
1 Touch MENU to display iPod menus.
2 Touch Video.
# To return to the music operation screen, touch
Music.
3 Play video on the iPod.
Browsing for a song/video
Operations to control an iPod with this unit is
designed to be as close to the iPod as possible
to make operation and song/video search
easy.
! If the characters recorded on the iPod are
not compatible with this unit, those charac-
ters are not displayed.
Searching songs/videos by
category
1 Touch MENU to display iPod menus.
2 Touch one of the categories in which
you want to search for a song/video.
When browsing for a song
! Playlists (playlists)
! Artists (artists)
! Albums (albums)
! Songs (songs)
! Podcasts (podcasts)
! Genres (genres)
! Composers (composers)
! Audiobooks (audiobooks)
When browsing for a video
! Video Playlists (video playlists)
! Movies (movies)
! Music Videos (music videos)
! Video Podcasts (video podcasts)
! TV Shows (TV shows)
3 Touch a list title that you want to play.
Repeat this operation until you find the de-
sired song/video.
# You can start playback throughout the se-
lected list by touching .
# To return to the previous menu, touch Back.
4 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Using iPod
En
39
Section
12
U
s
i
n
g
i
P
o
d
Searching by alphabet in the list
1 Select a category. (Refer to Searching
songs/videos by category on the previous
page.)
2 When a list for the selected category is
displayed, touch ABC to switch to alphabet
search mode.
Alphabet search mode is displayed.
3 Touch c or d to select the first letter
you are looking for.
4 Touch to show entries starting with
the letter you chose.
While searching, Searching flashes. In this
condition, touch panel key operation is not
available.
# To refine the search with a different letter,
touch Cancel.
5 Touch a list title that you want to play.
Repeat this operation until you find the de-
sired song/video.
# You can start playback throughout the se-
lected list by touching .
# To return to the previous menu, touch Back.
Displaying text
information on iPod Video
% Touch INFO.
Song Title (song title)—Artist Name (artist
name)—Album Title (album title)
# If specific information is not recorded on the
iPod, No xxxx will be displayed (e.g., No Name).
# If the characters recorded on the iPod are not
compatible with this unit, those characters are
not displayed.
Pausing playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Using advanced sound
retriever
Advanced sound retriever function automati-
cally enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound.
% Touch ASR repeatedly to select the de-
sired setting.
Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2
# ASR2 is more effective than ASR1.
Note
When you use this unit with a multi-channel pro-
cessor (DEQ-P8000) and switch the advanced
sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2, the vo-
lume will become slightly lower. The volume will
become much lower for ASR2 than it will for
ASR1. Take care when you increase the volume
for ASR2 and then switch to Off, because the vo-
lume will suddenly seem much louder.
Repeating play
For playback of the songs/videos on the iPod,
there are two repeat play ranges: (repeat
one song/video) and (repeat all songs/vi-
deos in the list).
! While repeat play range is set to , you
cannot select the other songs/videos. How-
ever, you can select other songs/videos
while browsing.
% Touch to select the repeat range.
! – Repeat just the current song/video
! – Repeat all songs/videos in the selected
list
Using iPod
En
40
Section
12
Playing songs/videos in a
random order (shuffle)
For playback of songs/videos on the iPod,
there are two random play methods: Songs
(play back songs/videos in a random order)
and Albums (play back albums in a random
order).
% Touch to select the random play
method.
! Songs – Play back songs/videos in the se-
lected list in random order.
! Albums – Play back songs/videos from a
randomly selected album in order.
# To cancel the random play, touch repeat-
edly until the shuffle icon is turned off.
Playing all songs in a
random order (shuffle all)
This method plays all songs on the iPod ran-
domly.
% Touch to turn shuffle all on.
All songs on the iPod play randomly.
Operating this unit’s iPod
function from your iPod
This unit’s iPod function can be operated from
your iPod. Sound can be heard from the car’s
speakers, and operation can be conducted
from your iPod.
! While this function is in use, even if the
ignition key is turned off, the iPod will not
be turned off. To turn off power, operate the
iPod.
1 Touch to switch the control mode
to iPod.
# Touching switches the control mode to
this unit.
# Even if this function is performed, track up/
down, chapter up/down, fast forward/reverse and
play/pause can be operated from this unit. Also,
it is possible to display the text information while
playing back video.
2 Operate the connected iPod to select a
song/video and play.
Selecting songs from lists
related to the currently
playing song
Lists related to the currently playing song are
displayed. You can select songs from the fol-
lowing lists.
— Album list of currently playing artist
— Song list of currently playing album
— Album list of currently playing genre
! Depending on the number of files in the
iPod, there may be a delay when displaying
a list.
1 Touch Link Play.
Link play selection screen is displayed.
2 Touch a desired mode.
! Artists – Plays songs related to the cur-
rently playing artist.
! Albums – Plays songs related to the cur-
rently playing album.
! Genres – Plays songs related to the cur-
rently playing genre.
While searching the song, Link Play.. flashes.
In this condition, touch panel key operation is
not available.
# If the related albums/songs are not found,
Not Found is displayed.
3 Display returns to the ordinary display
and playback begin.
Changing audiobook speed
While listening to an audiobook on iPod, play-
back speed can be changed.
Using iPod
En
41
Section
12
U
s
i
n
g
i
P
o
d
% Touch AudioBooks to select your favor-
ite setting.
! Faster – Playback faster than normal speed
! Normal – Playback in normal speed
! Slower – Playback slower than normal
speed
Changing the screen mode
While video is playing, you can select the dis-
play mode between widescreen (16:9) and
standard (4:3) screen.
% Touch Wide Screen.
# To switch to standard (4:3) screen, touch
Wide Screen again.
Using iPod
En
42
Section
12
Introduction of audio
adjustments
¨
1 Audio display
Shows the audio adjustment status.
Important
If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) is
connected to this unit, the audio function will be
changed to the multi-channel processor’s audio
menu. For details, refer to Introduction of DSP ad-
justments on page 83.
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Audio Menu to display the audio function
names.
The audio function names are displayed and
operable ones are highlighted.
# When selecting FM as the source, you cannot
switch to Source Level Adjuster.
# When selecting Bluetooth telephone as the
source, you can only switch to Fader/Balance.
2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Using balance adjustment
You can change the fader/balance setting so
that it can provide the ideal listening environ-
ment in all occupied seats.
1 Touch Fader/Balance on the audio func-
tion menu.
2 Touch a or b to adjust front/rear
speaker balance.
Front:15 to Rear:15 is displayed as the front/
rear speaker balance moves from front to rear.
# FR: 0/LR: 0 is the proper setting when only
two speakers are used.
# When the rear output setting is Subwoofer,
you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance.
Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer
controller on page 50.
3 Touch c or d to adjust left/right speak-
er balance.
Left:15 to Right:15 is displayed as the left/
right speaker balance moves from left to
right.
Using the equalizer
The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization
to match the car’s interior acoustic character-
istics as desired.
You can adjust the center frequency and the Q
factor (curve characteristics) of each currently
selected curve band (Low/Mid/High).
! The actual range of the adjustments are dif-
ferent depending on which equalizer curve
is selected.
Level (dB)
Center frequency
Q=2N
Q=2W
Frequency (Hz)
1 Touch Parametric EQ on the audio func-
tion menu.
2 Touch c or d on EQ Select to select the
equalizer.
Display Equalizer curve
Powerful Powerful
Natural Natural
Vocal Vocal
Audio Adjustments
En
43
Section
13
A
u
d
i
o
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
s
Custom Custom
Flat Flat
Super Bass Super bass
# Custom is an adjusted equalizer curve that
you create. If you make adjustments to an equali-
zer curve, the equalizer curve setting is memor-
ized in Custom.
# When Flat is selected, no supplement or cor-
rection is made to the sound. This is useful to
check the effect of the equalizer curves by switch-
ing alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer
curve.
3 Touch c or d on Band to select the
equalizer band to adjust.
Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high)
4 Touch c or d on Frequency to select
the frequency to adjust.
Low: 40Hz—80Hz—100Hz—160Hz
Mid: 200Hz—500Hz—1kHz—2kHz
High: 3.15kHz—8kHz—10kHz—12.5kHz
5 Touch c or d on Q.Factor to select the
Q factor.
2Wide—1Wide—1Narrow—2Narrow
6 Touch a or b to adjust the level of the
equalizer band.
+12dB to -12dB is displayed as the level is in-
creased or decreased.
# You can then select another band and adjust
the level.
Adjusting loudness
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.
1 Touch Loudness on the audio function
menu.
2 Touch d to turn loudness on.
# To turn loudness off, touch c.
3 Touch c or d to select a desired level.
Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high)
Using subwoofer output
This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output
which can be turned on or off.
! When the subwoofer output is on, you can
adjust the cut-off frequency and the output
level of the subwoofer.
1 Touch Subwoofer on the audio function
menu.
2 Touch d next to Subwoofer to turn sub-
woofer output on.
# To turn subwoofer output off, touch c.
3 Touch c or d next to Phase to select
the phase of subwoofer output.
Touch d to select normal phase and Normal
appears in the display. Touch c to select re-
verse phase and Reverse appears in the dis-
play.
4 Touch c or d next to Level to adjust
the output level of the subwoofer.
+6 to –24 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.
5 Touch c or d next to Frequency to se-
lect cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-
lected range are outputted from the sub-
woofer.
Boosting the bass
Bass boost function boosts the bass level of
sound.
1 Touch Bass Booster on the audio func-
tion menu.
2 Touch c or d to select a desired level.
0 to +6 is displayed as the level is increased or
decreased.
Audio Adjustments
En
44
Section
13
Using the high pass filter
When you do not want low sounds from the
subwoofer output frequency range to play
from the front or rear speakers, turn on the
HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher
than those in the selected range are output
from the front or rear speakers.
1 Touch High Pass Filter on the audio
function menu.
2 Touch d next to High Pass Filter to turn
high pass filter on.
# To turn high pass filter off, touch c.
3 Touch c or d next to Frequency to se-
lect cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz
Only frequencies higher than those in the se-
lected range are output from the front or rear
speakers.
Adjusting source levels
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-
dical changes in volume when switching be-
tween sources.
! Settings are based on the FM volume level,
which remains unchanged.
1 Compare the FM volume level with the
level of the source you wish to adjust.
2 Touch Source Level Adjuster on the
audio function menu.
3 Touch c or d to adjust the source vo-
lume.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the source volume.
+4 to –4 is displayed as the source volume is
increased or decreased.
Notes
! The AM volume level can also be adjusted
with source level adjustments.
! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX
are set to the same source level adjustment
volume automatically.
! iPod and USB storage device are set to the
same source level adjustment volume auto-
matically.
! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to
the same source level adjustment volume
automatically.
Audio Adjustments
En
45
Section
13
A
u
d
i
o
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
s
Introduction of DVD setup
adjustments
¨
1 DVD setup menu display
Shows the DVD setup menu names.
You can use this menu to change audio, subti-
tle, parental lock and other DVD settings.
1 Touch g.
Setup will be displayed instead of Menu.
2 Touch Setup.
The DVD setup function names are displayed.
3 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Setting the subtitle language
You can set a desired subtitle language. If the
selected subtitle language is recorded on the
DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language.
1 Touch Subtitle Language on the DVD
setup menu.
A subtitle language menu is displayed.
2 Touch the desired language.
A subtitle language is set.
# If you have selected Others, refer to When you
select Others on this page.
Notes
! If the selected language is not recorded on
the disc, the language specified on the disc is
displayed.
! You can also switch the subtitle language by
touching Subtitle during playback. (Refer to
Changing the subtitle language during play-
back (Multi-subtitle) on page 22.)
! Even if you use Subtitle during playback to
switch the subtitle language, this does not af-
fect the settings here.
When you select Others
When you select Others, a language code
input display is shown. Please see the follow-
ing section to input the four-digit code of the
desired language. Refer to Language code
chart for DVD on page 107.
1 Touch 0 to 9 to input the language
code.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
2 Touch .
Setting the audio language
You can set the preferred audio language.
1 Touch Audio Language on the DVD
setup menu.
An audio language menu is displayed.
2 Touch the desired language.
The audio language is set.
# If you have selected Others, refer to When you
select Others on this page.
Notes
! If the selected language is not recorded on
the disc, the language specified on the disc is
outputted.
Setting up the DVD player
En
46
Section
14
! You can also switch the audio language by
touching Audio during playback. (Refer to
Changing audio language during playback
(Multi-audio) on page 21.)
! Even if you use Audio during playback to
switch the audio language, this does not af-
fect the settings here.
Setting the menu language
You can set the preferred language for dis-
plays of menus recorded on a disc.
1 Touch Menu Language on the DVD
setup menu.
A menu language menu is displayed.
2 Touch the desired language.
The menu language is set.
# If you have selected Others, refer to When you
select Others on the previous page.
Note
If the selected language is not recorded on the
disc, the language specified on the disc is dis-
played.
Setting the angle icon display
You can set it up so that the angle icon ap-
pears on scenes where the angle can be
switched.
! Initially, this function is set to on.
% Touch Multi Angle on the DVD setup
menu to turn angle icon display on.
# To turn the angle icon display off, touch
Multi Angle again.
Setting the aspect ratio
There are two kinds of display. A wide screen
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect
of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect
for the display connected to V OUT.
! When using a regular display, select either
Letter Box or Pan Scan. Selecting 16 : 9
may result in an unnatural picture.
! If you select the TV aspect, the unit’s dis-
play changes to the same setting.
% Touch TVAspect on the DVD setup
menu to select the TVaspect.
Touch TVAspect repeatedly until the desired
TV aspect appears in the display.
! 16: 9 – Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-
played as it is (initial setting)
! Letter Box – The picture is the shape of a
letterbox with black bands at the top and
bottom of the screen
! Pan Scan – The picture is cut short at the
right and left of the screen
Notes
! When playing discs that do not specify
Pan Scan, playback is with Letter Box even if
you select Pan Scan setting. Confirm whether
the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark.
! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV
aspect. For details, refer to the disc’s in-
structions.
Setting the slide show interval
Slide show is possible when JPEG files are
playing with this unit. In this setting, interval
of slide show can be set.
% Touch Slide Show on the DVD setup
menu to select the slide show interval.
Touch Slide Show repeatedly until the desired
setting appears in the display.
! 10sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of
10 seconds
! 20sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of
20 seconds
! 30sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of
30 seconds
Setting up the DVD player
En
47
Section
14
S
e
t
t
i
n
g
u
p
t
h
e
D
V
D
p
l
a
y
e
r
! Manual – JPEG images can be switched
manually
Setting the parental lock
Some DVD video discs let you use parental
lock to restrict children from viewing violent
and adult-oriented scenes. You can set the par-
ental lock to your desired level.
! When you set a parental lock level and then
play a disc featuring parental lock, code
number input indications may be dis-
played. In this case, playback will begin
when the correct code number is input.
Setting the code number and level
You need to have registered a code number for
playing back discs with parental lock.
1 Touch Parental on the DVD setup menu.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input a four digit code
number.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
3 Touch .
The code number is set, and you can now set
the level.
4 Touch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired
level.
The parental lock level is set.
! 8 – Playback of the entire disc is possible
(initial setting)
! 7 to 2 – Playback of discs for children and
non-adult-oriented discs is possible
! 1 – Playback of discs for children only is
possible
Notes
! We recommend to keep a record of your code
number in case you forget it.
! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc.
Look for the level indication written at the disc
package, included literature or on the disc it-
self. Parental lock of this unit is not possible if
a parental lock level is not recorded in the
disc.
! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac-
tive only on the scenes with certain levels. The
playback of those scenes will be skipped. For
details, refer to the instruction manual that
came with the discs.
Changing the level
You can change the set parental lock level.
1 Touch Parental on the DVD setup menu.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the registered
code number.
3 Touch .
This enters the code number, and you can now
change the level.
# If you input an incorrect code number, the
icon is displayed. Touch C and input the cor-
rect code number.
# If you forget your code number, refer to If you
forget your code number on this page.
4 Touch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired
level.
The new parental lock level is set.
If you forget your code number
Please see the following section, and touch C
10 times. Refer to Changing the level on this
page. The registered code number is canceled,
letting you register a new one.
Setting the DivX subtitle file
You can select whether to display DivX exter-
nal subtitles or not.
! The DivX subtitles will be displayed even
when Custom is selected if no DivX exter-
nal subtitle files exist.
% Touch DivX Subtitle on the DVD setup
menu to select the desired subtitle setting.
! Original – Display the DivX subtitles
Setting up the DVD player
En
48
Section
14
! Custom – Display the DivX external subti-
tles
Notes
! Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one
line. If more than 42 characters are set, the
line breaks and the characters are displayed
on the next line.
! Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one
screen. If more than 126 characters are set,
the excess characters will not be displayed.
Displaying your DivX
®
VOD
registration code
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)
content on this unit, you first need to register
the unit with your DivX VOD content provider.
You do this by generating a DivX VOD registra-
tion code, which you submit to your provider.
% Touch DivX VOD on the DVD setup
menu.
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.
! Make a note of the code as you will need it
when you register with a DivX VOD
provider.
Setting for digital output
Audio which is outputted from digital output
of this unit can be selected. Normally, set to
Stream. If this unit’s digital output is not used,
there is no need to change settings.
! Selecting Linear PCM enables you to
switch the output channel if playing the fol-
lowing type of discs. (Refer to Selecting
audio output on page 23.)
— Dual mono mode DVD video discs
% Touch Digital Output on the DVD setup
menu to select the desired digital output
setting.
! Stream – The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is
output as it is (initial setting)
! Linear PCM – The Dolby Digital/DTS signal
is converted to and output as a linear PCM
signal
Setting up the DVD player
En
49
Section
14
S
e
t
t
i
n
g
u
p
t
h
e
D
V
D
p
l
a
y
e
r
Adjusting initial settings
¨
1 Function display
Shows the function names.
Using the initial settings, you can customize
various system settings to achieve optimal per-
formance from this unit.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Off to turn this unit off.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
3 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Initial Menu to display the function names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
4 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Switching the auxiliary setting
Auxiliary devices connected to this unit can be
activated individually. Set each AUX source to
ON when using. For more information about
connecting or using auxiliary devices, refer to
Using the AUX source on page 58.
Switching the auxiliary 1 setting
% Touch AUX1 on the initial menu to se-
lect desired setting.
! Video – auxiliary video device connected
with 4-pole mini plug cable (e.g., CD-
V150M)
! Audio – auxiliary device connected with
stereo mini plug cable
! iPod – an iPod with video capabilities con-
nected with CD-IU50V
! Off – No auxiliary device is connected
Switching the auxiliary 2 setting
% Touch AUX2 on the initial menu to turn
auxiliary 2 setting on.
# To turn auxiliary 2 setting off, touch AUX2
again.
Setting the rear output and
subwoofer controller
This unit’s rear output (rear speaker leads out-
put and RCA rear output) can be used for full-
range speaker (Full) or subwoofer
(Subwoofer) connection. If you switch the
rear output setting to Subwoofer, you can
connect a rear speaker lead directly to a sub-
woofer without using an auxiliary amp.
Initially, the unit is set for rear full-range speak-
er connection (Full). When rear output is con-
nected to full range speakers (when Full is
selected), you can connect other full range
speakers (Rear) or a subwoofer (Subwoofer)
to the RCA rear output.
! When the multi-channel processor (DEQ-
P8000) is connected to this unit, you can-
not operate this function.
1 Touch Rear Speaker on the initial menu.
2 Touch c or d next to Rear Speaker to
switch the rear output setting.
Touch c to select full-range speaker and Full
appears in the display. Touch d to select sub-
woofer and Subwoofer appears in the dis-
play.
Initial Settings
En
50
Section
15
# When no subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Full (full-range speaker).
# When a subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Subwoofer (subwoofer).
# When the rear output setting is Subwoofer,
you cannot operate the following procedure.
3 Touch c or d next to Preout to switch
the subwoofer output or rear output.
Touching c or d will switch between
Subwoofer and Rear and that status will be
displayed.
Notes
! Even if you change this setting, there is no
output unless you turn the subwoofer output
on (refer to Using subwoofer output on page
44).
! If you change this setting, subwoofer output
in the audio menu will return to the factory
settings.
! Both rear speaker lead outputs and RCA rear
output are switched simultaneously in this
setting.
Changing languages for
CAUTION
Some operations on this unit are prohibited
while driving or needs to be paid a careful at-
tention when operating. In such case, a cau-
tion appears on the display. You can change
the language of the cautions at this setting.
% Touch Caution Language on the initial
menu to select your desired language.
Each time you touch Caution Language it se-
lects languages for CAUTION in the following
order:
English (English)—Español (Spanish)—
Français (French)
Switching the sound
muting/attenuation
Sound from this system is muted or attenu-
ated automatically when the signal from the
equipment with mute function is received.
! Sound from this system returns to normal
when the muting or attenuation is can-
celed.
% Touch TEL on the initial menu to select
the setting.
Touch TEL until the desired setting appears in
the display.
! Mute – Muting
! ATT-20dB – Attenuation (ATT-20dB has a
stronger effect than ATT-10dB)
! ATT-10dB – Attenuation
! Off – Turn the sound muting/attenuation
off
Notes
! The sound is turned off, Mute is displayed
and no audio adjustments are possible.
! The sound is attenuated, ATT is displayed and
no audio adjustments, except volume control,
are possible.
! Operation returns to normal when the phone
connection is ended.
Entering PIN code for
Bluetooth wireless connection
To connect your cellular phone to this unit via
Bluetooth wireless technology, you need to
enter PIN code on your phone to verify the
connection. The default code is 0000, but you
can change this in this function.
! With some Bluetooth audio players, you
may be required to enter the Bluetooth
audio player PIN code in advance to set
this unit for a connection.
! You can only operate this function when
Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200) is con-
nected to this unit.
Initial Settings
En
51
Section
15
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
1 Touch PIN Code Input on the initial
menu.
PIN code input display appears.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the PIN code of
your Bluetooth audio player.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
3 After inputting PIN code (up to 16 di-
gits), touch .
The PIN code you entered is stored in this sys-
tem.
Correcting distorted sound
You can minimize distortion that may be
caused by the equalizer curve settings.
Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis-
tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted,
try switching to Low. Normally, leave the set-
ting at High to ensure quality sound.
! Only when the multi-channel processor
(DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit, you
can operate this function.
% Touch Digital ATT on the initial menu to
switch the digital attenuator setting.
Touch Digital ATT repeatedly until the desired
setting appears in the display.
! High – High quality sound
! Low – Minimize distortion sound
Auto TA and EQ (auto-time
alignment and auto-
equalizing)
The auto-time alignment is automatically ad-
justed for the distance between each speaker
and the listening position.
The auto-equalizer automatically measures
the car interior acoustic characteristics, and
then creates the auto-equalizer curve based
on that information.
! Only when the multi-channel processor
(DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit, you
can operate this function.
Please see the following section for Auto TA
and EQ operation. Refer to Auto TA and EQ
(auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) on
page 90
Resetting the audio functions
You can reset all audio functions except vo-
lume.
! Only when the multi-channel processor
(DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit, you
can operate this function.
1 Touch Audio Reset on the initial menu.
2 Touch Reset.
3 Touch Reset again to reset audio func-
tions.
# To cancel resetting the audio functions, touch
Cancel.
Initial Settings
En
52
Section
15
Introduction of system
adjustments
¨
1 System menu display
Shows the system function names.
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
System Menu to display the system func-
tion names.
The system function names are displayed and
operable ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the display of
each source.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Changing the wide screen
mode
You can select a desired mode for enlarging a
4:3 picture to a 16:9 one.
1 Touch Wide Mode on the system menu.
2 Touch the desired wide mode setting.
Full (full)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc-
tion only, giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal pic-
ture) without any omissions.
Just (just)
The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and
the amount of enlargement increases horizontally
to the ends, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture
without sensing any disparity even on a wide
screen.
Cinema (cinema)
The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as
Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction and by
an intermediate proportion between Full and
Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal for a cinema-
sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap-
tions lie outside.
Zoom (zoom)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion
both vertically and horizontally; ideal for a cine-
ma-sized picture (wide screen picture).
Normal (normal)
A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no
sense of disparity since its proportions are the
same as that of the normal picture.
Notes
! Different settings can be memorized for each
video source.
! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode
that does not match its original aspect ratio, it
may appear different.
! Remember that using the wide mode feature
of this system for commercial or public view-
ing purposes may constitute an infringement
on the author’s rights protected by the Copy-
right Law.
! The video image will appear coarser when
viewed in Cinema or Zoom mode.
System settings
En
53
Section
16
S
y
s
t
e
m
s
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
Changing the picture
adjustment
You can adjust the Brightness (brightness),
Contrast (contrast), Color (color) ,Hue (hue),
Dimmer (dimmer), Temperature (tempera-
ture) and Black Level (black level) for each
source and rear view camera.
! You cannot adjust Color, Hue, Contrast
and Black Level for the audio source.
1 Touch Picture Adjustment on the sys-
tem menu.
The adjustment function names are displayed.
2 Touch any of the following touch panel
keys to select the function to be adjusted.
To switch between groups of touch panel keys,
touch NEXT or PREV.
! Brightness – Adjusts the black intensity
! Contrast – Adjusts the contrast
! Color – Adjusts the color saturation
! Hue – Adjusts the tone of color (red is em-
phasized or green is emphasized)
! Dimmer – Adjust the brightness of display
! Temperature – Adjusts the color tempera-
ture, resulting in a better white balance
! Black Level – Emphasizes dark portion on
images so that the difference between
brightness and darkness becomes more
distinct
! Rear View/Source – Switch the picture ad-
justment modes
# You cannot adjust the picture adjustment for
rear view camera when Camera Polarity is set to
Off. (Refer to Setting for rear view camera (back up
camera) on the next page.)
# If color system is set to PAL/PAL-M/SECAM,
you cannot adjust Hue.
# With some rear view cameras, picture adjust-
ment may not be possible.
3 Touch c or d to adjust the selected
item.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the level of selected item. +24 to –24
is displayed as the level is increased or de-
creased.
# Temperature can be adjusted from +3 to –3.
# Black Level can be set on or off.
Adjusting the dimmer
To prevent the display from being too bright at
night, the display is automatically dimmed
when the car’s headlights are turned on. You
can turn the dimmer on or off.
1 Touch Picture Adjustment on the sys-
tem menu.
The adjustment function names are displayed.
2 Touch NEXT.
3 Touch Dimmer.
4 Touch c or d to adjust the brightness.
Each time you touch c or d it moves cursor
towards the left or the right.
The level indicates the brightness of the
screen being adjusted. The farther the cursor
moves to the right, the brighter the screen
becomes.
Setting the AV input
You can switch the setting according to the
connected component.
! Select Video to watch video of a connected
component as AV source.
! Select EXT-Video to watch video of a con-
nected video unit as EXT source.
! Select TV to watch TV pictures from a con-
nected TV tuner as TV source.
% Touch AV Input on the system menu to
select the AV input setting.
! Off – No video component connected
! Video – External video component (such as
portable video player)
! EXT-Video – External video unit (such as
Pioneer products available in the future)
! TV – TV tuner connected with RCA cable
System settings
En
54
Section
16
Setting the clock
Use these instructions to set the clock.
1 Touch Clock Adjustment on the system
menu.
2 Touch On/Off to turn the clock display
on.
# To turn the clock display off, touch On/Off
again.
3 Touch c or d to select the segment of
the clock display you wish to set.
Each time you touch c or d it will select one
segment of the clock display:
Hour—Minute
As you select segments of the clock display
the segment selected will be highlighted.
4 Touch a or b to put a clock right.
Notes
! You can match the clock to a time signal by
touching Just.
— If 00 to 29, the minutes are rounded down.
(e.g., 10:18 becomes 10:00.)
— If 30 to 59, the minutes are rounded up.
(e.g., 10:36 becomes 11:00.)
! Even when the sources are off, the clock dis-
play appears on the display.
Setting for rear view
camera (back up camera)
CAUTION
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera
which outputs mirror reversed images, other-
wise screen image may appear reversed.
This unit features a function that automatically
switches to the rear view camera video (V IN
jack) when a rear view camera is installed on
your vehicle. When the gear shift is in RE-
VERSE (R) position, the video automatically
switches to a rear view camera video. (For
more details, consult your dealer.)
! After you set up the rear view camera set-
ting, move the gear shift in REVERSE (R)
and confirm if a rear view camera video
can be shown on the display.
! If the display should be switched to a rear
view camera video by error while you are
driving forward, change the rear view cam-
era setting.
! To end watching a rear view camera video
and return to the source display, press and
hold MUTE.
! Even while driving, rear view camera image
can be displayed. To do this, touch
RearView source icon. In this case, touch
RearView again to turn off the rear view
camera. For details, refer to Selecting a
source on page 12.
% Touch Camera Polarity on the system
menu to select an appropriate setting.
! Battery – When the polarity of the con-
nected lead is positive while the gear shift
is in REVERSE (R) position
! Ground – When the polarity of the con-
nected lead is negative while the gear shift
is in REVERSE (R) position
! Off – When a rear view camera is not con-
nected to this unit
System settings
En
55
Section
16
S
y
s
t
e
m
s
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
Introduction of
entertainment settings
¨
1 Entertainment menu display
Shows the entertainment function names.
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Entertainment Menu to display the enter-
tainment function names.
The entertainment function names are dis-
played and operable ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the display of
each source.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Selecting the background
display
You can switch background displays while lis-
tening to each source.
1 Touch Background on the entertain-
ment menu.
2 Touch the desired setting.
You can select one from the following list.
! BGP1 – Background picture 1
! BGP2 – Background picture 2
! BGP3 – Background picture 3
! BGP4 – Background picture 4
! BGV1 – Background visual 1
! BGV2 – Background visual 2
! BGV3 – Background visual 3
! Photo – JPEG image stored in this unit
! AV Input – Video image from the external
video unit that is connected to this unit
# When the AV (AV input) is not set to Video,
AV Input cannot be selected. (Refer to page 54.)
# If no JPEG image has been stored in this unit,
you cannot select Photo. To store JPEG image in
this unit, see the following section. Refer to Cap-
ture an image in JPEG files on page 34.
Selecting the illumination
color
This unit is equipped with multiple-color illu-
mination.
Direct selection from preset
illumination color
You can select an illumination color from the
color list.
1 Touch Illumination Color on the enter-
tainment menu.
2 Touch one of the color list.
You can select one from the following list.
! Blue (blue)
! Red (red)
! Amber (amber)
! Green (green)
! White (white)
! Scan (scanning all colors)
Notes
! Scan setting cycles continuously through all
the colors.
! While scanning all colors, touching Scan can
stop the scanning. When this is done, you can
select the displayed color as the background.
Customizing the illumination color
1 Touch Illumination Color on the enter-
tainment menu.
Entertainment settings
En
56
Section
17
2 Touch Custom to display the customiz-
ing menu.
3 Press +/– (VOL) to customize the color.
4 To store the customized color in mem-
ory, touch and hold one of preset keys
(Memo1, Memo2 or Memo3) until the beep
sounds.
The customized color has been stored in mem-
ory.
The next time you touch the same preset key,
the color is recalled from memory.
Selecting the OSD color
You can change the OSD color.
1 Touch Screen Color on the entertain-
ment menu.
2 Touch one of the color list.
You can select one from the following list.
! Blue (blue)
! Red (red)
! Amber (amber)
! Green (green)
! White (white)
Entertainment settings
En
57
Section
17
E
n
t
e
r
t
a
i
n
m
e
n
t
s
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
Adjusting the response
positions of the touch panels
(Touch Panel Calibration)
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the
screen deviate from the actual positions that
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-
sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad-
justment methods: 4-point adjustment, in
which you touch four corners of the screen;
and 16-point adjustment, in which you make
fine-adjustments on the entire screen.
! Make sure to use the supplied pen for ad-
justment, and gently touch the screen. If
you press the touch panel forcefully, the
touch panel may be damaged. Do not use
a sharp pointed tool such as ballpoint pen
or a mechanical pen. Otherwise the screen
is damaged.
! If touch panel adjustment cannot be per-
formed properly, consult your local Pioneer
dealer.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Off to turn this unit off.
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
2 Press and hold h(eject).
The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap-
pears.
3 Touch each of the arrows on the four
corners of the screen with the touch panel
adjustment pen.
# To cancel the adjustment, press and hold
MUTE.
4 Press DISP OFF to complete the 4-point
adjustment.
The adjusted position data is saved.
# Do not turn off the engine while saving the ad-
justed position data.
5 Press DISP OFF to proceed to the 16-
point adjustment.
The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen
appears.
# To cancel the adjustment, press and hold
MUTE.
6 Gently touch the center of the + mark
displayed on the screen with the touch
panel adjustment pen.
After you touch all the marks, the adjusted po-
sition data is saved.
# Do not turn off the engine while saving the ad-
justed position data.
7 Press and hold MUTE to complete the
adjustment.
Using the AUX source
A separately sold auxiliary device such as VCR
or portable device can be connected to this
unit. When connected, auxiliary device is auto-
matically recognized as AUX source and as-
signed to AUX.
About AUX connection method
You have two methods to connect auxiliary de-
vice to this unit.
Mini pin plug cable (AUX-1)
When connecting auxiliary device using a mini
plug cable
iPod and portable audio/video player can be
connected to this unit via mini plug cable.
! If an iPod with video capabilities is con-
nected to this unit via 3.5 mm plug (4 pole)
cable (e.g., CD-V150M), you can enjoy the
video contents of the iPod.
! It is possible to connect a portable audio/
video player by using a 3.5 mm plug (4
pole) to RCA cable, which is sold sepa-
rately. However, depending on the cable, re-
verse connection between red (right side
audio) cable and yellow (video) cable is re-
quired. Otherwise, audio and video may not
be correctly reproduced.
Other Functions
En
58
Section
18
% Insert the stereo mini plug into the
AUX input jack on this unit.
For more details, refer to What’s what on page
11.
IP-BUS-RCA interconnector (AUX-2)
When connecting auxiliary device using an IP-
BUS-RCA Interconnector (sold separately)
% Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such
as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately)
to connect this unit to auxiliary device fea-
turing RCA output.
For more details, refer to the IP-BUS-RCA Inter-
connector owner’s manual.
# You can only make this type of connection if
the auxiliary device has RCA outputs.
Selecting AUX as the source
% Touch the source icon and then touch
AUX-1/AUX-2 to select AUX as the source.
# If the auxiliary setting is not turned on, AUX
cannot be selected. For more details, refer to
Switching the auxiliary setting on page 50.
Setting the AUX title
The title displayed for the AUX source can be
changed.
! Each title can be up to 10 characters long.
1 After you have selected AUX as the
source, touch AV Menu and Function Menu
and then touch Name Edit.
# When the touch panel keys are not displayed,
you can display them by touching the screen.
2 Touch ABC to select the desired charac-
ter type.
Touch ABC repeatedly to switch between the
following character types:
Alphabet (upper case)—Alphabet (lower case)
# You can select to input numbers and symbols
by touching 123.
3 Touch a or b to select a letter of the al-
phabet.
4 Touch c or d to move the cursor.
5 Touch OK to store the entered title in
memory.
6 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Using the external unit
External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such
as ones available in the future) that, although
incompatible as a source, enables control of
basic functions with this unit. Two external
units can be controlled with this unit. When
two external units are connected, the external
unit is automatically allocated to external unit
1 or external unit 2 by this unit.
Basic operations of the external unit are ex-
plained below. Allocated functions are differ-
ent depending on the connected external unit.
For details concerning functions, refer to exter-
nal unit’s owner’s manual.
Selecting the external unit as
the source
% Touch the source icon and then touch
EXT-1/EXT-2 to select external unit as the
source.
Basic operation
Functions allocated to the following opera-
tions are different depending on the con-
nected external unit. For details concerning
functions, refer to the connected external
unit’s owner’s manual.
% Touch Band.
% Keep touching Band.
% Touch c or d.
% Keep touching c or d.
% Touch a or b.
Other Functions
En
59
Section
18
O
t
h
e
r
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s
Using the functions allocated
to 1 to 6 keys
1 Touch NEXT.
2 Touch any of 1 to 6 to select a function.
Advanced operations
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
! Function1 (function 1)
! Function2 (function 2)
! Function3 (function 3)
! Function4 (function 4)
! Auto/Manual (auto/manual)
2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Other Functions
En
60
Section
18
Multi-CD Player
Listening to a CD
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
'
You can use this unit to control a multi-CD
player, which is sold separately.
! Only functions described in this section
can be operated.
! Only functions described in this manual
are supported by 50-disc multi-CD players.
! Only 12 disc title can be displayed even if
the 50-disc multi-CD player is connected to
this unit.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Disc number indicator
Shows the number of the disc playing.
3 Track number indicator
Shows the number of the track playing.
4 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent track.
5 Title indicator
Shows the disc title and disc artist name of
the currently playing disc only when playing
CD TEXT discs.
Also, shows the track title and track artist
name of the currently playing track only
when playing CD TEXT discs.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
M-CD to select the multi-CD player.
2 Touch a or b to select a disc.
3 To skip back or forward to another
track, briefly touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next
track. Touching oonce skips to the start of
the current track. Touching it again will skip to
the previous track.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
track by pressing c or d (TRK).
4 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRK).
Notes
! When multi-CD player completes preparatory
operations, Ready is displayed.
! If an error message is displayed, refer to the
multi-CD player owner’s manual.
! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma-
gazine, No Disc is displayed.
Pausing CD playback
Pause lets you temporarily stop disc playback.
% Touch fto turn pause on.
Playback of the current track pauses.
# To turn pause off, touch fagain.
Selecting discs from the disc
title list
Disc title list lets you see the list of disc titles
and select one of them to playback.
1 Touch List to display the disc list.
2 Touch your favorite disc title (track
title).
# To return to the disc list, touch Back.
# If no title is entered for a disc, No Title is dis-
played.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Available accessories
En
61
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
Introduction to advanced
operations
You can only use these functions with a multi-
CD player that supports them.
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Function and operation
Repeat, Random and Scan operations are ba-
sically the same as that of the built-in DVD
player.
Function name Operation
Repeat
Refer to Repeating play on page 28.
However, the repeat play ranges
you can select are different from
that of the built-in DVD player. The
repeat play ranges of the multi-CD
player are:
! Multi-CD – Repeat all discs in
the multi-CD player
! Track – Repeat just the current
track
! Disc – Repeat the current disc
Random
Refer to Playing tracks in random
order on page 28.
Scan
Refer to Scanning tracks of a CD on
page 28.
While you are using Disc, the be-
ginning of each track on the se-
lected disc plays for about 10
seconds. When you are using
Multi-CD, the beginning of the
first track of each disc is played for
about 10 seconds.
Notes
! If you select other discs during repeat play,
the repeat play range changes to Multi-CD.
! If you perform track search or fast forward/re-
verse during Track, the repeat play range
changes to Disc.
! After track or disc scanning is finished, nor-
mal playback of the tracks begins again.
! If the multi-CD player does not support
COMP/DBE, you cannot operate this function.
Using compression and bass
emphasis
You can only use these functions with a multi-
CD player that supports them.
COMP (compression) and DBE (dynamic bass
emphasis) functions lets you adjust the sound
playback quality of the multi-CD player.
% Touch Compression on the function
menu to select your favorite setting.
Touch Compression repeatedly to switch be-
tween the following settings:
Off—COMP1—COMP2—Off—DBE 1—
DBE 2
# If the multi-CD player does not support
COMP/DBE, you cannot operate this function.
Available accessories
En
62
Section
19
XM tuner
Listening to XM Satellite Radio
´´´ ¨¨¨ ··· '''
·

You can use this unit to control an XM satellite
digital tuner (GEX-P920XM), which is sold
separately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
XM tuner’s operation manuals. This section
provides information on XM operations with
this unit which differs from that described in
the XM tuner’s operation manual.
! This unit does not have the text scroll
function.
! With this unit, you can operate one addi-
tional function: XM channel direct
selection.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 XM band indicator
Shows which band the tuner is tuned to.
3 XM channel select setting indicator
Shows what channel select setting has
been selected.
4 XM preset number indicator
Shows which preset has been selected.
5 XM channel number indicator
Shows which channel has been selected.
6 Detail information
Shows the detail information of the broad-
cast channel currently being received.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
XM to select the XM.
2 Touch Band to select an XM band.
Touch Band repeatedly until the desired XM
band is displayed, XM1, XM2 or XM3.
3 Touch c or d to select a desired
channel.
The channels move up or down step by step.
Channels that cannot currently be selected
are skipped, and the next channel is selected.
# If you touch and hold c or d, you can in-
crease or decrease the channel number con-
tinuously.
# You can also select a channel by pressing c
or d (TRK).
# You can also perform tuning from a desired
channel category. (Refer to Selecting a channel in
the channel category on the next page.)
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
You can easily store up to six broadcast sta-
tions for later recall.
! Six stations for each band can be stored in
memory.
1 Touch List to display the preset list.
2 When you find a station that you want
to store in memory keep touching one of
preset tuning keys P1 to P6 until the beep
sounds.
The selected station has been stored in mem-
ory.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key P1 to P6 the station is recalled from
memory.
# When P1 to P6 are not displayed, you can dis-
play them by touching List.
# You can also use a and b to recall stations
assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6 when the
ALL-CH mode is selected.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Available accessories
En
63
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
Switching the XM channel
select mode
You have two methods for selecting a channel:
by number and by category. When selecting
by number, channels in any category can be
selected. Select by category to narrow your
search down to only channels in a particular
category.
% Touch Mode to select the desired chan-
nel select mode.
Touch Mode repeatedly to switch between the
following channel select modes:
ALL-CH (channel number select setting)—
Category (channel category select setting)
Selecting a channel in the channel
category
1 Touch Mode to select the channel cate-
gory select mode.
Touch Mode repeatedly to switch between the
following channel select modes:
ALL-CH (channel number select setting)—
Category (channel category select setting)
2 Touch a or b to select the desired chan-
nel category.
3 Touch c or d to select the desired chan-
nel in the selected channel category.
Selecting a channel from the XM
channel list display
The list content can be switched so you can
search for the track you want to listen to not
only by the channel name but also by the artist
name or song title.
! This function is available for GEX-P920XM.
! The channel list shows all the channels
during the ALL-CH mode, and the channels
included in the selected category during
the Category mode. To switch the channel
mode, touch Mode.
1 Touch .
XM channel list appears in the display.
Each touch of changes the following set-
tings as follows:
Channel name—Song title—Artist name
2 Touch the desired channel that you
want to listen to.
# When the Category mode is selected, touch
a or b to switch to another category.
Selecting an XM channel directly
You can select an XM channel directly by en-
tering the desired channel number.
1 Touch Direct.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired chan-
nel number.
# To cancel the input numbers, touch C.
3 Touch .
The XM channel of entered number is
selected.
Using the MyMix function
The MyMix function allows you to make the
MyMix song playlist. When the song in the
MyMix playlist is being broadcast on a station
other than the one you are listening to, you
will be alerted, and you can tune to the station
to listen to that song.
! This function is available for GEX-P920XM.
! A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only
the song title and the artist name are mem-
orized.
Making the MyMix playlist
You can add a song that is being broadcast to
the MyMix playlist. When it is added, the song
title and its artist name is memorized to this
unit. The MyMix function will start on the song
that matches the song title and its artist name
in the MyMix playlist.
1 When a desired song is broadcast,
touch and hold Memo.
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to are memorized, and a confir-
mation message appears.
# The song title and artist name of up to 12
tracks can be memorized. Trying to save more
than 12 tracks will overwrite old ones.
# You cannot memorize the song title or the ar-
tist name when “– – – – – – – –” is displayed on
the title information.
Available accessories
En
64
Section
19
# You cannot memorize the song title or the ar-
tist name of the channel 000.
# It is possible that the memorized title is not
displayed correctly.
2 Touch OK to confirm.
! To delete the song from the MyMix playlist,
refer to Deleting the song from the MyMix
playlist on this page.
When the song in the MyMix playlist
is broadcast
As soon as the song in the MyMix playlist
starts broadcast on a different station, a mes-
sage is displayed. Touch Yes to switch to that
station, and you can listen to that song.
! If you would rather not to tune to that sta-
tion, touch No.
! If an alert for the song in the MyMix playlist
is set up to off, no alert will be provided
even when the song is broadcast. Refer to
Setting up a song alert on page 68.
! If there is slight difference between the
memorized title and the title of the song
being broadcast, no alert will be provided
even though they are the same song.
Setting up a song alert
You can set up an alert on or off by each song
in the MyMix playlist. First, display the MyMix
playlist and then change each alert setting.
Set up an alert to on so you can receive the
alert when the song is broadcast, or set it up
to off to stop the alert for that song.
1 Touch Memo Edit.
The MyMix playlist is displayed.
2 Touch the song title that you want to
set up the alert to off.
The check mark is removed, and the alert for
that song is off.
Deleting the song from the MyMix
playlist
You can delete each song in the MyMix
playlist.
1 Touch Memo Edit.
The MyMix playlist is displayed.
2 Touch Delete next to the song title you
want to delete.
That song will be deleted from the MyMix
playlist.
# To delete all the songs in the MyMix playlist,
touch Delete All.
3 A message will appear asking you to
confirm to delete it. Touch Yes.
# To cancel the deleting, touch No.
Displaying the Radio ID
Channel number select setting
If you select CH000, the ID code is displayed.
% Touch c or d to select CH000.
Channel category select setting
RADIO ID is provided as a channel category
for displaying the ID code.
% Touch a or b to select RADIO ID from
channel category.
Display of the ID code repeats displaying
RADIO ID and the ID code one after the other.
# If you select another channel, display of the ID
code is canceled.
Switching the XM display
! This function is available for GEX-P910XM.
% Touch INFO to switch the XM display.
Channel name—Artist name/feature—Song/
program title—Additional information—Chan-
nel number
Available accessories
En
65
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio
´´´ ¨¨¨ ··· '''
·

You can use this unit to control a SIRIUS Satel-
lite Radio tuner, which is sold separately.
When the SIRIUS tuner is used together with
this unit, some operations differ slightly from
those described in the SIRIUS operation man-
ual. This manual provides information on
these points. For all other information on
using the SIRIUS tuner, please refer to the SIR-
IUS operation manual.
! This unit does not have the text scroll
function.
! With this unit, you can operate one addi-
tional function: SIRIUS channel direct se-
lection. Refer to Selecting a SIRIUS channel
directly on the next page.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 SIRIUS band indicator
Shows which band the tuner is tuned to.
3 SIRIUS channel select setting indicator
Shows what channel select setting has
been selected.
4 SIRIUS preset number indicator
Shows which preset has been selected.
5 SIRIUS channel number indicator
Shows which channel has been selected.
6 Detail information
Shows the detail information of the broad-
cast channel currently being received.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
SIRIUS to select SIRIUS.
2 Touch Band to select a band.
Touch Band repeatedly until the desired SIR-
IUS band is displayed, SIRIUS1, SIRIUS2 or
SIRIUS3.
3 Touch c or d to select a desired
channel.
The channels move up or down step by step.
Channels that cannot currently be selected
are skipped, and the next channel is selected.
# If you touch and hold c or d, you can in-
crease or decrease the channel number con-
tinuously.
# You can also select a channel by pressing c
or d (TRK).
# You can also perform tuning from a desired
channel category. (Refer to Selecting a channel in
the channel category on the next page.)
# It may take a few seconds before you can hear
anything while this unit acquires and processes
the satellite signal.
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
You can easily store up to six broadcast sta-
tions for later recall.
! Six stations for each band can be stored in
memory.
! Channels are stored and recalled on a
broadcast station basis. This means that if
the broadcast station you stored has been
assigned to a different channel by SIRIUS,
you can still recall the same broadcast sta-
tion (though a different channel number
may appear in the display).
1 Touch List to display the preset list.
2 When you find a station that you want
to store in memory keep touching one of
preset tuning keys P1 to P6 until the beep
sounds.
The selected station has been stored in mem-
ory.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key P1 to P6 the station is recalled from
memory.
# When P1 to P6 are not displayed, you can dis-
play them by touching List.
Available accessories
En
66
Section
19
# You can also use a and b to recall stations
assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6 when the
ALL-CH mode is selected.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Selecting the SIRIUS channel
select mode
You have two methods for selecting a channel:
by number and by category. When selecting
by number, channels in any category can be
selected. Select by category to narrow your
search down to only channels in a particular
category.
% Touch Mode to select the desired chan-
nel select mode.
Touch Mode repeatedly to switch between the
following channel select modes:
ALL-CH (channel number select setting)—
Category (channel category select setting)
Selecting a channel in the channel
category
Channels are organized into various program
categories, e.g. Rock, Classic, Jazz. You can
specify channels by selecting the desired
category.
1 Touch Mode to select the channel cate-
gory select mode.
Touch Mode repeatedly to switch between the
following channel select modes:
ALL-CH (channel number select setting)—
Category (channel category select setting)
2 Touch a or b to select the desired chan-
nel category.
3 Touch c or d to select the desired chan-
nel in the selected channel category.
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by
entering the desired channel number.
1 Touch Direct.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired chan-
nel number.
# To cancel the input numbers, touch C.
3 Touch .
The SIRIUS channel of entered number is
selected.
Using the MyMix function
The MyMix function allows you to make the
MyMix song playlist. When the song in the
MyMix playlist is being broadcast on a station
other than the one you are listening to, you
will be alerted, and you can tune to the station
to listen to that song.
! This function is available for CD-SB10/SIR-
PNR2/SIR-PNR2C.
! A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only
the song title and the artist name are mem-
orized.
Making the MyMix playlist
You can add a song that is being broadcast to
the MyMix playlist. When it is added, the song
title and its artist name is memorized to this
unit. The MyMix function will start on the song
that matches the song title and its artist name
in the MyMix playlist.
% When a desired song is broadcast,
touch and hold Memo.
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to are memorized, and a confir-
mation message appears.
# The song title and artist name of up to 10
tracks can be memorized. When you try to save
more than 10 tracks, Full is displayed and that
song being broadcast cannot be saved.
# You cannot memorize the song title or the ar-
tist name of the channel 000.
# It is possible that the memorized title is not
displayed correctly.
When the song in the MyMix playlist
is broadcast
As soon as the memorized song starts broad-
cast on a different station, a song alert is dis-
played. Touch Jump to switch to that station,
and you can listen to that track.
Available accessories
En
67
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
! If you would rather not to tune to that sta-
tion, touch Stay.
! If an alert for the song in the MyMix playlist
is set up to off, no alert will be provided
even when the song is broadcast. Refer to
Setting up a song alert on this page.
! If there is slight difference between the
memorized title and the title of the song
being broadcast, no alert will be provided
even though they are the same song.
Turning the MyMix function on or off
You can turn the MyMix function off and stop
this unit to alert you for all the songs in the
MyMix playlist. To restart, turn this function
on.
! The MyMix function is on at the default
setting.
1 Touch Memo Edit.
The display is switched to the memo edit
mode.
2 Touch Alert Off to turn the MyMix func-
tion off.
The MyMix function is now off.
# To turn the MyMix function on, touch
Alert On.
Setting up a song alert
You can set up an alert on or off by each song
in the MyMix playlist. First, display the MyMix
playlist and then change each alert setting.
Set up an alert to on so you can receive the
alert when the song is broadcast, or set it up
to off to stop the alert for that song.
1 Touch Memo Edit.
The display is switched to the memo edit
mode.
2 Touch c or d to select the song title
that you want to turn the alert off.
3 Touch On/Off to turn the alert off.
The alert for the song is turned off.
Deleting the song from the MyMix
playlist
You can delete each song in the MyMix
playlist.
1 Touch Memo Edit.
The song title in the MyMix playlist is dis-
played.
2 Touch c or d to select the song title
that you want to delete.
3 Touch Delete.
4 A message will appear asking you to
confirm to delete it. Touch Yes.
The selected song is deleted.
# To cancel the deleting, touch No.
Using the Game Alert function
This system can alert you when games invol-
ving your favorite teams are about to start. To
use this function you need in advance to set
up a game alert for the teams.
! This function is available for CD-SB10/SIR-
PNR2/SIR-PNR2C.
Selecting teams for Game Alert
1 Touch Team Set.
2 Touch c or d on League to select a de-
sired league.
League names are switched in the display.
3 Touch c or d on Team to select a de-
sired team.
Teams in the selected category are switched in
the display.
4 Touch On/Off to store the selected
team in memory.
On is displayed with the selected team, and
the Game Alert function will start on that
team.
# To turn the Game Alert off of the selected
team, touch On/Off again.
# When you have already made 12 team selec-
tions, Full is displayed and additional team selec-
tion is not possible. In this case, first delete the
team selection and then try again.
5 Repeat these steps for selecting other
teams.
Up to 12 teams can be selected.
Available accessories
En
68
Section
19
Switching the Game Alert on or off
Once you made team selections, you need to
turn the Game Alert function on.
! The Game Alert function is on at the default
setting.
1 Touch Team Set.
2 Touch Alert On to turn the Game Alert
on.
The Game Alert function is now on.
# To turn the Game Alert function off, touch
Alert Off.
When the game of the selected team
starts
When a game of the selected team is about to
start (or is currently playing) on a different sta-
tion, a game alert is displayed. Touch Jump to
switch to that station, and you can listen to
that game.
! If you would rather not to tune to that sta-
tion, touch Stay.
Displaying game information
If games of your selected teams are currently
playing, you can display information of the
games and tune to the broadcast channel.
1 Touch Game INFO.
The game information of your selected team is
displayed.
2 Touch PREV or NEXT to select a game.
The game is displayd, followed by more de-
tailed game information.
! Game score will be updated automatically.
3 Touch Tune To to switch to that station
to listen to the game.
# If you have not made any team selections,
Not Set is displayed.
# When games involving your favorite teams are
not currently playing, No Game is displayed.
Displaying the Radio ID
If you select CH000, the ID code is displayed.
% Touch c or d to select CH000.
# To select CH000, set the channel select setting
to ALL-CH. About the channel select setting, refer
to Selecting the SIRIUS channel select mode on
page 67.
Switching the SIRIUS display
! This function is available for SIR-PNR1.
% Touch INFO to switch the SIRIUS display.
Channel name—Artist name/feature—Song/
program title—Channel category
Using Instant Replay function
Following functions can be operated during
the Instant Replay mode.
! To use this function, Pioneer SIRIUS bus in-
terface (e.g. CD-SB10) is required.
! To use this function, SIRIUS plug-and-play
unit with Instant Replay Function is re-
quired.
! For details, refer to SIRIUS plug-and-play
unit’s manuals.
% Touch Instant Replay.
Instant Replay mode is deiplayed. Now, Instant
Replay mode can be performed.
# In the following conditions, tuner exits from
the Instant Replay mode.
— When Live is touched
— When another source is selected
% Select a track
Touch c or d.
% Fast forward or reverse
Touch and hold c or d for about one second
and release.
% Pause and play
Touch f.
Available accessories
En
69
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
HD Radio™tuner
Listening to HD Radio
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
'''
···
··· ···
You can use this unit to control an HD Radio
tuner (GEX-P10HD), which is sold separately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
HD Radio tuner’s operation manual.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Band indicator
Shows which band the radio is tuned to, AM
or FM.
3 Preset number indicator
Shows which preset has been selected.
4 Frequency indicator
Shows the frequency to which the tuner is
tuned.
5 / (signal reception status) indi-
cator
When digital signal is received, is dis-
played. Otherwise, is displayed.
6 (HD station) indicator
Shows when the tuner is tuned to HD radio
station.
7 (radio field strength) indicator
Shows the radio field strength.
8 / (seek mode) indica-
tor
Shows the seek mode status.
9 / (reception mode)
indicator
Shows the setup value of reception mode.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
HD Radio to select the HD Radio.
2 Touch Band to select a band.
Touch Band until the desired band (FM1,
FM2, FM3 for FM or AM) is displayed.
3 To perform manual tuning, briefly
touch c or d.
# You can also perform manual tuning by press-
ing c or d (TRK).
4 To perform seek tuning, keep touching
c or d for about one second and release.
The tuner will scan the frequencies until a
broadcast strong enough for good reception is
found.
# You can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching
either c or d.
# If you keep touching c or d you can skip sta-
tions. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release
the key.
# You can also perform seek tuning by pressing
and holding c or d (TRK).
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
The operation is the same as that of the tuner.
(Refer to Storing and recalling broadcast fre-
quencies on page 17.)
Displaying text information
Desired information can be displayed.
% Touch INFO repeatedly to switch be-
tween the following settings:
Call sign—artist name—song title—program
type
Available accessories
En
70
Section
19
# Only when the tuner has been tuned in to an
HD Radio broadcasting, display can be changed.
# When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD
Radio broadcasting, default display is changed
into station name instead of frequency.
Introduction of advanced tuner
operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the frequency
display.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
The operation is the same as that of the tuner.
(Refer to Storing the strongest broadcast fre-
quencies on page 18.)
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals
for good reception.
1 Touch Local on the function menu.
2 Touch d on Local to turn on.
# To turn off, touch c.
3 Touch c or d on Level to select the de-
sired level.
1—2—3—4
Larger setting number is higher level. The
highest level setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings let
you receive progressively weaker stations.
Switching the seek mode
There are two method of seek tuning settings,
one is HD (Digital broadcasting stations seek)
and the other is All (normal seek).
% Touch Seek on the function menu to se-
lect your favorite setting.
All—HD
Switching the reception mode
If a digital broadcast reception condition gets
poor, this unit automatically switches to the
analog broadcast of the same frequency level.
If this function is set to D/A Auto, the tuner
switches between digital broadcast and ana-
log broadcast automatically. If this function is
Analog, reception will be conducted within an
analog broadcast.
% Touch Blending on the function menu
to select your favorite setting.
D/A Auto—Analog
Note
If Seek is set to HD and Blending is set to
Analog, the tuner can not receive broadcasts. In
this case, the seek mode or reception mode is
changed automatically as follows:
! When Seek is set to HD, if you switch
Blending from D/A Auto to Analog, Seek is
changed to All.
! When Blending is set to Analog, if you switch
Seek from All to HD, Blending is changed to
D/A Auto.
Available accessories
En
71
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
Bluetooth Audio
Basic Operations
´´´ ¨¨¨
! If you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-
BTB200) to this unit, you can control Blue-
tooth audio players via Bluetooth wireless
technology.
! In some countries, CD-BTB200 is not sold
on the market.
Important
! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player con-
nected to this unit, the operations available
with this unit are limited to the following two
levels:
— A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile): Only playing back songs on your
audio player is possible.
— AVRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote Con-
trol Profile): Playing back, pausing, select-
ing songs, etc., are possible.
! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio
players available on the market, operations
with your Bluetooth audio player using this
unit vary extensively. Refer to the instruction
manual that came with your Bluetooth audio
player as well as this manual while operating
your player on this unit.
! Information about songs (e.g. the elapsed
playing time, song title, song index, etc.) can-
not be displayed on this unit.
! While you are listening to songs on your Blue-
tooth audio player, refrain from using on your
cellular phone as much as possible. If you use
your cellular phone, the signal from your cel-
lular phone may cause noise on the song play-
back.
! When you are talking on a cellular phone con-
nected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology, song playback from your Bluetooth
audio player connected to this unit is muted.
! Even if you are listening to a song on your
Bluetooth audio player and you switch to an-
other source, song playback continues.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. This
section provides brief information on Blue-
tooth audio player operations with this unit,
which slightly differs or is abbreviated from
that described in the Bluetooth adapter’s op-
eration manual.
! Even though your audio player does not
contain a Bluetooth module, you can still
control it from this unit via Bluetooth wire-
less technology. To control your audio
player using this unit, connect a product
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology
(available on the market) to your audio
player and connect the Bluetooth adapter
(e.g. CD-BTB200) to this unit.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Connection indicator
Shows the Bluetooth wireless connection
status.
3 Device name
Shows the device name of the connected
Bluetooth audio player (or Bluetooth adap-
ter).
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
BT Audio to select the Bluetooth audio
source.
# For this unit to control your Bluetooth audio
player it needs to establish a Bluetooth wireless
connection. (Refer to Connecting a Bluetooth
audio player on the next page.)
Available accessories
En
72
Section
19
2 Touch d.
Playback starts.
3 To skip back or forward to another
track, briefly touch oor p.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
track by pressing c or d (TRK).
4 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRK).
5 To stop playback, touch g.
Pausing playback
% Touch e during playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch d.
Introduction to advanced
operations
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Connecting a Bluetooth audio
player
% Touch Connection Open on the function
menu to turn the connection open on.
Connection Waiting is displayed. This unit is
now on standby for connection from Bluetooth
audio player.
If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for
Bluetooth wireless connection, connection to
this unit is automatically established.
Note
Before you can use audio players you may need
to enter the PIN code into this unit. If your player
requires a PIN code to establish a connection,
look for the code on the player or in its accompa-
nying documentation. Refer to Entering PIN code
for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 51.
Disconnecting a Bluetooth
audio player
% Touch Disconnect on the function
menu.
After the disconnection is completed,
No Connection is displayed.
Displaying BD (Bluetooth
Device) information
% Touch Device Information on the func-
tion menu to display the BD address.
Various information regarding the Bluetooth
wireless technology are displayed.
! Device Name (device name of this system)
! BD Address (address of Bluetooth device)
! System Version (system version)
! BT Module Version (version of Bluetooth
module)
Available accessories
En
73
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
Bluetooth Telephone
Basic Operations
´´´ ¨¨¨ ··· ''' ···
· ·
! If you use a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-
BTB200), you can connect a cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology to
this unit for hands-free, wireless calls, even
while driving.
! In some countries, CD-BTB200 is not sold
on the market.
Important
! Since this unit is on standby to connect with
your cellular phone via Bluetooth wireless
technology, using this unit without running
the engine can result in battery drainage.
! Advanced operations that require your atten-
tion such as dialing numbers on the monitor,
using phone book, etc., are prohibited while
you are driving. When you need to use these
advanced operations, stop your vehicle in a
safe place.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 User number indicator
Shows the registration number of the cellu-
lar phone.
3 Device name
Shows the device name of the cellular
phone.
4 Automatic answering/Automatic reject-
ing indicator
Shows when the automatic answering func-
tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting
automatic answering on page 80).
Shows when the automatic rejecting func-
tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting
automatic rejecting on page 80).
5 Voice recognition indicator
Shows when the voice recognition function
is on (for more details, refer to Voice recogni-
tion on the next page).
6 Signal level indicator
Shows the signal strength of cellular phone.
! The level shown on the indicator may dif-
fer form the actual signal level.
! Depending on the cellular phones featur-
ing Bluetooth wireless technology, radio
field intensity is not available. In this
case, the signal level indicator does not
appear.
! If your cellular phone is out of service,
is displayed.
7 Telephone indicator
Shows when a phone connection using
Bluetooth wireless technology is estab-
lished (for more details, refer to Connecting
a cellular phone on page 76).
! While connecting automatically, tele-
phone indicator is flashing.
8 Battery strength indicator
Shows the battery strength of cellular
phone.
! The level shown on the indicator may dif-
fer from the actual battery strength.
! If the battery strength is not available,
nothing is displayed in the battery
strength indicator area.
9 Incoming call notice indication
Shows when an incoming call has been re-
ceived and not checked yet.
! Incoming call notice is not displayed for
calls made when your cellular phone is
disconnected from this unit.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. This
section provides brief information on the
hands-free phoning operations with this unit
which slightly differs or is cut short from that
described in the Bluetooth adapter’s operation
manual.
! This unit is not compatible with registration
for guest phone.
Available accessories
En
74
Section
19
! This unit does not have the name edit func-
tion of a Phone Book entry.
% Touch the source icon and then touch
TEL to select the telephone.
Note
The equalizer curve for the phone source is fixed.
When selecting the phone source, you cannot
perform the operation in the following section.
Refer to Using the equalizer on page 43.
When the multi-channel processor is connected
to this unit, you can operate the equalizer func-
tion even when selecting the phone source. Refer
to Recalling equalizer curves on page 89.
Setting up for hands-free phoning
Before you can use the hands-free phoning
function you must set up the unit for use with
your cellular phone. This entails establishing a
Bluetooth wireless connection between this
unit and your phone, registering your phone
with this unit, and adjusting the volume level.
1 Connection
For detailed instructions on connecting your
phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology, refer to Connecting a cellular phone on
the next page.
# Your phone should now be temporarily con-
nected. However, to make best use of the technol-
ogy, we recommend you register the phone to
this unit.
2 Registration
To register your temporarily connected phone,
refer to Registering a connected cellular phone
on the next page.
3 Volume adjustment
Adjust the earpiece volume on your cellular
phone for comfort. When adjusted, the volume
level is recorded in this unit as the default set-
ting.
# Caller’s voice volume and ring volume may
vary depending on the type of cellular phone.
# If the difference between the ring volume and
caller’s voice volume is big, overall volume level
may become unstable.
# Before disconnecting the cellular phone from
this unit, make sure to adjust the volume to a
proper level. If the volume is muted (zero level) on
your cellular phone, the volume level of your cel-
lular phone remains muted even after the cellular
phone is disconnected.
Making a phone call
Voice recognition
1 Touch to turn the voice recognition
function on.
Voice dial icon appears on the information bar.
Voice recognition function is now ready.
# To cancel the voice recognition function,
touch again.
2 Pronounce the name of your contact.
Taking a phone call
Answering an incoming call
1 When a call comes in, touch .
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing c (TRK).
# If private mode is selected on the cellular
phone, hands-free phoning may not be per-
formed.
2 To end the call, touch .
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing d (TRK).
Rejecting an incoming call
% When a call comes in, touch .
The call is rejected.
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing d (TRK).
Answering a call waiting
1 Touch to answer a call waiting.
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing c (TRK).
2 Touch to end all calls.
# The caller you have been talking to is now on
hold. To end the call, both you and your caller
need to hang up the phone.
# While your callers hold the line, touching
switches between callers.
Available accessories
En
75
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing d (TRK).
Rejecting call waiting
% Touch to reject a call waiting.
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing d (TRK).
Introduction to advanced
operations
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the telephone
standby display.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Connecting a cellular phone
Searching for available cellular phones
1 Touch Phone Connect on the function
menu.
2 Touch Search to search for available cel-
lular phones.
While searching, Searching flashes. When
available cellular phones featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology are found, device name or
Name Not Found (if names cannot be ob-
tained) is displayed.
# If this unit fails to find any available cellular
phones, Not Found is displayed.
# You can display the BD address by touching
BD ADDR. To return to the device name, touch
Phone Name.
3 Touch the device name you want to
connect.
While connecting, Connecting flashes. To
complete the connection, check the device
name (Pioneer BT unit) and enter the link
code on your cellular phone.
# Up to five peripheral cellular phones are dis-
played.
# PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. You
can change this code in the initial setting. Refer
to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con-
nection on page 51.
Using a cellular phone to initiate a
connection
1 Touch Phone Connect on the function
menu.
2 Touch Connection Open.
Connection Waiting flashes and the unit is
now on standby for connection from a cellular
phone.
3 Use cellular phone to connect to this
unit.
# To cancel this function, touch
Connection Open again.
# PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. You
can change this code in the initial setting. Refer
to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con-
nection on page 51.
Disconnecting a cellular phone
1 Touch Phone Connect on the function
menu.
2 Touch Disconnect to disconnect the cur-
rently connected cellular phone from this
unit.
After disconnection is completed,
No Connection is displayed.
Registering a connected
cellular phone
1 Touch Phone Register on the function
menu.
Registration assignments for user phone 1, 2
and 3 appear on the display.
2 Touch and hold one of the registration
assignments to register the currently con-
nected phone.
If the registration is succeeded, the device
name of the connected phone is displayed in
the selected assignment.
Available accessories
En
76
Section
19
# If the assignment is empty, the device name is
not displayed. If the assignment is already taken,
the device name appears. To replace an assign-
ment with a new phone, first delete the current
assignment. For more detailed instructions, see
Deleting a registered phone on this page.
# If the registration failed, device name of the
connected phone is not displayed in the selected
assignment. In this case, return to step 1 and try
again.
Deleting a registered phone
1 Touch Phone Register on the function
menu.
2 Touch Delete next to the device name
you want to delete.
A confirmation display appears. Touch OK to
delete the phone.
# To cancel deleting a registered phone, touch
Cancel.
Connecting to a registered
cellular phone
Connecting to a registered phone
manually
1 Touch Phone Connect on the function
menu.
2 Touch Direct Connect.
3 Touch the device name you want to
connect.
While connecting, Connecting is flashing.
# If connection fails, Connection Error is dis-
played.
Connecting to a registered phone
automatically
% Touch Auto Connect on the function
menu to turn the Automatic Connection
function on.
If your cellular phone is ready for Bluetooth
wireless connection, connection to this unit is
automatically established.
# To turn automatic connection off, touch
Auto Connect again.
Using the phone book
Transferring entries to the phone book
The Phone Book can hold a total of 500 en-
tries. 300 from User 1, 150 from User 2, and 50
from User 3.
1 Touch Phone Book Transfer on the func-
tion menu.
2 Touch Start to turn the Phone Book
Transfer function on.
The Phone Book Transfer is now on standby.
3 Use the cellular phone to perform
phone book transfer.
Perform phone book transfer using the cellu-
lar phone. For detailed instructions, refer to
the instruction manual that came with your
cellular phone.
# The display indicates how many entries have
been transferred and the total number to be
transferred.
# To cancel the transferring process, touch
Stop.
4 When you are done transferring Phone
Book entries, touch ESC.
Note
When the phone book transfer is complete, the
connection to your cellular phone is off. To use
the Phone Book, connect to your cellular phone
once again, referring to Connecting to a registered
cellular phone on this page.
Changing the phone book display order
% Touch Phone Book Name View on the
function menu to change the name view
order.
Inverted is displayed and the name view
order is changed.
# To change to the original order (Original),
touch Phone Book Name View again.
Calling a number in the phone book
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
Available accessories
En
77
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
1 Touch to display the Phone Book.
2 Touch c or d to select the first letter of
the name you are looking for.
3 Touch Enter to show entries starting
with the letter you chose.
The display shows the first six Phone Book en-
tries starting with that letter (e.g. “Ben”,
“Brian” and “Burt” when “B” is selected).
# To refine the search with a different letter,
touch Clear.
4 Touch a Phone Book entry you want to
call.
The display is switched to the Phone Book de-
tail display.
5 Touch phone number of the Phone
Book entry you want to call.
If several phone numbers are entered to an
entry, touch one you want to call.
The display returns to the normal display and
the Phone Book entry you selected is dis-
played on the information bar.
6 Touch to make a call.
# For an international call, touch Add “+” to
add + to the phone number.
7 To end the call, touch .
Editing phone numbers
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
You can edit the numbers of Phone Book en-
tries. Each phone number can be up to 24 di-
gits long.
1 Touch to display the Phone Book.
2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to
edit.
Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section
for how to do this. Refer to Calling a number in
the phone book on the previous page.
3 Touch Edit next to the phone number
you want to edit.
The display is changed to the Phone Book dial
edit display.
4 Touch 0 to 9 to input numbers.
# For an international call, touch Add “+” to
add + to the phone number.
# Touch Clear to delete the number. Touch and
hold Clear to delete all the input numbers.
5 Touch OK to store the new number.
Clearing a phone book entry
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
1 Touch to display the Phone Book.
2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to
delete.
Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section
for how to do this. Refer to Calling a number in
the phone book on the previous page.
3 Touch Delete to delete the Phone Book
entry.
A confirmation display appears. Touch Yes to
delete the entry.
# If you do not want to clear a Phone Book entry
that you have selected, touch No.
Using the call history
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
The 6 most recent calls made (dialed), re-
ceived and missed, are stored in the Call His-
tory. You can browse the Call History and call
numbers from it.
1 Touch Log to display the Call History.
Touching Log repeatedly switches between
the following call histories:
Missed Calls (missed call)—Dialed Calls (dia-
led call)—Received Calls (received call)
# You can switch between phone number and
name (if entered) by touching ABC/123.
# If no phone numbers have been stored in the
selected list, nothing is displayed.
Available accessories
En
78
Section
19
2 Touch a phone number or name (if en-
tered) you want to call.
The display returns to the normal display and
the phone number you selected is displayed
on the information bar.
3 Touch to make a call.
# For an international call, touch Add “+” to
add + to the phone number.
4 To end the call, touch .
Using preset numbers
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
Assigning preset numbers
Numbers that you dial frequently can be as-
signed to presets for quick recall.
You can assign up to 6 frequently called phone
numbers to number presets.
1 Select a desired phone number from
the phone book or the call history. Or di-
rectly enter a desired phone number.
To select a desired phone number from the
Phone Book or the Call History, see the in-
structions explained in previous pages. To di-
rectly enter a desired phone number, please
see the following section. Refer to Making a
call by entering phone number on this page.
The display should now be the normal display
and the selected phone number is displayed
on the information bar.
2 Touch List to display preset assign-
ments.
Preset assignments appear in the display (if
not displayed yet).
3 Keep touching one of preset assign-
ments to store the phone number.
The phone number you selected is stored in
presets.
# No Data is displayed for empty assignment.
Even if the assignment is taken, you can replace
it to the new one by keeping touching the assign-
ment.
Recalling preset numbers
1 Touch List to display preset assign-
ments.
Preset assignments appear in the display (if
not displayed yet).
2 Touch one of preset assignments.
The selected phone number should now be
displayed on the information bar.
3 Touch to make a call.
4 To end the call, touch .
Making a call by entering
phone number
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
1 Touch Direct to display the direct dial
display.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input numbers.
# For an international call, touch Add “+” to
add + to the phone number.
# Touch Clear to delete the number. Touch and
hold Clear to delete all the input numbers.
# Up to 24 digits can be entered.
# If you want to store the entered phone number
to preset assignment, touch Set here. The display
returns to the normal display and the phone num-
ber you entered is selected.
3 When you completed entering the
number, touch to make a call.
4 To end the call, touch .
Clearing memory
1 Touch Clear Memory on the function
menu.
2 Touch Clear next to the item you want
to delete from the memory.
Select from the following:
! Phone Book (phone book)
! Dialed Calls (dialed call history)
! Received Calls (received call history)
! Missed Calls (missed call history)
Available accessories
En
79
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
! Dial Preset (preset phone numbers)
After selecting a desired item, a confirmation
display appears. Touch OK to delete the mem-
ory.
# If you do not want to clear memory that you
have selected, touch Cancel.
# If you want to clear all the Phone Book, dia-
led/received/missed call history list and preset
phone number, touch Clear All.
Setting automatic answering
% Touch Auto Answer on the function
menu to turn the automatic answer on.
# To turn the automatic answer off, touch
Auto Answer again.
Setting automatic rejecting
% Touch Refuse All Calls to turn the auto-
matic call rejection on.
# To turn the automatic call rejection off, touch
Refuse All Calls again.
Switching the ring tone
% Touch Ring Tone to turn the ring tone
on.
# To turn the ring tone off, touch Ring Tone
again.
Echo canceling and noise reduction
% Touch Echo Cancel to turn Echo Cancel
function on.
# To turn echo canceling off, touch Echo Cancel
again.
Displaying BD (Bluetooth
Device) address
Displaying BD address of this system
% Touch Device Information to display the
BD address.
Various information regarding the Bluetooth
wireless technology are displayed.
! Device Name (device name of this system)
! BD Address (address of Bluetooth device)
! System Version (version of this unit’s mi-
croprocessor)
! BT Module Version (version of Bluetooth
module)
Displaying BD address of your
cellular phone
1 Touch Phone Connect on the function
menu.
2 Touch BD Address to display the BD ad-
dress.
12-digit hexadecimal string is displayed.
# To return to the device name, touch
Phone Name.
Available accessories
En
80
Section
19
TV tuner
Important
This manual describes analog TV tuner operation.
If you are already using a Pioneer analog TV
tuner, such as the GEX-P5700TV, read this section.
However, please read the important information
below.
! Pioneer stopped selling analog TV tuners in
the U.S. in 2006, and analog TV tuners are
also no longer available in Canadian markets.
Pioneer does not sell a digital TV tuner in the
U.S. or in Canada.
! In the U.S., the switch from analog TV to digi-
tal TV broadcasting is planned for February 17,
2009.
! In Canada, the switch from analog TV to digi-
tal TV broadcasting is planned for August 31,
2011.
! THIS MEANS THAT AFTER THE DATES SPECI-
FIED ABOVE (SUBJECT TO CHANGE), YOU
CAN NO LONGER USE THIS UNIT WITH AN
ANALOG TV TUNER TO WATCH ALMOST ALL
TV PROGRAMMING BROADCAST OVER-THE-
AIR.
Basic Operations
222 111 333 444
You can use this unit to control a TV tuner (e.g.
GEX-P5700TV), which is sold separately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
TV tuner’s operation manual. This section pro-
vides information on TV operations with this
unit, which differs from that described in the
TV tuner’s operation manual.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Band indicator
Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to.
3 Preset number indicator
Shows which preset has been selected.
4 Channel indicator
Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
TV to select the TV.
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
3 Touch Band to select a band.
Touch Band repeatedly until the desired band
is displayed, TV1 or TV2.
4 To perform manual tuning, briefly
touch c or d.
# You can also perform manual tuning by press-
ing c or d (TRK).
Available accessories
En
81
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
5 To perform seek tuning, keep touching
c or d for about one second and release.
The tuner will scan the channels until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is
found.
# You can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching
either c or d.
# If you keep touching c or d you can skip
broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as
soon as you release the keys.
# You can also perform seek tuning by pressing
and holding c or d (TRK).
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
You can easily store up to 12 broadcast sta-
tions for later recall.
! Six stations for each band can be stored in
memory.
1 Touch List to display the preset list.
2 When you find a station that you want
to store in memory, keep touching one of
preset tuning keys P01 to P12 until the
beep sounds.
The selected broadcast station has been
stored in memory.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key the station is recalled from memory.
# When P01 to P06 and P07 to P12 are not dis-
played, you can display them by touching List.
# To switch between P01 to P06 and P07 to P12,
touch a or b.
Storing the strongest broadcast
stations sequentially
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
2 Touch BSSM on the function menu to
turn BSSM on.
BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing
the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be
stored in order from the lowest channel up.
When finished, BSSM stops flashing.
# To cancel the storage process, touch BSSM
again.
3 Touch ESC to return to the frequency
display.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Note
Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re-
place broadcast stations you have saved using
P01 to P12.
Available accessories
En
82
Section
19
Digital Signal Processor
Introduction of DSP adjustments
¨
You can use this unit to control multi-channel
processor (DEQ-P8000), which is sold sepa-
rately.
1 DSP display
Shows the DSP function names.
By carrying out the following settings/adjust-
ments in the order shown, you can create a fi-
nely-tuned sound field effortlessly.
1 Setting the speaker setting
2 Using the position selector
3 Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-
equalizing)
4 Adjusting the time alignment
5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a
test tone
6 Selecting a cross-over frequency
7 Adjusting the speaker output levels
8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
DSP Menu to display the DSP function
names.
The DSP function names are displayed and
operable ones are highlighted.
# To go to the next group of function names,
touch b.
# To return to the previous group of function
names, touch a.
# When playing discs recorded with more than
96 kHz sampling frequency, you cannot use audio
functions. Also, equalizer curve setting, Position,
Auto EQ and Auto TA will be canceled.
# When playing discs recorded with more than
96 kHz sampling frequency, audio is outputted
from front speakers only.
# When selecting FM as the source, you cannot
switch to Source Level Adjuster.
# When playing other than the DVD disc, you
cannot switch to Dynamic Range Control.
# When neither Front-L nor Front-R is selected
in Position, you cannot switch to
Time Alignment.
# When both the center speaker and the rear
speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting, you
cannot switch to Dolby Pro Logic II.
2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Using the position selector
One way to assure a more natural sound is to
accurately position the stereo image, putting
you right in the center of the sound field. The
position selector function lets you automati-
cally adjust the speaker output levels and in-
serts a delay time to match the number and
position of occupied seats. When used in con-
junction with the SFC, the feature will make
the sound image more natural and offer a pa-
noramic sound that envelops you.
1 Touch Position on the DSP function
menu.
2 Touch c/d/a/b to select a listening po-
sition.
Touch one of these, c/d/a/b, to select a lis-
tening position as listed in the table.
Key Display Position
c Front-L Front seat left
d Front-R Front seat right
a Front Front seats
b All All seats
# To cancel the selected listening position,
touch the same key again.
Available accessories
En
83
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
Note
When you make adjustments to the listening po-
sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set
for appropriate levels. You can tailor the levels
more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker
output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the
speaker output levels.
Using balance adjustment
You can change the fader/balance setting so
that it can provide the ideal listening environ-
ment in all occupied seats.
1 Touch Fader/Balance on the DSP func-
tion menu.
2 Touch a or b to adjust front/rear
speaker balance.
Each time you touch a or b it moves the
front/rear speaker balance towards the front or
the rear.
Front:25 to Rear:25 is displayed as the front/
rear speaker balance moves from front to rear.
# FR: 0/LR: 0 is the proper setting when only
two speakers are used.
3 Touch c or d to adjust left/right speak-
er balance.
Each time you touch c or d it moves the left/
right speaker balance towards the left or the
right.
Left:25 to Right:25 is displayed as the left/
right speaker balance moves from left to right.
Using the sound field control
The SFC function creates the sensation of a
live performance.
! The acoustics of different performance en-
vironments are not the same and depend
on the extent and contour of space through
which sound waves move and on how
sounds bounce off the stage, walls, floors
and ceilings. At a live performance you
hear music in three stages: direct sound,
early reflections, and late reflections, or re-
verberations. Those factors are programed
into the SFC circuitry to recreate the acous-
tics of various performance settings.
% Touch SFC on the DSP function menu to
select the setting.
Touch SFC until the desired setting appears in
the display.
Musical—Drama—Action—Jazz—Hall—
Club—Off
Display Setting
Musical Musical
Drama Drama
Action Action
Jazz Jazz
Hall Hall
Club Club
Off Off
Note
If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2-
channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC
effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel
audio (i.e., Musical, Drama or Action), we re-
commend turning Dolby Pro Logic II on. On the
other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are
intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., Jazz,
Hall or Club), we recommend turning Dolby Pro
Logic II off.
Adjusting source levels
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-
dical changes in volume when switching be-
tween sources.
! Settings are based on the FM volume level,
which remains unchanged.
1 Compare the FM volume level with the
level of the source you wish to adjust.
Available accessories
En
84
Section
19
2 Touch Source Level Adjuster on the DSP
function menu.
3 Touch c or d to adjust the source vo-
lume.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the source volume.
+4 to –4 is displayed as the source volume is
increased or decreased.
Notes
! The AM volume level can also be adjusted
with source level adjustments.
! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX
are set to the same source level adjustment
volume automatically.
! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to
the same source level adjustment volume
automatically.
! AUX (auxiliary input) and AV (AV input) are set
to the same source level adjustment volume
automatically.
Using the dynamic range control
The dynamic range refers to the difference be-
tween the largest and softest sounds. The dy-
namic range control compresses this
difference so that you can clearly hear sounds
even at low volume levels.
! The dynamic range control is effective only
on Dolby Digital sounds.
! When playing other than the DVD disc, you
cannot switch to Dynamic Range Control.
1 Touch Dynamic Range Control on the
DSP function menu.
2 Touch d to turn the dynamic range con-
trol on.
# To turn dynamic range control off, touch c.
Using the down-mix function
The down-mix function allows you to play back
multi-channel audio in 2 channels.
1 Touch Down Mix on the DSP function
menu.
2 Touch c or d to select the desired level.
! Lo/Ro – Stereo mix the original audio that
do not contain channel modes such as sur-
round components.
! Lt/Rt – Down mix so that the surround
components can be restored (decoded).
Using the direct control
You can override audio settings to check for ef-
fectiveness of your audio settings.
! All audio functions are locked out when the
direct control is on except VOL and
Dolby Pro Logic II.
1 Touch Digital Direct on the DSP func-
tion menu.
2 Touch d to turn the direct control on.
# To turn direct control off, touch c.
Using the Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth
output channels from two-channel sources to
achieve high-purity matrix surround.
! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48 kHz
sampling rate stereo source and has no ef-
fect on other types of source.
! When both the center speaker and the rear
speaker are set to OFF in the speaker set-
ting, you cannot switch to
Dolby Pro Logic II.
1 Touch Dolby Pro Logic II.
2 Touch any of the following touch panel
keys to select the desired mode.
! Movie – The Movie mode suitable for movie
playback
! Music – The Music mode suitable for music
playback
! Matrix – The Matrix mode for when FM
radio reception is weak
! Off – Turn Dolby Pro Logic II off
Available accessories
En
85
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
! Music Adjust – Adjust the Music mode
# You can operate Music Adjust only when
Music has been selected.
Adjusting the Music mode
You can adjust the Music mode with the fol-
lowing three controls.
! Panorama (Panorama) extends the front
stereo image to include the surround
speakers for an exciting “wraparound” ef-
fect.
! Dimension (Dimension) allows you to gra-
dually adjust the sound field either towards
the front or the rear.
! Center Width Control (Center Width) al-
lows center-channel sounds to be posi-
tioned between the center speaker and the
left/right speakers. It improves the left-cen-
ter-right stage presentation for both the dri-
ver and the front passenger.
1 Touch Dolby Pro Logic II.
2 Touch Music and then touch
Music Adjust.
# You can operate Music Adjust only when
Music has been selected.
3 Touch a or b to select Panorama (pa-
norama).
Each time you touch a or b selects the item
in the following order:
Panorama (panorama)—Dimension (dimen-
sion)—Center Width (center width)
4 Touch d to turn the panorama control
on.
# To turn the panorama control off, touch c.
5 Touch b to select Dimension and then
touch c or d to adjust front/rear speaker
balance.
Each time you touch c or d it moves the
sound towards the front or the rear.
+3 to -3 is displayed as the front/rear speaker
balance moves from front to rear.
6 Touch b to select Center Width and
then touch c or d to adjust the center
image.
Each time you touch c or d it gradually
spreads the center channel sound into the
front left and right speakers over a range 0 to
7.
3 is the default and it’s recommended for
most recordings. 0 places all center sound in
the center speaker. 7 places all center sound
equally in the left/right speakers.
Setting the speaker setting
You need to make with/without (or yes/no) and
size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad-
justments depending on the installed speak-
ers. The size needs to be set to Large (large) if
the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds
of about 100 Hz or below. Otherwise select
Small (small).
! Low frequency range is not output if the
subwoofer is set to Off and the front and
rear speakers set to Small or Off.
! It is imperative that non-installed speakers
be set to Off.
! Set the front or rear speaker to Large if the
speaker is capable of reproducing bass
content, or if no subwoofer is installed.
1 Touch Speaker Setting.
2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to
be adjusted.
Each time you touch a or b selects the speak-
er in the following order:
Front (front speakers)—Center (center speak-
er)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (sub-
woofer)—Phase (subwoofer setting)
# You can switch to Phase only when the sub-
woofer has been set to On.
3 Touch c or d to select the correct size
for the selected speaker.
Each time you touch c or d selects the size in
the following order:
Off (off)—Small (small)—Large (large)
Available accessories
En
86
Section
19
# You cannot select Off, when Front (front
speakers) have been selected.
# You can select On or Off, when Subwoofer
(subwoofer) has been selected.
# You can switch Reverse (reverse phase) or
Normal (normal phase), when Phase (subwoofer
setting) has been selected.
Correcting the subwoofer’s phase
If trying to boost the bass output of the sub-
woofer doesn’t do much or rather makes you
feel that the bass gets more murky, this may
indicate that the subwoofer’s output and bass
content you hear over other speakers cancel
each other out. To remove this problem, try
changing the phase setting for the subwoofer.
1 Touch Speaker Setting.
2 Touch a or b to select Subwoofer (sub-
woofer).
Each time you touch a or b selects the speak-
er in the following order:
Front (front speakers)—Center (center speak-
er)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (sub-
woofer)—Phase (subwoofer setting)
3 Touch d to turn subwoofer output on.
# To turn subwoofer output off, touch c.
4 Touch b and then touch c or d to se-
lect the phase of subwoofer output.
Touch d to select normal phase and Normal
appears in the display. Touch c to select re-
verse phase and Reverse appears in the dis-
play.
Note
When playing a 2-channel mono source with
Dolby Pro Logic II turned on, there may be occa-
sions when the following will occur:
! No audio is outputted if the center speaker
setting is Small or Large and no center speak-
er is installed.
! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if
installed and the center speaker setting is
Small or Large.
Adjusting the speaker output
levels
Speaker level can be adjusted finely by listen-
ing to an audio output. First, use test tone to
adjust the approximate speaker level, and then
use this function to adjust finely.
1 Touch Speaker Level.
2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to
be adjusted.
Each time you touch a or b selects the speak-
er in the following order:
Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center
speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)—
Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear
speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer)
# You cannot select speakers whose size is set
to Off. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on the
previous page.)
3 Touch c or d to adjust the speaker out-
put level.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the equalizer level. +10 to –10 is dis-
played as the level is increased or decreased.
Note
To adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is
the same as making the speaker output levels at
Test Tone. Both provide the same results.
Selecting a cross-over frequency
You can select a frequency, under which
sounds are reproduced through the subwoo-
fer. If the installed speakers include one whose
size has been set to Small, you can select a
frequency, under which sounds are repro-
duced through a Large speaker or subwoofer.
1 Touch Cross Over.
2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to
be adjusted.
Each time you touch a or b selects the speak-
er in the following order:
Available accessories
En
87
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
Front (front speakers)—Center (center speak-
er)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (sub-
woofer)
3 Touch c or d to select cross-over fre-
quency.
Each time you touch c or d selects cross-over
frequencies in the following order:
63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz—160Hz—
200Hz
Note
Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a cross-
over frequency of the subwoofer’s L.P.F. (low-pass
filter) and that of the Small speaker H.P.F. (high-
pass filter). The cross-over frequency setting has
no effect if the subwoofer is set to Off and other
speakers are set to Large or Off.
Adjusting the speaker output
levels using a test tone
This function allows you to easily get the over-
all balance right among the speakers.
1 Touch Test Tone.
2 Touch Start to start the test tone out-
put.
The test tone is outputted. It rotates from
speaker to speaker in the following sequence
at intervals of about two seconds. The current
settings for the speaker over which you hear
the test tone are shown in the display.
Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center
speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)—
Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear
speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer)
Check each speaker output level. If no adjust-
ments are needed, perform step 4 to stop the
test tone.
# The settings do not appear for speakers
whose size is set to Off. (Refer to Setting the
speaker setting on page 86.)
3 Touch c or d to adjust the speaker out-
put level.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the equalizer level. +10 to –10 is dis-
played as the level is increased or decreased.
# The test tone rotates to the next speaker after
about two seconds from the last operation.
4 Touch Stop to stop the test tone out-
put.
Notes
! If needed, select speakers and adjust their ‘ab-
solute’ output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the
speaker output levels on the previous page.)
! To adjust the speaker output levels in this
mode is the same as making the speaker out-
put levels at Speaker Level (speaker output
level). Both provide the same results.
Using the time alignment
The time alignment lets you adjust the dis-
tance between each speaker and the listening
position.
1 Touch Time Alignment.
2 Touch any of the following touch panel
keys to select the time alignment.
! Initial – Initial time alignment (factory set-
ting)
! Auto TA – Time alignment created by auto
TA and EQ. (Refer to Auto TA and EQ (auto-
time alignment and auto-equalizing) on
page 90.)
! Custom – Adjusted time alignment that
you can create for yourself
! Off – Turn the time alignment off
! TA Adjust – Adjust the time alignment as
desired
# You cannot select Auto TA if auto TA and EQ
has not been carried out.
# You cannot select TA Adjust when neither
Front-L nor Front-R is selected in Position.
Available accessories
En
88
Section
19
Adjusting the time alignment
You can adjust the distance between each
speaker and the selected position.
! An adjusted time alignment is memorized
in Custom.
1 Touch Time Alignment and then touch
TA Adjust.
# You cannot select TA Adjust when neither
Front-L nor Front-R is selected in Position.
2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to
be adjusted.
Each time you touch a or b selects the speak-
er in the following order:
Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center
speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)—
Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear
speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer)
# You cannot select speakers whose size is set
to Off. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on
page 86.)
3 Touch c or d to adjust the distance be-
tween the selected speaker and the listen-
ing position.
Each time you touch c or d increases or de-
creases the distance. 0.0inch to 200.0inch is
displayed as the distance is increased or de-
creased.
Using the equalizer
The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization
to match the car’s interior acoustic character-
istics as desired.
Recalling equalizer curves
There are seven stored equalizer curves which
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list
of the equalizer curves.
Display Equalizer curve
Powerful Powerful
Natural Natural
Vocal Vocal
Flat Flat
Custom1 Custom 1
Custom2 Custom 2
Super Bass Super bass
! Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equal-
izer curves.
! When Flat is selected, no supplement or
correction is made to the sound. This is
useful to check the effect of the equalizer
curves by switching alternatively between
Flat and a set equalizer curve.
1 Touch Parametric EQ.
2 Touch a or b to select the desired item.
Each time you touch a or b selects the item
in the following order:
Equalizer (equalizer)—SP-Select (speakers)—
Band (bands)—Frequency (center frequency)
—Level (equalizer level)—Q. Factor (Q factor)
3 Touch d to select the equalizer.
Touch d repeatedly to switch between the fol-
lowing equalizers:
Powerful—Natural—Vocal—Flat—Custom1
—Custom2—Super Bass
Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer
For Custom1 and Custom2 equalizer curves,
you can adjust the front, rear and center
equalizer curves separately by selecting a cen-
ter frequency, an equalizer level and a Q factor
for each band.
! A separate Custom1 curve can be created
for each source.
! A Custom2 curve can be created common
to all sources.
Available accessories
En
89
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
! The center speaker largely determines the
sound image and getting the balance right
isn’t easy. We recommend reproducing a 2-
ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting
the balance right among the speakers ex-
cept for the center, and then reproducing a
5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad-
justing the center speaker output to the
balance you have already got among the
other speakers.
1 Touch Parametric EQ.
2 Touch a or b to select the desired item.
Each time you touch a or b selects the item
in the following order:
Equalizer (equalizer)—SP-Select (speakers)—
Band (bands)—Frequency (center frequency)
—Level (equalizer level)—Q. Factor (Q factor)
3 Touch d to select the equalizer.
Touch d repeatedly to switch between the fol-
lowing equalizers:
Powerful—Natural—Vocal—Flat—Custom1
—Custom2—Super Bass
4 Touch b and then touch c or d to se-
lect the speaker to be adjusted.
Touch c or d until the desired speaker ap-
pears in the display.
Rear (rear speakers)—Center (center speaker)
—Front (front speakers)
# You cannot select speakers whose size is set
to Off. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on
page 86.)
5 Touch b and then touch c or d to se-
lect the equalizer band to be adjusted.
Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer
bands in the following order:
Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high)
6 Touch b and then touch c or d to se-
lect the center frequency of selected band.
Touch c or d until the desired frequency ap-
pears in the display.
40Hz—50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz
—160Hz—200Hz—250Hz—315Hz—400Hz
—500Hz—630Hz—800Hz—1kHz—1.25kHz
—1.6kHz—2kHz—2.5kHz—3.15kHz—4kHz
—5kHz—6.3kHz—8kHz—10kHz—12.5kHz
7 Touch b and then touch c or d to ad-
just the equalizer level.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the equalizer level. +12 to -12 is dis-
played as the level is increased or decreased.
8 Touch b and then touch c or d to se-
lect the desired Q factor.
Each time you touch c or d switches between
the following Q factor:
Narrow (narrow)—Wide (wide)
# You can adjust parameters for each band of
the other speakers in the same way.
Note
You can select a center frequency for each band.
You can change the center frequency in 1/3-oc-
tave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that
have intervals shorter than 1 octave among the
center frequencies of the three bands.
Using the auto-equalizer
The auto-equalizer is the equalizer curve cre-
ated by auto TA and EQ (refer to Auto TA and
EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing)
on this page).
You can turn the auto-equalizer on or off.
1 Touch Auto EQ.
# You cannot use this function if auto TA and
EQ has not been carried out.
2 Touch d to turn the auto-equalizer on.
# To turn auto-equalizer off, touch c.
Auto TA and EQ (auto-time
alignment and auto-equalizing)
The auto-time alignment is automatically ad-
justed for the distance between each speaker
and the listening position.
Available accessories
En
90
Section
19
The auto-equalizer automatically measures
the car interior acoustic characteristics, and
then creates the auto-equalizer curve based
on that information.
WARNING
To prevent accidents, never carry out auto TA and
EQ while driving. When this function measures
the car interior acoustic characteristics to create
an auto-equalizer curve, a loud measurement
tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers.
CAUTION
! Carrying out auto TA and EQ under the follow-
ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be
sure to check the conditions thoroughly be-
fore carrying out auto TA and EQ.
— When speakers are incorrectly connected.
(e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to
a subwoofer output.)
— When a speaker is connected to a power
amp delivering output higher than the
speaker’s maximum input power capabil-
ity.
! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable
position the measurement tone may become
loud and measurement may take a long time,
resulting in a drain on battery power. Be sure
to place the microphone in the specified loca-
tion.
Before operating the auto TA and EQ
function
! Carry out auto TA and EQ in as quiet a
place as possible, with the car engine and
air conditioning switched off. Also cut
power to car phones or portable telephones
in the car, or remove them from the car be-
fore carrying out auto TA and EQ. Sounds
other than the measurement tone (sur-
rounding sounds, engine sound, tele-
phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct
measurement of the car interior acoustic
characteristics.
! Be sure to carry out auto TA and EQ using
the supplied microphone. Using another
microphone may prevent measurement, or
result in incorrect measurement of the car
interior acoustic characteristics.
! When front speaker is not connected, auto
TA and EQ cannot be carried out.
! When this unit is connected to a power
amp with input level control, auto TA and
EQ may not be possible if you lower power
amp input level. Set the power amp’s input
level to the standard position.
! When this unit is connected to a power
amp with an LPF, turn off the LPF on the
power amp before carrying out auto TA and
EQ. In addition, the cut-off frequency for
built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should
be set to the highest frequency.
! The time alignment value calculated by
auto TA and EQ may differ from the actual
distance in the following circumstances.
However, the distance has been calculated
by computer to be the optimum delay to
give accurate results for the circum-
stances, so please continue to use this
value.
— When the reflected sound within a vehi-
cle is strong and delays occur.
— When delays occur for low sounds due
to the influence of the LPF on active
subwoofers or external amps.
! Auto TA and EQ changes the audio settings
as below:
— The fader/balance settings return to the
center position. (Refer to page 84.)
— The equalizer curve switches to Flat.
(Refer to page 89.)
— It will be adjusted automatically to high
pass filter setting for front, center and
rear speaker.
! If you carry out auto TA and EQ when a pre-
vious setting of this already exists, the set-
ting will be replaced.
Available accessories
En
91
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
Carrying out auto TA and EQ
1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet
as possible, close all doors, windows and
the sun roof, and then turn the engine off.
If the engine is left running, engine noise may
prevent correct auto TA and EQ.
2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen-
ter of the headrest of the driver’s seat, fa-
cing forward, using the belt (sold
separately).
The auto TA and EQ may differ depending on
where you place the microphone. If desired,
place the microphone on the front passenger
seat to carry out auto TA and EQ.
3 Turn the ignition switch to ON or ACC.
If the car’s air conditioner or heater is turned
on, turn it off. Noise from the fan in the air
conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto
TA and EQ.
# Press SRC/OFF to turn the source on if this
unit is turned off.
4 Select the position for the seat on
which the microphone is placed.
Refer to Using the position selector on page
83.
# If no position is selected before you start auto
TA and EQ, Front-L is selected automatically.
5 Touch the source icon and then touch
Off to turn this unit off.
6 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
7 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Initial Menu to display the function names.
8 Touch Auto EQ&TA to enter the auto TA
and EQ measurement mode.
9 Plug the microphone into the micro-
phone input jack on the multi-channel pro-
cessor.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
multi-channel processor’s operation manual.
10 Touch Start to start the auto TA and EQ.
11 Get out of the car and close the door
within 10 seconds when the 10-second
count-down starts.
The measurement tone (noise) is outputted
from the speakers, and auto TA and EQ be-
gins.
# When all speakers are connected, auto TA
and EQ is completed in about nine minutes.
# To stop auto TA and EQ, touch Stop.
# To cancel auto TA and EQ on the way, touch
Back or ESC.
12 When auto TA and EQ is completed,
Complete is displayed.
When correct measurement of car interior
acoustic characteristics is not possible, an
error message is displayed. (Refer to Under-
standing auto TA and EQ error messages on
page 98.)
13 Touch ESC to cancel the auto TA and EQ
mode.
Available accessories
En
92
Section
19
14 Store the microphone carefully in the
glove compartment.
Store the microphone carefully in the glove
compartment or any other safe place. If the
microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for
an extended period, high temperatures may
cause distortion, color change or mal-
function.
Available accessories
En
93
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
Troubleshooting
Common
Symptom Cause Action (See)
Power doesn’t turn on.
The unit doesn’t operate.
Leads and connectors are incor-
rectly connected.
Confirm once more that all connections are
correct.
The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a fuse
with the same rating.
Noise and other factors are causing
the built-in microprocessor to oper-
ate incorrectly.
Press RESET. (Page 10)
Operation with the remote con-
trol isn’t possible.
The unit does not operate cor-
rectly even when the appropriate
remote control buttons are
pressed.
The remote control operation mode
is incorrect.
Switch to the correct remote control mode.
The remote control code is incor-
rect.
Make sure the remote control selection
switch setting and code type setting are the
same.
Battery power is low. Load new battery.
Some operations are prohibited
with certain discs.
Check by using another disc.
Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty. Clean disc. (Page 100)
The loaded disc is a type this unit
cannot play.
Check what type the disc is.
Non compatible video system disc
is loaded.
Change to a disc compatible to your video
system.
No sounds are heard.
The volume level will not rise.
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.
The unit is performing still, slow mo-
tion or frame-by-frame playback.
There is no sound during still, slow motion or
frame-by-frame playback.
There is no picture. The parking brake cord is not con-
nected.
Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the
parking brake.
The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the
parking brake.
The icon is displayed, and op-
eration is not possible.
The operation is prohibited for the
disc.
This operation is not possible.
The operation is not compatible
with the disc’s organization.
This operation is not possible.
The picture stops (pauses) and
the unit cannot be operated.
Reading of data has become impos-
sible during playback.
After stopping playback once, start playback
once more.
There is no sound.
Volume level is low.
The volume level is low. Adjust the volume level.
The attenuator is on. Turn the attenuator off.
There is audio and video skip-
ping.
The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly.
The picture is stretched, the as-
pect is incorrect.
The aspect setting is incorrect for
the display.
Select the appropriate setting for your display.
(Page 47)
When the ignition switch is
turned ON (or turned to ACC),
the motor sounds.
The unit is confirming whether a
disc is loaded or not.
This is a normal operation.
Additional Information
En
94
Appendix
Nothing is displayed.
The touch panel keys cannot be
used.
The rear view camera is not con-
nected.
Camera Polarity is at incorrect set-
ting.
Connect a rear view camera.
Press and hold MUTE to return to the source
display and then select the correct setting for
Camera Polarity. (Page 55)
Problems during DVD playback
Symptom Cause Action (See)
Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re-
gion number from this unit.
Replace the disc with one featuring the same
region number as this unit. (Page 7, Page
112)
A parental lock message is dis-
played and playback is not pos-
sible.
Parental lock is on. Turn parental lock off or change the level.
(Page 48)
Parental lock cannot be can-
celed.
The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number. (Page 48)
You have forgotten your code num-
ber.
Touch C 10 times to cancel the code number.
(Page 48)
Dialog language (and subtitle
language) cannot be switched.
The DVD playing does not feature
multiple language recordings.
You cannot switch among multiple languages
if they are not recorded on the disc.
You can only switch between items
indicated in the disc menu.
Switch using the disc menu.
No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature
subtitles.
Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re-
corded on the disc.
You can only switch between items
indicated in the disc menu.
Switch using the disc menu.
Playback is not with the audio
language and subtitle language
settings selected in Setup.
The DVD playing does not feature
dialog or subtitles in the language
selected in Setup.
Switching to a selected language is not possi-
ble if the language selected in Setup is not
recorded on the disc.
Switching the viewing angle is
not possible.
The DVD playing does not feature
scenes shot from multiple angles.
You cannot switch between multiple angles if
the DVD does not feature scenes recorded
from multiple angles.
You are trying to switch to multiple
angle viewing of a scene that is not
recorded from multiple angles.
Switch between multiple angles when watch-
ing scenes recorded from multiple angles.
The picture is extremely unclear/
distorted and dark during play-
back.
The disc features a signal to prohibit
copying. (Some discs may have
this.)
Since this unit is compatible with the copy
guard analog copy protect system, when play-
ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copy-
ing, the picture may suffer from horizontal
stripes or other imperfections when viewed
on some displays. This does not mean this
unit is malfunctioning.
Problems during Video CD playback
Symptom Cause Action
The PBC (playback control)
menu display cannot be called
up.
The Video CD playing does not fea-
ture PBC.
This operation is not possible with Video CDs
not featuring PBC.
Repeat play and track/time
search are not possible.
The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs
featuring PBC.
Additional Information
En
95
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Problems during iPod playback
Symptom Cause Action
iPod doesn’t operate correctly. Cables are incorrectly connected. Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod
main menu is displayed, connect the cable
again.
Reset the iPod.
The iPod version is old. Update the iPod version.
Problems during multi-channel processor connection
Symptom Cause Action (See)
No sounds are heard.
The volume level will not rise.
Optical cables are not connected
correctly.
Connect the cables correctly.
Even if multi-channel audio is
selected, 2-channel audio is out-
put.
Digital output setting is set to Line-
ar PCM.
Normally, set the digital output setting to
Stream. (Page 49)
Error messages
When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center, be sure to have the error
message recorded.
Built-in DVD player
Message Cause Action
Different Region Disc The disc does not have the same re-
gion number as this unit
Replace the DVD video with one bearing the
correct region number.
Error-02-XX/FF-FF Dirty disc Clean disc.
Scratched disc Replace disc.
The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly.
Electrical or mechanical Press RESET.
Unplayable Disc This type of disc cannot be played
by this unit
Replace the disc with one this unit can play.
The inserted disc does not contain
any files that can be played back
Replace disc.
Protect All the files on the inserted disc are
secured by DRM
Replace disc.
Skipped The inserted disc contains WMA
files that are protected by DRM
Replace disc.
Temp The temperature of this unit is out-
side the normal operating range
Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to
within normal operating limits.
Rental Expired. The inserted disc that contains ex-
pired DivX VOD content.
Replace disc.
File Not Playable-High Defini-
tion
The inserted disc contains high defi-
nition DivX file.
This unit cannot play DivX HD file. Replace
the disc with one this unit can play.
Additional Information
En
96
Appendix
It is not possible to write it in
the flash.
This unit’s flash memory used for
temporary storage area is full.
Select the playable file.
Authorization Error This unit’s DivX registration code
has not been authorized by DivX
VOD contents provider.
Register this unit to DivX VOD contents provi-
der. (Page 49)
Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played by
this unit.
Select the playable file.
USB audio player/USB memory
Message Cause Action
Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played by
this unit.
Select the playable file.
No songs Transfer the audio files to the USB portable
audio player/USB memory and connect.
USB memory with security enabled
is connected
Follow the USB memory instructions to dis-
able the security.
Skipped The connected USB portable audio
player/USB memory contains WMA
files that are protected by Windows
Media™DRM 9/10
Play an audio file not protected by Windows
Media DRM 9/10.
Protect All the files on the connected USB
portable audio player/USB memory
are protected by Windows Media
DRM 9/10
Transfer audio files not protected by Windows
Media DRM 9/10 to the USB portable audio
player/USB memory and connect.
N/A USB The USB device connected to is not
supported by this unit.
Connect a USB portable audio player or USB
memory that is USB Mass Storage Class
compliant.
USB device is not formatted with
FAT16 or FAT32
USB device should be formatted with FAT16
or FAT32.
Check USB The USB connector or USB cable is
short-circuited.
Confirm that the USB connector or USB
cable is not caught in something or da-
maged.
The connected USB portable audio
player/USB memory consumes
more than 500 mA (maximum allow-
able current).
Disconnect the USB portable audio player/
USB memory and do not use it. Turn the igni-
tion switch to OFF, then to ACC or ON and
then connect the compliant USB portable
audio player/USB memory.
Error-02-9X/-DX Communication failure Perform one of the following operations.
–Turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON.
–Disconnect the USB portable audio player/
USB memory.
–Change to a different source.
Then, return to the USB portable audio
player/USB memory.
Additional Information
En
97
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
iPod
Message Cause Action
Error-02-6X/-9X/-DX Communication failure Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod
main menu is displayed, connect the cable
again.
Reset the iPod.
iPod failure Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod
main menu is displayed, connect the cable
again.
Reset the iPod.
Error-02-67 Old version of iPod Update the iPod version.
No Songs No songs Transfer the songs to iPod.
Stop No songs in the current list Select a list that contains the songs.
Understanding auto TA and EQ error messages
When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto
TA and EQ, an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears, refer to the
table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. After
checking, try again.
Message Cause Action
Error. Please check MIC. Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into
the jack.
Error. Please check Front
speaker., Error. Please check
Front-L speaker., Error. Please
check Front-R speaker., Error.
Please check Center speaker.,
Error. Please check Rear
speaker., Error. Please check
Rear-L speaker., Error. Please
check Rear-R speaker., Error.
Please check Subwoofer.
The microphone cannot pick up the
measuring tone of a speaker.
! Confirm that the speakers are connected
correctly.
! Correct the input level setting of the power
amp connected to the speakers.
! Set the microphone correctly.
Error. Please check noise. The surrounding noise level is too
high.
! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as
possible, and switch off the engine, air condi-
tioner or heater.
! Set the microphone correctly.
Additional Information
En
98
Appendix
Understanding messages
Messages Translation
CAUTION: Screen image may appear re-
versed.
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror
reversed images, otherwise screen image may appear re-
versed.
Additional Information
En
99
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Handling guideline of discs
and player
! Use only discs featuring any of following
logos.
DVD video
Video CD
CD
! Use only normal, round discs. If you insert
irregular, non-round, shaped discs they
may jam in the DVD player or not play prop-
erly.
! Check all discs for cracks, scratches or
warping before playing. Discs that have
cracks, scratches or are warped may not
play properly. Do not use such discs.
! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed)
surface when handling the disc.
! Store discs in their cases when not in use.
! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do
not expose the discs to high temperatures.
! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-
micals to the surface of the discs.
! To clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft
cloth outward from the center.
! If the heater is used in cold weather, con-
densation may form on components inside
the DVD player. Condensation may cause
the DVD player to not operate properly. If
you think that condensation is a problem
turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to
allow it to dry out and wipe any damp discs
with a soft cloth to remove the moisture.
! Road shocks may interrupt disc
playback.
DVD discs
! With some DVD video discs, it may not be
possible to use certain functions.
! It may not be possible to play back some
DVD video discs.
! It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/
DVD-RAM discs.
Additional Information
En
100
Appendix
DVD-R/DVD-RW discs
! Unfinalized DVD-R/-RW discs which have
been recorded with the Video format (video
mode) cannot be played back.
! DVD-R/-RW discs which have been re-
corded with the Video Recording format
(VR mode) cannot be played back.
! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/
DVD-RW discs, because of disc character-
istics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,
condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit.
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal
computer may not be possible, depending
on the application settings and the environ-
ment. Please record with the correct for-
mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer
of the application.)
! For more information about recording
mode, please contact manufacture of DVD
recorder or application.
AVCHD recorded discs
! This unit is not compatible with discs re-
corded in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec
High Definition) format. Do not insert
AVCHD discs. If inserted, the disc may not
be ejected.
CD-R/CD-RW discs
! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, play-
back is possible only for discs which have
been finalized.
! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-
corder or a personal computer because of
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the
lens of this unit.
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal
computer may not be possible, depending
on the application settings and the environ-
ment. Please record with the correct for-
mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer
of the application.)
! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may be-
come impossible in case of direct exposure
to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto-
rage conditions in the vehicle.
! Titles and other text information recorded
on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-
played by this unit (in the case of audio
data (CD-DA)).
! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW
discs before using them.
Dual Discs
! Dual Discs are two-sided discs that have a
recordable CD for audio on one side and a
recordable DVD for video on the other.
! Playback of the DVD side is possible with
this unit. However, since the CD side of
Dual Discs is not physically compatible
with the general CD standard, it may not be
possible to play the CD side with this unit.
! Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual
Disc may result in scratches on the disc.
Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-
blems on this unit. In some cases, a Dual
Disc may become stuck in the disc loading
slot and will not eject. To prevent this, we
recommend you refrain from using Dual
Disc with this unit.
! Please refer to the information from the
disc manufacturer for more detailed infor-
mation about Dual Discs.
Compressed audio
compatibility
WMA
! Compatible format: WMA encoded by
Windows Media Player
! File extension: .wma
! Bit rate: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz
! Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Loss-
less, Voice: No
MP3
! File extension: .mp3
! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
Additional Information
En
101
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz (32,
44.1, 48 kHz for emphasis)
! Compatible ID3 tag version: 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3
(ID3 tag Version 2.x is given priority than
Version 1.x.)
! M3u playlist: No
! MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO: No
AAC
! Compatible format: AAC encoded by iTunes
! File extension: .m4a
! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps
! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz
! Transmission rate: 16 kbps to 320 kbps
! Apple Lossless: No
Handling guideline and
supplemental information
! There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of audio files encoded with image
data.
! Only 32 characters from beginning can be
displayed as a file name (including the file
extension) or a folder name.
! The text information of some audio files
may not be correctly displayed.
! This unit may not operate correctly depend-
ing on the application used to encode
WMA files.
Compressed audio files on the disc
! ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2 compliant. Romeo
and Joliet file systems are both compatible
with this player.
! Multi-session playback is possible.
! Compressed audio files are not compatible
with packet write data transfer.
! Regardless of the length of blank section
between the songs of original recording,
compressed audio discs play with a short
pause between songs.
USB audio player/USB memory
CAUTION
Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on
the USB memory/USB portable audio player even
if that data is lost while using this unit.
! This unit can play back files in the USB por-
table audio player/USB memory that is
USB Mass Storage Class. However, copy-
right protected files that are stored in
above-mentioned USB devices cannot be
played back.
! You cannot connect a USB portable audio
player/USB memory to this unit via a USB
hub.
! Partitioned USB memory is not compatible
with this unit.
! Depending on the kind of USB portable
audio player/USB memory you use, this
unit may not recognize the USB audio
player/USB memory or audio files may not
be played back properly.
! Do not leave the USB portable audio
player/USB memory in direct sunlight for
extended amounts of time. Extended expo-
sure to direct sunlight can result in USB
portable audio player/USB memory mal-
function due to the resulting high tempera-
ture.
! Do not leave the USB portable audio
player/USB memory in high temperature.
! Firmly secure the USB portable audio
player/USB memory when driving. Do not
let the USB portable audio player/USB
memory fall onto the floor, where it may be-
come jammed under the brake or accelera-
tor pedal.
! Depending on the USB devices connected
to this unit, it may generate noise in the
radio.
! There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of audio files on a USB portable
audio player/USB memory with numerous
folder hierarchies.
! Do not connect anything other than the
USB portable audio player/USB memory.
Additional Information
En
102
Appendix
! Operations may vary depending on the
kind of USB audio player and a USB mem-
ory.
Example of a hierarchy
: Folder
: Compressed audio file
¨
´

·
'
·
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
The sequence of audio files on
the disc
! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user
cannot assign folder numbers.
! Folder selection sequence or other opera-
tion may be altered depending on the en-
coding or writing software.
! Up to 3 500 files on a DVD (-R/-RW) can be
played back.
! Up to 999 files on a CD (-R/-RW) can be
played back.
! Up to 700 folders on a disc can be played
back.
The sequence of audio files on
USB memory
For USB portable audio players, the sequence is
different from that of USB memory and de-
pends on the player.
! 01 to 05 represent assigned folder num-
bers. 1to 6represent the playback se-
quence. The user cannot assign folder
numbers and specify the playback se-
quence with this unit.
! Playback sequence of the audio file is the
same as recorded sequence in the USB de-
vice.
! To specify the playback sequence, the fol-
lowing method is recommended.
1 Create the file name including numbers
that specify the playback sequence (e.g.,
001xxx.mp3 and 099yyy.mp3).
2 Put those files into a folder.
3 Record the folder containing files into the
USB device.
However, depending on the system environ-
ment, you cannot specify the file playback
sequence.
! Up to 65 535 files on a USB portable audio
player/USB memory can be played back.
! Up to 6 000 folders on a USB portable
audio player/USB memory can be played
back.
iPod compatibility
! This unit supports only the following iPods.
Supported iPod software versions are
shown below. Older versions of iPod soft-
ware may not be supported.
— iPod nano first generation (software ver-
sion 1.3.1)
— iPod nano second generation (software
version 1.1.3)
— iPod nano third generation (software
version 1.1.2)
— iPod fifth generation (software version
1.3.0)
— iPod classic (software version 1.1.2)
— iPod touch (software version 2.0)
— iPhone 3G (software version 2.0)
— iPhone (software version 2.0)
! Depending on the generation or version of
the iPod, some functions can not be oper-
ated.
! Operations may vary depending on the soft-
ware version of iPod.
! When using an iPod, iPod Dock Connector
to USB Cable is required.
Additional Information
En
103
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
! Pioneer CD-IU50 interface cable is also
available. For details, consult your deal-
er.
About handling the iPod
CAUTION
! Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost
on the iPod even if that data is lost while
using this unit.
! Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-
tended amounts of time. Extended exposure
to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-
tion due to the resulting high temperature.
! Do not leave the iPod in a high temperature.
! Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not
let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-
come jammed under the brake or accelerator
pedal.
For details, refer to the iPod’s manuals.
About iPod settings
! When an iPod is connected, this unit
changes the EQ (equalizer) setting of the
iPod to Flat in order to optimize the acous-
tics. When you disconnect the iPod, the EQ
returns to the original setting.
! You cannot set Repeat to off on the iPod
when using this unit. Even if you set Repeat
to off on the iPod, Repeat is automatically
changed to All when connecting the iPod
to this unit.
JPEG picture files
! JPEG is short for Joint Photographic Ex-
perts Group and refers to a still image com-
pression technology standard.
! Files are compatible with Baseline JPEG
and EXIF 2.1 still image up to resolution of
8 192 × 7 680. (EXIF format is used most
commonly with digital still cameras.)
! EXIF format that processed by the personal
computer may not be played back.
! There is no progressive JPEG compatibility.
Important
! When naming a JPEG picture file, add the cor-
responding filename extension (.jpg, .jpeg,
.jpe or .jfif).
! This unit plays back files with the filename ex-
tension (.jpg, .jpeg, .jpe or .jfif) as a JPEG pic-
ture file. To prevent malfunctions, do not use
these extensions for files other than JPEG pic-
ture files.
DivX video files
! Depending on the file information composi-
tion such as the number of audio stream,
there may be a slight delay in the start of
playback on discs.
! Some special operation may be prohibited
because of the composition of DivX files.
! DivX files downloaded only from DivX part-
ner site are guarantee of proper operation.
Unauthorized DivX file may not operate
properly.
! DRM rental file cannot be operated until
starting playing back.
! This unit corresponds to a DivX file display
up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds. Also,
search operation beyond this time limit is
prohibited.
! If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback
is stopped on the way.
! DivX VOD file playback requires ID code of
this unit to DivX VOD provider. About ID
code, refer to Displaying your DivX
®
VOD re-
gistration code on page 49.
! For more details about DivX, visit the follow-
ing site:
http://www.divx.com/
DivX compatibility
! Compatible format: DivX video format im-
plemented in relation to DivX standards
! File extensions: .avi or .divx
! DivX Ultra format: No
! DivX HD format: No
! DivX files without video data: No
! Compatible audio codec: MP2, MP3, Dolby
Digital
Additional Information
En
104
Appendix
! LPCM: No
! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz
! Compatible external subtitle file extension:
.srt
Using the display correctly
CAUTION
! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside
this unit, turn off the power immediately and
consult your dealer or the nearest authorized
PIONEER Service Station. Do not use the unit
in this condition because doing so may result
in fire, electric shock, or other failure.
! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell,
or any other abnormal signs from the display,
turn off the power immediately and consult
your dealer or the nearest authorized
PIONEER Service Station. Using this unit in
this condition may result in permanent da-
mage to the system.
! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as
there are high-voltage components inside
which may cause electric shock. Be sure to
consult your dealer or the nearest authorized
PIONEER Service Station for internal inspec-
tion, adjustments, or repairs.
Handling the display
! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the
display when this unit is not being used.
Extended exposure to direct sunlight can
result in LCD screen malfunction due to
the resulting high temperatures.
! Never touch the screen with anything be-
sides your finger when operating the touch
panel function. The screen can scratch ea-
sily.
! When the display is subjected to direct sun-
light for a long period of time, it will be-
come very hot resulting in possible
damage to the LCD screen. You should
avoid exposing the display unit to direct
sunlight as much as possible.
! The display should be used within the tem-
perature ranges shown below.
Storage temperature range: -20 °C to +80
°C
At temperatures higher or lower than the
operating temperature range, the display
may not operate normally.
! The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-
crease its visibility within the vehicle.
Please do not press strongly on it as this
may damage it.
! Do not push the LCD screen forcefully as
this may scratch it.
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen
! Heat from the heater may damage the LCD
screen, and cool air from the cooler may
cause moisture to form inside the display
resulting in possible damage. Also, if the
display is cooled down by the cooler, the
screen may become dark, or the life span
of the small fluorescent tube used inside
the display may be shortened.
! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)
may appear on the LCD screen. These are
due to the characteristics of the LCD
screen and do not indicate a problem with
the display.
! At low temperatures, the LCD screen may
be dark for a while after the power is turned
on.
! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is
exposed to direct sunlight.
! When using a portable phone, keep the an-
tenna of the portable phone away from the
display to prevent disruption of the video by
the appearance of spots, colored stripes,
etc.
LED (light-emitting diode)
backlight
! At low temperatures, using the LED back-
light may increase image lag and degrade
the image quality because of the character-
istics of the LCD screen. Image quality will
improve with an increase in temperature.
! To protect the LED backlight, display will
darken in the following environment:
Additional Information
En
105
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
— In the direct sunlight
— Near the heater vent
! The product lifetime of the LED backlight is
more than 10 000 hours. However, it may
decrease if used in high temperatures.
! If the LED backlight reaches the end of its
product lifetime, the screen will become
dark and the image will no longer be pro-
jected. In this case, please consult your
dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER
Service Station.
Changing the wide screen size
By changing the screen size from 4:3 to 16:9,
you can adjust the screen so that the screen
can fit to the video image you are playing.
For details concerning operation, refer to
Changing the wide screen mode on page 53.
Changing the picture adjustment
You can make the best adjustment to the pic-
ture display by the Brightness, Contrast,
Color, Hue, Temperature and Black Level.
You can also dim or brighten the overall pic-
ture the Dimmer.
For details concerning operation, refer to
Changing the picture adjustment on page 54.
Keeping the display in good
condition
! When removing dust from the screen or
cleaning the display, first turn the system
power off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
! When wiping the screen, take care not to
scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or
abrasive chemical cleaners.
Small fluorescent tube
! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the
display to illuminate the LCD screen.
— The fluorescent tube should last for ap-
proximately 10 000 hours, depending on
operating conditions. (Using the display
at low temperatures reduces the service
life of the fluorescent tube.)
— When the fluorescent tube reaches the
end of its useful life, the screen will be
dark and the image will no longer be
projected. If this happens, consult your
dealer or the nearest authorized
PIONEER Service Station.
Additional Information
En
106
Appendix
Language code chart for DVD
Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code
Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721
French (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814
German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815
Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904
Portuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907
Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909
Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911
Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912
Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913
Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914
Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915
Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917
Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918
Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919
Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920
Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921
Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923
Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Tamil (ta), 2001
Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 Telugu (te), 2005
Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 Tajik (tg), 2007
Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008
Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 Turkmen (tk), 2011
Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Tagalog (tl), 2012
Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014
Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Tonga (to), 2015
Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Turkish (tr), 2018
Welsh (cy), 0325 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Tsonga (ts), 2019
Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Tatar (tt), 2020
Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 Twi (tw), 2023
Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118
Basque (eu), 0521 Burmese (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126
Persian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 Volapük (vo), 2215
Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wolof (wo), 2315
Faroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408
Frisian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Yoruba (yo), 2515
Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Panjabi (pa), 1601
Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612
Additional Information
En
107
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Copyright and trademark
notice
! This product incorporates copyright protec-
tion technology that is protected by method
claims of certain U.S. patents and other in-
tellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights
owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses
only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engi-
neering or disassembly is prohibited.
DVD video
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
WMA
Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra-
demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
! This product includes technology owned by
Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used
or distributed without a license from
Microsoft Licensing, Inc.
MP3
Supply of this product only conveys a license
for private, non-commercial use and does not
convey a license nor imply any right to use
this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-
generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial,
satellite, cable and/or any other media), broad-
casting/streaming via internet, intranets and/
or other networks or in other electronic con-
tent distribution systems, such as pay-audio or
audio-on-demand applications. An indepen-
dent license for such use is required. For de-
tails, please visit
http://www.mp3licensing.com.
iTunes
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
iPhone
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Additional Information
En
108
Appendix
Dolby Pro Logic II
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-
D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DTS Digital Out
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent
#: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and worldwide pa-
tents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital
Out are registered trademarks and the DTS
logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
DivX
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under li-
cense.
SAT Radio
! The system will use direct satellite-to-recei-
ver broadcasting technology to provide lis-
teners in their cars and at home with
crystal-clear sound seamlessly from coast
to coast. Satellite radio will create and
package over 100 channels of digital-quality
music, news, sports, talk and children’s
programming.
HD Radio Technology
! HD Radio™and the HD Radio Ready logo
are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digi-
tal Corp.
Additional Information
En
109
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Terms
AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and
refers to an audio compression technology
standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4.
Aspect ratio
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional
presence and atmosphere.
Bit rate
This expresses data volume per second, or bps
(bits per second) units. The higher the rate,
the more information is available to reproduce
the sound. Using the same encoding method
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better
the sound.
Chapter
DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters
which are numbered in the same way as the
chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea-
turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired
scene with chapter search.
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by
DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-
pressed video with high visual quality that
maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files
can also include advanced media features like
menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.
Many DivX media files are available for down-
load online, and you can create your own
using your personal content and easy-to-use
tools from DivX.com.
DivX Certified
DivX Certified products are officially tested by
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all
versions of DivX video, including DivX 6.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio
from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is
the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound
system used in theaters.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II can create five full-band-
width output channels from two-channel
sources. This new technology enables a dis-
crete 5-channel playback with 2 front chan-
nels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear channels. A
music mode is also available for 2-channel
sources in addition to the movie mode.
DTS
This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is
a surround system delivering multi-channel
audio from up to 6 independent channels.
Dynamic range control
Dolby Digital has a function for compressing
the difference between the loudest and softest
sounds: Dynamic range control. This control
ensures sounds with an increased dynamic
range are heard clearly even at low volume le-
vels.
EXIF (Exchangeable image file)
A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for
digital still cameras. Digital cameras from var-
ious manufacturers use this compressed file
format which carries date, time and thumbnail
information, as well as the picture data.
ID3 tag
This is a method of embedding track-related
information in an MP3 file. This embedded in-
formation can include the track title, the ar-
tist’s name, the album title, the music genre,
the year of production, comments and other
data. The contents can be freely edited using
software with ID3 Tag editing functions.
Although the tags are restricted as to the num-
ber of characters, the information can be
viewed when the track is played back.
Additional Information
En
110
Appendix
ISO9660 format
This is the international standard for the for-
mat logic of CD-ROM folders and files. For the
ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the
following two levels.
Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con-
sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English
capital letters and half-byte numerals and the
“_” sign, with a file-extension of three charac-
ters).
Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters (in-
cluding the separation mark “.” and a file ex-
tension). Each folder contains less than 8
hierarchies.
Extended formats
Joliet:
File names can have up to 64 characters.
Romeo:
File names can have up to 128 characters.
JPEG
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts
Group, and is an international still image com-
pression standard.
Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code
modulation
This stands for linear pulse code modulation,
which is the signal recording system used for
music CDs and DVDs. Generally, DVDs are re-
corded with higher sampling frequency and
bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide
higher sound quality.
m3u
Playlists created using the “WINAMP” soft-
ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
MP3
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an
audio compression standard set by a working
group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan-
dards Organization). MP3 is able to compress
audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con-
ventional disc.
MPEG
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts
Group, and is an international video image
compression standard. Some DVDs feature di-
gital audio compressed and recorded using
this system.
MS ADPCM
This stands for Microsoft adaptive differential
pulse code modulation, which is the signal re-
cording system used for the multimedia soft-
ware of Microsoft Corporation.
Multi-angle
With regular TV programs, although multiple
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot
scenes, only images from one camera at a
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)
Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi-
ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages
can be recorded on a single disc, letting you
choose as desired.
Multi-session
Multi-session is a recording method that al-
lows additional data to be recorded later.
When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or
CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is
treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-
sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses-
sions on one disc.
Multi-subtitle
Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re-
corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as
desired.
Number of quantization bits
The number of quantization bits is one factor
in the overall sound quality; the higher the
“bit-depth”, the better the sound quality. How-
ever, increasing the bit-depth also increases
the amount of data and therefore storage
space required.
Additional Information
En
111
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Packet write
This is a general term for a method of writing
on CD-R, etc., at the time required for a file,
just as is done with files on floppy or hard
discs.
Parental lock
Some DVD video discs with violent or adult-or-
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-
vents children from viewing such scenes. With
this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for
children will be disabled, or these scenes will
be skipped.
Playback control (PBC)
This is a playback control signal recorded on
Video CDs (Version 2.0). Using menu displays
provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy
playback of simple interactive software and
software with search functions. You can also
enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution
still images.
Region number
DVD players and DVD discs feature region
numbers indicating the area in which they
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-
sible unless it features the same region num-
ber as the DVD player.
Title
DVD video discs have high data capacity, en-
abling recording of multiple movies on a sin-
gle disc. If, for example, one disc contains
three separate movies, they are divided into
title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the
convenience of title search and other func-
tions.
VBR
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally
speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit
rate according to the needs of audio compres-
sion, it is possible to achieve compression-
priority sound quality.
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media™Audio
and refers to an audio compression technol-
ogy that is developed by Microsoft
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by
using Windows Media Player version 7 or
later.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra-
demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Additional Information
En
112
Appendix
Specifications
General
Power source ............................. 14.4 V DC (10.8 V to 15.1 V
allowable)
Grounding system ................... Negative type
Max. current consumption
..................................................... 10.0 A
Dimensions (W × H × D):
DIN
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm × 165
mm
(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/2 in.)
Nose ........................... 171 mm × 97 mm × 8 mm
(6-3/4 in.× 3-7/8 in.× 3/8 in.)
Weight .......................................... 1.7 kg (3.7 lbs)
Display
Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 5.8 inch wide/16:9
(effective display area: 128.1
× 71 mm)
Pixels ............................................. 336 960 (1 440 × 234)
Display method ........................ TFT active matrix
Color system .............................. NTSC
Durable temperature range (power off)
..................................................... -20 °C to +80 °C
Audio
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4
50 W × 2/4 W + 70 W × 1/2
W (for subwoofer)
Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (1 kHz, 5% THD, 4
W load, both channels dri-
ven)
Load impedance ...................... 4 W to 8 W × 4
4 W to 8 W × 2 + 2 W × 1
Preout max output level ....... 4.0 V
Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer):
Low
Frequency ................ 40/80/100/160 Hz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Gain ............................ ±12 dB
Mid
Frequency ................ 200/500/1k/2k Hz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Gain ............................ ±12 dB
High
Frequency ................ 3.15k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Gain ............................ ±12 dB
HPF:
Frequency .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz
Slope .................................... –12 dB/oct
Subwoofer (mono):
Frequency .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz
Slope .................................... –18 dB/oct
Gain ...................................... +6 dB to –24 dB
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse
Bass boost:
Gain ...................................... +12 dB to 0 dB
DVD Player
System .......................................... DVD video, Video CD, CD,
WMA, MP3, AAC, DivX,
JPEG system
Usable discs .............................. DVD video, Video CD, CD,
CD-R/RW, DVD-R/RW/RDL
Region number ........................ 1
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,
at sampling frequency 96
kHz)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-
work) (RCA level)
Output level:
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W (±0.2 V)
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3
WMA decoding format ......... Ver. 7, 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch
audio)
(Windows Media Player)
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (iTunes en-
coded only) (.m4a)
(Ver. 8.0 and earlier)
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver. 3, 4, 5.2,
6 (.avi, .divx)
USB
USB standard specification
..................................................... USB 1.1, USB 2.0 full speed
Maximum current supply .... 500 mA
USB Class ................................... MSC (Mass Storage Class)
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3
WMA decoding format ......... Ver. 7, 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch
audio)
(Windows Media Player)
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (iTunes en-
coded only) (.m4a)
(Ver. 8.0 and earlier)
FM tuner
Frequency range ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz
Usable sensitivity ..................... 9 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono,
S/N: 30 dB)
Additional Information
En
113
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 72 dB (IHF-A network)
AM tuner
Frequency range ...................... 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz (10
kHz)
Usable sensitivity ..................... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 62 dB (IHF-A network)
CEA2006 Specifications
Power output ............................. 14 W RMS × 4 Channels (4
Wand ≦ 1 % THD+N)
S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into
4 W)
Note
Specifications and the design are subject to mod-
ifications without notice due to improvements.
Additional Information
En
114
Appendix
A
Angle icon ..................................................22,.47
Aspect ratio .............................................47,.110
Audio language ...................................21,.34,.46
B
Bookmark .........................................................20
Brightness ........................................................54
C
Chapter ...........................................................110
Code number ...................................................48
Color .................................................................54
Contrast ............................................................54
D
DivX ...................................................15,.109,.110
DivX Certified .................................................110
Dolby Digital ..............................................9,.110
Dolby Pro Logic II .................................109,.110
DTS .............................................................9,.110
Dynamic range control ................................110
E
EXIF .................................................................110
H
Hue ...................................................................54
J
JPEG ...............................................................111
L
Language code chart ...................................107
Linear PCM (LPCM) ......................................111
M
Menu language ...............................................47
MPEG ..............................................................111
Multi-angle ...............................................22,.111
Multi-audio .........................................21,.34,.111
Multi-subtitle ......................................22,.34,.111
P
Parental lock ............................................48,.112
PBC (playback control) ..................................24
Playback control (PBC) ................................112
R
Region number .........................................7,.112
S
Subtitle language ................................22,.34,.46
T
Title .................................................................112
TV aspect ..........................................................47
V
Video CD ........................................................100
W
Wide screen mode ..........................................53
Index
En
115
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU
TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.
TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936
TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia
TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada
TEL: 1-877-283-5901
TEL: 905-479-4411
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000
TEL: 55-9178-4270
先鋒股份有限公司
總公司: 台北市中山北路二段44號13樓
電話:(02) 2521-3588
先鋒電子(香港)有限公司
香港九龍尖沙嘴海港域世界商業中心
9樓901-6室
電話:(0852) 2848-6488
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright ©2008-2009 by Pioneer
Corporation. All rights reserved.
Printed in Thailand
<CRB2864-B/N> UC <KOKZX> <09A00000>

Contents

Thank you for purchasing this PIONEER product.
Please read through this manual before using the product for the first time, to ensure proper use. After reading, please keep the manual in a safe and accessible place for future reference.
Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 18 Tuning in strong signals 18 Playing DVD discs Watching a DVD 19 Skipping back or forward to another title 20 Operating the DVD menu 20 Resume playback (Bookmark) 20 CM skip/CM back 20 Frame-by-frame playback 21 Slow motion playback 21 Pausing playback 21 Searching for the part you want to play 21 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 21 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 22 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 22 Return to the specified scene 22 Automatic playback of DVDs 22 Introduction of advanced DVD operation 23 Repeating play 23 Selecting audio output 23 Playing Video CDs Watching a Video CD 24 PBC playback 24 Frame-by-frame playback 25 Slow motion playback 25 Pausing playback 25 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time 25 Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 25 Repeating play 26 Selecting audio output 26 Playing CDs Listening to a CD 27 Selecting tracks from the track title list 27

Be sure to read this ! DVD video disc region numbers 7 ! When an operation is prohibited 10 ! Handling guideline of discs and player 100 Precautions IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS 5 To ensure safe driving 5 When using a rear view camera 6 To avoid battery exhaustion 6 Before You Start Information to User 7 For Canadian model 7 About this unit 7 About this manual 7 After-sales service for Pioneer products 8 Visit our website 8 Features 8 When an operation is prohibited 10 Resetting the microprocessor 10 Feature demo mode 10 What’s what Head unit 11 Optional remote control 11 Basic Operations Power ON/OFF 12 Selecting a source 12 Adjusting the volume 13 Touch panel key basic operation 13 Built-in DVD player basic operations 15 Radio Listening to the radio 17 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 17 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 18

2

En

Contents

Pausing playback 27 Switching the media file type 28 Using advanced sound retriever 28 Introduction of advanced CD operation 28 Repeating play 28 Playing tracks in random order 28 Scanning tracks of a CD 28 Playing compressed audio Listening to compressed audio 29 Selecting files from the file name list 30 Pausing playback 30 Switching the media file type 30 Using advanced sound retriever 30 Introduction of advanced compressed audio operation 30 Repeating play 31 Playing tracks in random order 31 Scanning folders and tracks 31 Playing DivX/JPEG files Watching a DivX/JPEG 32 Viewing a JPEG slideshow 33 Playing DivX® VOD content 33 Selecting files from the file name list 33 Displaying text information on DivX/JPEG disc 34 Pausing playback 34 Switching the media file type 34 Searching for the part you want to play 34 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 34 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 34 Capture an image in JPEG files 34 Introduction of advanced DivX/JPEG operation 35 Repeating play 35 Playing tracks in random order 35 Playing songs in a USB storage device Basic Operations 36

Selecting files from the file name list 36 Pausing compressed audio playback 37 Switching the media file type 37 Using advanced sound retriever 37 Introduction to advanced operations 37 Using iPod Basic Operations 38 Playing video 39 Browsing for a song/video 39 Displaying text information on iPod Video 40 Pausing playback 40 Using advanced sound retriever 40 Repeating play 40 Playing songs/videos in a random order (shuffle) 41 Playing all songs in a random order (shuffle all) 41 Operating this unit’s iPod function from your iPod 41 Selecting songs from lists related to the currently playing song 41 Changing audiobook speed 41 Changing the screen mode 42 Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 43 Using balance adjustment 43 Using the equalizer 43 Adjusting loudness 44 Using subwoofer output 44 Boosting the bass 44 Using the high pass filter 45 Adjusting source levels 45 Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 46 Setting the subtitle language 46 Setting the audio language 46 Setting the menu language 47 Setting the angle icon display 47
En

3

Contents Setting the aspect ratio 47 Setting the slide show interval 47 Setting the parental lock 48 Setting the DivX subtitle file 48 Displaying your DivX® VOD registration code 49 Setting for digital output 49 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 50 Switching the auxiliary setting 50 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 50 Changing languages for CAUTION 51 Switching the sound muting/attenuation 51 Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection 51 Correcting distorted sound 52 Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) 52 Resetting the audio functions 52 System settings Introduction of system adjustments 53 Changing the wide screen mode 53 Changing the picture adjustment 54 Setting the AV input 54 Setting the clock 55 Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) 55 Entertainment settings Introduction of entertainment settings 56 Selecting the background display 56 Selecting the illumination color 56 Selecting the OSD color 57 Other Functions Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (Touch Panel Calibration) 58 Using the AUX source 58 Using the external unit 59 Available accessories Multi-CD Player 61 XM tuner 63 SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner 66 HD Radio™ tuner 70 Bluetooth Audio 72 Bluetooth Telephone 74 TV tuner 81 Digital Signal Processor 83 Additional Information Troubleshooting 94 Error messages 96 Understanding auto TA and EQ error messages 98 Understanding messages 99 Handling guideline of discs and player 100 DVD discs 100 DVD-R/DVD-RW discs 101 AVCHD recorded discs 101 CD-R/CD-RW discs 101 Dual Discs 101 Compressed audio compatibility 101 Handling guideline and supplemental information 102 Example of a hierarchy 103 iPod compatibility 103 About handling the iPod 104 JPEG picture files 104 DivX video files 104 Using the display correctly 105 Language code chart for DVD 107 Copyright and trademark notice 108 Terms 110 Specifications 113 Index 115 4 En .

If you experience difficulty in operating the system or reading the display. will appear on the front display. If you are ever in an accident. the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. certain functions are disabled unless the parking brake is on. Installation or servicing of the display by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards. 2 Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and safety information. Where such regulations apply. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions carefully. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully before operating your display. En 5 . hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver’s ability to safely operate the vehicle. 10 Never set the volume of your display so high that you cannot hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. rear displays should not be in a location where they are visibly distracting to the driver. Video CD or TV while driving. including air bags. ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. ! To avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws. (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle’s operating systems or safety features. 5 Do not install the display where it may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision. 8 Never use headphones while driving. 4 Do not allow other persons to use this system until they have read and understood the operating instructions.Section Precautions IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future reference. 6 Do not operate this display if doing so in any way will divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver. the warning Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohibited. 7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. 9 To promote safety. Also. 01 Precautions WARNING ! Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself. Always observe safe driving rules and follow all existing traffic regulations. To ensure safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD AT POWER CONNECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT PARKED STATUS AND MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE POWER SUPPLY SIDE OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH. park your vehicle in a safe location and make necessary adjustments. IMPROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MAY VIOLATE APPLICABLE LAW AND MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DAMAGE. When you attempt to watch a DVD. ! To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the potential violation of applicable laws. they must be obeyed and this unit’s DVD features should not be used. and the vehicle is not in motion.

To prevent such functions from being used while the vehicle is in motion. We recommend that you transcribe the audio adjustment data. or while backing up. the microcomputer of this unit is returned to its initial condition. and then (3) apply the parking brake again. WARNING NEVER install the rear display in a location that enables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while driving. (2) release the parking brake. CAUTION ! The rear view camera function is to be used as an aid to keep an eye on trailers. Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake. ! When no power is supplied to this unit because of a replacement of the vehicle battery or for some similar reason. ! USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. and whether the images are used for checking the rear when the vehicle is moving forward. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. WARNING ! SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED. To avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this unit. If you attempt to use the functions described above while driving. Video CD or TV on the front display. When using a display connected to V OUT This unit’s V OUT is for connection of a display to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or TV. ! Please note that the edges of the rear view camera images may differ slightly according to whether full screen images are displayed when backing up. there is an interlock system that senses when the parking brake is set. park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. Do not use for entertainment purposes. Parking brake interlock Certain functions (DVD/TV viewing and certain touch panel keys) offered by this unit could be dangerous and/or unlawful if used while driving. 6 En . you are able to use this unit as an aid to keep an eye on trailers. or backing into a tight parking spot. When using a rear view camera With an optional rear view camera. OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE. they will become disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place.Section 01 Precautions To watch a DVD. and (1) apply the parking brake. Using this unit without running the engine can result in battery drainage.

smoke. CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit’s potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. WARNING Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the product may expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. CAUTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. Electrical shock could result. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use. The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit and this manual (refer to Specifications on page 113). About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and operation.Section Before You Start Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate the equipment. Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. damage to this unit. Wash hands after handling. Protect this unit from moisture. DVD video disc region numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player. Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautions. 02 Before You Start For Canadian model This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Use in other areas may result in poor reception. CAUTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. and overheating could result from contact with liquids. ! ! ! ! Also. be sure to record this number on the enclosed warranty card. If the battery is disconnected or discharged. For your own security and convenience. En 7 . but many are not self-explanatory. Important (Serial number) The serial number is located on the bottom of this unit. We recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by reading through the manual before you begin using this unit. About this unit The tuner frequencies on this unit are allocated for use in North America. It is especially important that you read and observe WARNINGs and CAUTIONs in this manual. the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed.

please contact the companies listed below: Please do not ship your unit to the companies at the addresses listed below for repair without advance contact. 8 En . 2 Receive updates on the latest products and technologies. DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard. scroll bar and scrubber bar can be controlled at your fingertip. WMA file playback You can play back WMA files recorded on CDR/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard). UDF 1. CA 90801-1760 800-421-1404 CANADA Pioneer Electronics of Canada. DVD-R/RW compatibility It is possible to play back DVD-R/RW discs recorded with the video format and Video Recording format.) Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control).pioneerelectronics. order product catalogues. U. Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. Serial number Features Touch panel key operation It is possible to operate this unit by using touch panel key.02) and USB storage device (FAT 16. CD playback Music CD/CD-R/RW playback is possible.S. DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard.A. 3 Download owner’s manuals. Inc. MP3 file playback You can play back MP3 files recorded on CDR/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard). FAT 32). We will keep the details of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or theft.O. Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 4 Your feedback is important in our continual effort to design and build the most advanced.02) and USB storage device (FAT 16.Section 02 Before You Start After-sales service for Pioneer products Please contact the dealer or distributor from where you purchased this unit for after-sales service (including warranty conditions) or any other information. FAT 32).com 1 Register your product. and much more. Visit our website Visit us at the following site: http://www. cunsumer-focused product in the industry. Box 1760 Long Beach. CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT 300 Allstate Parkway Markham. For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with this unit. In case the necessary information is not available. (Refer to DVD-R/DVD-RW discs on page 101. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION P. UDF 1. Also. research new products.

keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order. Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility When using this unit with a Pioneer multichannel processor.e.g. CD-BTB200). you can control Bluetooth audio player featuring Bluetooth wireless technology. talk and children’s programming.g. Inc. En . This unit can play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. For satellite radio tuner operation. 02 About DivX DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX® video codec from DivX. listen to songs and view videos on an iPod.. Official DivX® Certified product Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX® media files Before You Start 9 About the SAT RADIO READY mark The SAT RADIO READY mark indicates that the Satellite Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i. This unit corresponds to the following. you can enjoy the atmosphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5. XM tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold separately) can be controlled by this unit. DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard. individual DivX video files are called “Titles”.02) and USB storage device (FAT 16. MP3 and AAC file playback — JPEG file playback iPod compatibility This unit can control. Please inquire to your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer service station regarding the satellite radio tuner that can be connected to this unit. CD-BTB200). Bluetooth audio player compatibility Using Bluetooth adapter (e. For details about the supported iPod. Keeping the same terminology as DVD video. ! The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide listeners in their cars and at home with crystal-clear sound seamlessly from coast to coast. this unit realizes effortless hands-free phoning with Bluetooth wireless technology. Hands-free phoning Using Bluetooth adapter (e.Section Before You Start AAC file playback You can play back AAC files recorded on CDR/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard). FAT 32).1 channel recordings. refer to iPod compatibility on page 103. news. UDF 1. sports. When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning. please refer to the satellite radio tuner owner’s manual. Satellite radio will create and package over 100 channels of digital-quality music. JPEG picture file playback You can play back JPEG picture files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and USB storage device. — USB MSC (Mass Storage Class) compliant portable audio player and memory — WMA. Portable audio player compatibility ! Make inquiries to the manufacturer about your USB portable audio player/USB memory. DivX® video compatibility Refer to DivX compatibility on page 104.

To restart the feature demo. To cancel the feature demo. Feature demo mode The feature demo automatically starts when you select the source Off. RESET button Note After completing connections or when you want to erase all memorized settings or return the unit to its initial (factory) settings.Section 02 Before You Start When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to perform an operation. it may drain battery power. Resetting the microprocessor Pressing RESET lets you reset the microprocessor to its initial settings without changing the bookmark information. The demo continues while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. the icon appears on the screen. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. press and hold MUTE again. If this is not done. When this happens. Important The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be connected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations. 10 En . Remember that if the feature demo continues operating when the car engine is turned off. switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET. it may not be performed because of the programming on the disc. the vehicle battery may be drained. 2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. press and hold MUTE. The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: ! Prior to using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly ! When strange or incorrect messages appear on the display 1 Turn the ignition switch OFF.

Section What’s what 03 What’s what Head unit 1 c/d (TRK) buttons Press to do manual seek tuning. it is dangerous to connect directly. 6 DISP OFF button Press to turn the information display on or off. 7 USB port Use to connect a USB storage device and an iPod. open up the USB connector lid. For details concerning operations. reverse and track search controls. fast forward. Optional remote control The remote control CD-R55 is sold separately. 9 MUTE button Press to turn off the sound. 3 RESET button Press to return to the factory settings (initial settings). 4 h (eject) button Press to eject a disc from this unit. En 11 . ! Use an optional Pioneer USB cable (CDU50E) to connect the USB audio player/ USB memory to the USB port. a SRC/OFF button Press to cycle through all the available sources. 8 AUX1 input jack (3. To turn on the sound.5 mm stereo/video jack) Use to connect an auxiliary device. press again. 2 +/– (VOL) buttons Press to increase or decrease the volume. see the remote control manual. Since the USB audio player/USB memory is pro- jected forward from the unit. 5 Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play. Do not use the unauthorized product. Press and hold to turn the source off. ! When connecting.

— When there is no disc or magazine in the player. # To close source select menu. # While operating the menu. touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. To switch to the DVD player. press SRC/OFF and hold until the unit turns off. % When using the button. tuner source is skipped. load a disc in the unit. — When the AV (AV input) is not set to Video (refer to page 54). touch the source icon and then touch Off. % When using the button. The source names are displayed and selectable ones are highlighted. % When using the button. — USB/iPod is displayed when no device is connected. touch ESC. Selecting a source You can select a source you want to listen to. USB/iPod icon will be changed. Notes ! In the following cases. press SRC/OFF to turn the unit on. you cannot select a source by touching the source icon. ! If the HD Radio tuner is connected to this unit. — When AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 50). press SRC/OFF repeatedly to select a desired source. ! In the following cases. you can display it by touching the screen. — USB is displayed when USB storage device is connected. — iPod is displayed when iPod is connected. 1 Source icon Turning the unit on % When using the touch panel keys. The source names are displayed and selectable ones are highlighted. — When no unit corresponding to the selected source is connected. ! Disc – Built-in DVD player ! Radio – Radio 12 En . you can display it by touching the screen. touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. Turning the unit off % When using the touch panel keys. the sound source will not change.Section 04 Basic Operations Power ON/OFF 1 ! M-CD – Multi-CD player ! TV – Television ! AV – AV input ! EXT-1 – External unit 1 ! EXT-2 – External unit 2 ! AUX-1 – AUX 1 ! AUX-2 – AUX 2 ! USB/iPod – USB/iPod ! TEL – Bluetooth telephone ! BT Audio – Bluetooth audio player ! XM – XM tuner ! SIRIUS – SIRIUS tuner ! HD Radio – HD Radio tuner ! RearView – Rear view camera ! Off – Turn the unit off # When the source icon is not displayed. # When the source icon is not displayed. % When using the touch panel keys.

the vehicle’s antenna extends when this unit’s source is turned on. stop charging. enables control of basic functions with this unit. When two external units are connected. # If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds. 04 Touch panel key basic operation Activating the touch panel keys 1 Basic Operations 2 1 Information area Shows the various information depending on the source. In this case. ! When this unit’s blue/white lead is connected to the vehicle’s auto-antenna relay control terminal. ! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as ones available in the future) that. 1 Touch the screen to activate the touch panel keys corresponding to each source. To retract the antenna. the external unit is automatically allocated to external unit 1 or external unit 2 by this unit. Adjusting the volume % Press + or – to adjust the sound level. ! RearView (rear view camera) cannot be selected by pressing SRC/OFF.Section Basic Operations ! AUX1 is set to Video by default. 2 Touch panel keys Touch to do various operations. The touch panel keys appear on the display. 2 Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. # To return to the previous group of touch panel keys. touch NEXT. For details. turn the source off. Two external units can be controlled with this unit. En 13 . ! Charging the portable audio player using car’s DC power source while connecting it to AUX input may generate noise. although incompatible as a source. ! Image from rear view camera can be displayed automatically when the appropriate setting is conducted. they will be hidden automatically when selecting video sources. # To go to the next group of touch panel keys. Set the AUX1 to Off when not in use (refer to Switching the auxiliary setting on page 50). touch PREV. refer to Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) on page 55.

2 Audio Menu key Touch to switch to the sound quality control menu. Operating the scroll bar and the scrubber bar 1 1 Function Menu key Touch to switch to the functions for each source. 6 Back key Touch to return to the previous display. 2 Touch the desired key to display the function names you want to operate. 3 System Menu key Touch to switch to the setup functions menu. 1 Touch AV Menu to display Menu. you can drag the scroll bar on the left side of the menu to view the hidden objects.Section 04 Basic Operations Operating the menu # When AV Menu is not displayed. 3 Touch ESC to return to the display of each source. you can specify the playback point by dragging the scrubber bar. 2 1 Scroll bar 2 Scrubber bar This unit features touch operation of scroll bar and scrubber bar. 4 Entertainment Menu key Touch to switch to the entertainment setup menu. 5 ESC key Touch to cancel the control mode of functions. The menu names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. If the menu has multiple pages or list has more than five selections. For the disc and USB storage device operation. you can display it by touching the screen. 14 En .

Built-in DVD player basic operations Playing a disc % Insert a DVD (-R/-RW). # After a DVD (-R/-RW). ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play. CD (-R/-RW) is loaded in this unit. this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automatically start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 20 and PBC playback on page 24. Playing back an 8-cm disc is not possible with this unit. 04 Basic Operations Scrubber bar operation This operation is available for the following sources: ! DVD-video ! Video CD ! CD ! Compressed audio files (disc/USB) ! DivX % Drag the scrubber bar on the screen to specify the playback point. or can also display the hidden # To eject a DVD (-R/-RW). CD (-R/-RW). ! If bookmark function is on. Refer to Switching the media file type on the next page. a menu may appear. ! Do not insert anything other than a DVD (-R/RW). For more details. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 22. press h (eject). # Drag operation is not available when the scrubber bar is grayout. check that the label side of the disc is up. refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 20. pauses a disc that’s playing or restarts a paused disc. # If you are playing a DVD or Video CD. 12-cm DVD (-R/-RW). The following chapters cover other playback features in more details. Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls for playing discs. Playback will automatically start.Section Basic Operations Scroll bar operation % If you see the scroll bar on the left side of the screen. Press h to eject the disc. use touch panel keys to select the DVD player. Format Read is displayed. # When a DVD (-R/-RW). ! If an error message is displayed. CD (-R/-RW) at a time. # Touching object. CD (-R/-RW) into the disc loading slot. CD (-R/-RW) has been inserted. DVD playback resumes from the selected point. CD (-R/-RW). Stops playback. # Be sure to turn up the label side of a DVD (-R/-RW). CD (-R/-RW) into the disc loading slot. drag upward or downward to view the hidden object. you can switch between media file types to play. Key f g What it does Starts playback. Notes ! The DVD player plays one. When being read. ! If a DVD (-R/-RW). En 15 . CD (-R/-RW) contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3. standard. and check the disc for damage before inserting it again. touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select Disc. refer to Error messages on page 96. # When the automatic playback function is on. ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued.

Section 04 Basic Operations Skips to the start of the current track. This is not a malfunction. ! Performs fast reverse by touching and holding o. chapter or file. ! This unit allows playback of the following media file type recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM discs. chapter or file. you can switch between media file types to play. ! Performs fast forward by touching and holding p. this unit does not allow playback of audio data (CD-DA) or JPEG picture files. Switching the media file type When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3. — Audio data (CD-DA) — Compressed audio files — DivX video files — JPEG picture files ! In case of DVD-R/RW/ROM. Skips to the next track. then to previous tracks/chapters/files. % Touch Media to switch between media file types. o p Note You may find with some DVD or Video CD discs that some playback controls do not work in certain parts of the disc. Touch Media repeatedly to switch between the following media file types: CD (audio data (CD-DA))—ROM-Audio (compressed audio)—DivX (DivX video files)— JPEG (JPEG picture files) 16 En .

disconnect the iPod from this unit. Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies You can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall. FM3 for FM or AM) is displayed. 6 5 (stereo) indicator Appears when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip stations. Refer to the next page. 3 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. briefly touch c or d. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Radio to select the radio. 2 When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory keep touching one of preset tuning keys P1 to P6 until the beep sounds. # You can also perform seek tuning by pressing and holding c or d (TRK). Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the key. 5 Local indicator Appears when local seek tuning is on. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting in the following section. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. # When P1 to P6 are not displayed. FM2. 4 To perform seek tuning. 2 Touch Band to select a band. 05 # You can also perform manual tuning by pressing c or d (TRK). Touch Band until the desired band (FM1. Note Listening AM radio while an iPod is charged from this unit may generate noise. AM or FM. keep touching c or d for about one second and release. En 17 . The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memory. 1 Touch List to display the preset list. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. 4 Frequency indicator Shows the frequency to which the tuner is tuned. 2 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to. The next time you touch the same preset tuning key the radio station frequency is recalled from memory. In this case.Section Radio Listening to the radio 1 2 3 4 3 To perform manual tuning. # You can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. Radio 6 5 These are the basic steps necessary to operate the radio. you can display them by touching List. ! Six stations for each band can be stored in memory.

18 En . Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) automatically stores the six strongest broadcast frequencies in the order of their signal strength. # To cancel the storage process. BSM stops flashing. Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. touch Back. % Touch Local on the function menu to set the sensitivity. There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: Off—Level1—Level2—Level3—Level4 AM: Off—Level1—Level2 Larger setting number is higher level. BSM begins to flash. Touch Local repeatedly until the desired level of sensitivity appears in the display. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 to P6 in order of their signal strength. The highest level setting allows reception of only the strongest stations. # To return to the previous display. touch BSM again.Section 05 Radio # You can also use a and b to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6. ! Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 to P6. % Touch BSM on the function menu to turn BSM on. 2 Touch ESC to return to the frequency display. Introduction of advanced tuner operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. When finished. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted.

More advanced DVD operation is explained starting in the following section. Refer to page 23. 3 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 7 Channel/sampling frequency/quantization bits Depending on the file format. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select the DVD player. # You can also skip back or forward to another chapter by pressing c or d (TRK). En 19 . If this happens. normal playback automatically resumes. the icon m or n is highlighted. 6 Digital format indicator Shows when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected. When this happens. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRK).) 06 Playing DVD discs 5 67 8 9 These are the basic steps necessary to play a DVD with your DVD player. Touching p skips to the start of the next chapter. 5 Audio language indicator Shows which audio language has been selected. 4 To perform fast forward or reverse. Touching o once skips to the start of the current chapter. a menu may be displayed. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current chapter. # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 3 To skip back or forward to another chapter. # Fast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. # If no disc is loaded in the unit. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next page. (Refer to page 15. Touching it again will skip to the previous chapter. fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release o or p. 8 Subtitle language indicator Shows which subtitle language has been selected. 2 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. you cannot select Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. some information may not be displayed. keep touching o or p.) # With some discs. To resume playback at a desired point. touch o or p. touch f.Section Playing DVD discs Watching a DVD 1 2 3 4 9 Viewing angle indicator Shows which viewing angle has been selected. 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys. If you keep touching o or p for five seconds.

0 min.—2. Title numbers are displayed for eight seconds. In this case. Touching either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location selected from the menu. # You can bookmark up to six discs including the disc that is bookmarked using h.—2.—30 sec. If the currently playing disc contains commercials. using touch panel keys operate the DVD menu. % During playback. CM skip/CM back This function skips a reproduced image for a specified time. Touching b skips to the start of the previous title. CM skip 30 sec. # Depending on the contents of DVD discs. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. press h.—1.—15 sec.5 min. Note that you can only bookmark one disc using this method.—3. ! You can display the menu by touching Menu or Top Menu while a disc is playing. you can display them by touching the screen.—0 sec. playback will resume from the bookmarked point. 20 En .0 min.0 min.—5. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. keep touching Bookmark during playback. it is possible to skip them.—10. touch or . Operating the DVD menu Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc contents using a menu. 2 Touch a. Touching a skips to the start of the next title.—1. touch Touch. touch a or b. refer to the instructions provided with the disc. Resume playback (Bookmark) The Bookmark function lets you resume playback from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. % To skip progressively backward or forward.0 min.0 min. # To switch to the DVD menu direct touch control. this function may not work properly. # To clear the bookmark on a disc. c or d to select the desired menu item. 3 Touch . touch Bookmark at the point you want to resume playback next time. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed.—3.—0 sec. Next time you load the disc. For details.—1. Each time you touch or it changes steps in the following order: CM back 5 sec.Section 06 Playing DVD discs Skipping back or forward to another title % To skip back or forward to another title. % Touch the desired menu item on the DVD menu directly.0 min. # The oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. b. Using the touch panel keys 1 Touch to display touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. To clear the bookmark on a disc.0 min.0 min. Using DVD menu direct touch control This function allows you to operate the DVD menu by touching the menu item directly. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # You can also bookmark a disc by pressing and holding h at the point you want to bookmark.

Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion playback. forward slow motion playback begins. Playing DVD discs Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. En 21 . images may be unclear during slow motion playback. touch f. With DVDs featuring multiaudio recordings. Pausing playback % Touch f during playback. switching between languages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display. Note With discs featuring a menu. 06 You can select Title (title). 7. # In the time search function. 2 Touch the desired search option (e. you move ahead one frame. % Touch Audio during playback.Section Playing DVD discs Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. 0 and 0 in that order. you can switch between languages/audio systems during playback. Chapter (chapter). to select 1 hour 11 minutes. The icon is displayed. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. touch C..). Notes ! With some DVDs. For details. touch f again. 3 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired number. # With some discs. % Touch r during playback. you can also touch Menu or Top Menu and then make selections from the displayed menu. 1 Touch Search. Each time you touch Audio it switches between audio systems. # To cancel the inputted numbers. ! With some discs. ! Chapter search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % Keep touching r until is displayed during playback. convert the time into 071 minutes 00 seconds and touch 0. DTS etc. images may be unclear during frame-by-frame playback. touch f. refer to Setting the audio language on page 46. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible. ! You can also switch between languages/audio systems using Setup. you can change the playback speed in four steps as follows: 1/16—1/8—1/4—1/2 # To return to normal playback. Searching for the part you want to play You can use the search function to find the part you want to play.g. # Touching q or r during slow motion playback. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with different languages and different systems (Dolby Digital. 4 Touch . Each time you touch r. 1. # To return to normal playback. This starts playback from the selected part. Chapter). Time (time) or 10key (numeric keypad).

switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display. turn this function off and start playback. pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. the angle icon is displayed. % Touch Return to return to the specified scene. Turn angle icon display on or off using Setup. this unit will cancel the DVD menu automatically and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted. Return to the specified scene You can return to the specified scene where the DVD you are currently playing has been preprogrammed to return. For details. For details. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings. refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 46. pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. refer to Setting the angle icon display on page 47. you cannot operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on the next page). Notes ! With some DVDs. you can switch among viewing angles during playback. 22 En . % Touch Angle during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. If this unit’s optical digital outputs are not connected. % Touch Auto Play to turn automatic playback on. % Touch Subtitle during playback. # When the automatic playback is on. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5. so select an audio setting other than DTS. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings. # If a specified scene has not been preprogrammed in DVD disc. DTS audio will not be output. # To turn automatic playback off. this function is not possible. you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. Depending on the setting. ! You can also switch between subtitle languages using Setup. ! Touching Audio during fast forward/fast reverse. pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. ! During playback of a scene shot from multiple angles.Section 06 Playing DVD discs ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly. Note Touching Angle during fast forward/fast reverse. Each time you touch Subtitle it switches between subtitle languages. ! Touching Subtitle during fast forward/fast reverse. If this function is not fully operated. touch Auto Play again.

# To return to the previous display. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped.Section Playing DVD discs Introduction of advanced DVD operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. you can operate this function. the repeat play range changes to Disc. % Touch Repeat on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! If you select Linear PCM.) % Touch L/R Select on the function menu to select the audio output. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. when playing a disc recorded on a dual mono mode. you can switch the audio output. indicating that operating this function is not possible. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 06 Playing DVD discs Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for DVD playback. touch Back. Selecting audio output When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio. # Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc. the function may not be selectable. Touch L/R Select repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display. (Refer to Setting for digital output on page 49. ! ! ! ! L+R – left and right Left – left Right – right Mix – mixing left and right En 23 . ! Disc – Play through the current disc ! Chapter – Repeat the current chapter ! Title – Repeat the current title # If you perform chapter search or fast forward/ reverse.

If this happens. the menu may be two or more pages long. When this happens. a menu may be displayed if you perform these operations. normal playback automatically resumes. # You can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d (TRK). # Fast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. PBC ON is displayed. You can operate PBC menu with 10Key. (Refer to PBC playback on this page. Refer to the next page. 2 Touch 0 to 9 corresponding to a menu number and then touch to start playback. briefly touch o or p. keep touching o or p. Touching p skips to the start of the next track.) # With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 24 En . ! PBC playback of Video CD cannot be canceled. Touching it again will skip to the previous track. (Refer to page 15. the icon m or n is highlighted. # Depending on the discs. touch o or p to display the next or previous menu. 3 To skip back or forward to another track. touch f. 3 Touch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Playback starts from the selected menu item. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. refer to the instructions provided with the disc. In such case. 2 Track number indicator Shows the number of the track playing. If you keep touching o or p for five seconds. you cannot select Disc (DVD player). # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRK). 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys. # If no disc is loaded in the unit. touch Search and then touch 10key.) 4 To perform fast forward or reverse. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select the DVD player. fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release o or p.Section 07 Playing Video CDs Watching a Video CD 1 2 3 # During PBC playback. Notes ! You can display the menu by touching Return during PBC playback. # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. To resume playback at a desired point. Touching o once skips to the start of the current track. 1 When PBC menu is displayed. These are the basic steps necessary to play a Video CD with your DVD player. For details. a menu is displayed. PBC playback During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control). Insert a disc in the unit. More advanced Video CD operation is explained starting in the following section.

! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). 07 Searching for a desired scene. Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. This starts playback from the selected scene. # In the time search function. En 25 . Time (time) or 10key (numeric keypad). 4 Touch . this function cannot be operated. touch f. Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion playback. you move ahead one frame.Section Playing Video CDs ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control). images may be unclear during frame-by-frame playback. # To cancel the inputted numbers. starting playback from a specified time You can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a track. and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. # Touching q or r during slow motion playback. ! Time search is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. convert the time into 071 minutes 00 seconds and touch 0. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. % Keep touching r until is displayed during playback. 1 Touch Search. ! With some discs. images may be unclear during slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible. touch C. Each time you touch r. % Touch r during playback. touch f. you can change the playback speed in four steps as follows: 1/16—1/8—1/4—1/2 # To return to normal playback. search and time search functions cannot be used nor can you select the range for repeat play. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # With some discs. # To return to normal playback. 7. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. to select 1 hour 11 minutes. forward slow motion playback begins. Pausing playback % Touch f during playback. The icon is displayed. touch f again. Playing Video CDs 2 Touch Track (track). 0 and 0 in that order. touch Back. # To return to the previous display. PBC ON. 3 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired number. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. 1.

Selecting audio output You can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. ! ! ! ! L+R – left and right Left – left Right – right Mix – mixing left and right 26 En . the repeat play range changes to Disc. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. Touch L/R Select repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display. % Touch L/R Select on the function menu to select the audio output. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control).Section 07 Playing Video CDs Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the Video CD playback: Track (track repeat) and Disc (disc repeat). this function cannot be operated. % Touch Repeat on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! Disc – Repeat the current disc ! Track – Repeat the current track # If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse.

(Refer to page 15. Note Playing CDs If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. 2 Touch your favorite track title. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select the DVD player. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. En 27 . touch f again. 7 Track artist name indicator Shows the artist name of the currently playing track only when playing CD TEXT disc. That selection will begin to play. 2 Track number indicator Shows the number of the track playing.) # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRK). 3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. you cannot select Disc (DVD player). briefly touch o or p. 5 Disc artist name indicator Shows the artist name of the currently playing disc only when playing CD TEXT disc. 1 Touch List. track titles are displayed. # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.. Insert a disc in the unit. More advanced CD operation is explained starting in the following section. These are the basic steps necessary to play a CD with your DVD player. Touching p skips to the start of the next track. Pausing playback % Touch f during playback. Touching it again will skip to the previous track. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track.Section Playing CDs Listening to a CD 1 2 4 5 6 7 3 2 To skip back or forward to another track. No Name). When playing a CD TEXT disc. # You can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d (TRK). No xxxx will be displayed (e. Touching o once skips to the start of the current track. # If no disc is loaded in the unit. Refer to the next page. Selecting tracks from the track title list Track title list lets you see the list of tracks on a disc and select one of them to play back. 08 3 To perform fast forward or reverse. 4 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc only when playing CD TEXT discs. 6 Track name list display Shows the track name list only when playing CD TEXT disc. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on.g. keep touching o or p.

28 En . Take care when you increase the volume for ASR2 and then switch to Off. ! Disc – Repeat the current disc ! Track – Repeat the current track # If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse. 2 When you find the desired track touch Scan again. % Touch Repeat on the function menu to select the repeat range.Section 08 Playing CDs Switching the media file type If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3. you can switch between media file types to play. # To return to the previous display. the repeat play range changes to Disc. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. # After scanning of a CD is finished. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Touch Scan on the function menu to turn scan play on. touch Random again. The volume will become much lower for ASR2 than it will for ASR1. repeat play performs within the currently playing data type even if Disc is selected. Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2 # ASR2 is more effective than ASR1. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. touch Back. % Touch ASR repeatedly to select the desired setting. % Touch Media to switch between media file types. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 16. # To turn random play off. % Touch Random on the function menu to turn random play on. Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the CD playback: Track (track repeat) and Disc (disc repeat). the volume will become slightly lower. normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Introduction of advanced CD operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. Using advanced sound retriever Advanced sound retriever function automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound. Tracks play in a random order. # When playing discs with compressed audio and audio data (CD-DA). because the volume will suddenly seem much louder. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order. Note When you use this unit with a multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) and switch the advanced sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2.

No Name). En 29 . # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. Insert a disc in the unit. Notes ! This DVD player can play back a compressed audio recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVDR/RW/ROM. keep touching o or p. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRK). touch o or p. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files. 9 Folder name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing folder. (Refer to page 15. Touching p skips to the start of the next file. playback commences with folder 02. Touching it again will skip to the previous file.. No xxxx will be displayed (e. 2 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. Playing compressed audio 4 To perform fast forward or reverse. (Please see the following section for files that can be played back.Section Playing compressed audio Listening to compressed audio 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 These are the basic steps necessary to play a compressed audio with your DVD player. Folders are skipped if they contain no files. # If no disc is loaded in the unit. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select the DVD player. 1 Source icon Shows the media type currently playing. 6 Album title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing album. More advanced compressed audio operation is explained starting in the following section. Refer to page 102) ! Playback is carried out in order of file number. Refer to the next page. # You can also skip back or forward to another file by pressing c or d (TRK). 3 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. ! If specific information has not been recorded on a compressed audio disc. 8 Track title indicator Shows the name of the currently playing track. Touch a or b to select a folder. 5 File name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing file. 7 Artist name indicator Shows the artist name of the currently playing file.g. 3 To skip back or forward to another file. you cannot select Disc (DVD player). Touching o once skips to the start of the current file.) 09 4 2 # You cannot select a folder that does not have a compressed audio file recorded in it.) ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current file.

The volume will become much lower for ASR2 than it will for ASR1. However. ! Text information may not be correctly displayed depending on the recorded environment. # To return to the previous display. # To return to the previous list (the folder one level higher). touch Back. # When you have selected a folder. 1 Touch List. touch Back. 3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. # You can start playback throughout the selected list by touching . 2 Touch your favorite file name (or folder name). playback commences with folder 02. switch between media file types to play. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 16. Pausing playback % Touch f during playback. Switching the media file type If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3. % Touch Media to switch between media file types. % Touch ASR repeatedly to select the desired setting. a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. the volume will become slightly lower. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. Repeat this operation to select the desired file name. # To return to folder 01 (ROOT). That selection will begin to play. Take care when you increase the volume for ASR2 and then switch to Off. those characters will not be displayed. Note When you use this unit with a multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) and switch the advanced sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. because the volume will suddenly seem much louder.Section 09 Playing compressed audio ! If the characters recorded on the disc are not compatible with this unit. Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2 # ASR2 is more effective than ASR1. touch and hold Back. you can 30 En . touch f again. Selecting files from the file name list File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files. Using advanced sound retriever Advanced sound retriever function automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound. Introduction of advanced compressed audio operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names.

# When playing discs with compressed audio and audio data (CD-DA). % Touch Random on the function menu to turn random play on. the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds.Section Playing compressed audio Repeating play For compressed audio playback. File (one-track repeat) and Disc (repeat all tracks). 09 1 Touch Scan on the function menu to turn scan play on. the repeat play range changes to Disc. En 31 . # If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during File. repeat play performs within the currently playing data type even if Disc is selected. Scanning folders and tracks While you are using Folder. the repeat play range changes to Folder. Playing compressed audio Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range. Tracks will play in a random order within the previously selected repeat range. # When Folder is selected. 2 When you find the desired track (or folder) touch Scan again. the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. touch Random again. # To turn random play off. normal playback of the tracks will begin again. # After track or folder scanning is finished. When you are using Disc. it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder. there are three repeat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat). % Touch Repeat on the function menu to select the repeat range. Folder and Disc. ! Disc – Repeat all tracks ! File – Repeat the current track ! Folder – Repeat the current folder # If you select another folder during repeat play.

3 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release o or p. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current file. Refer to page 35. (Refer to page 15. # This is fast forward and reverse operation only for the file being played. # If no disc is loaded in the unit. 5 File name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing file. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select the DVD player. Touching it again will skip to the previous file. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. Touching p skips to the start of the next file. Refer to page 104. To resume playback at a desired point. keep touching o or p. performing this operation enables you to search every 10 files. play time indicator does not appear. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files. ! When playing a JPEG disc. 2 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 4 To skip back or forward to another file. This operation is canceled when the previous or next file is reached.Section 10 Playing DivX/JPEG files Watching a DivX/JPEG 1 2 3 4 3 Touch a or b to select a folder. if you keep touching o or p for five seconds. you cannot select Disc (DVD player). Notes ! This DVD player can play back a DivX file recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ ROM. More advanced DivX/JPEG operation is explained starting in the following section. touch o or p. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRK). 5 These are the basic steps necessary to play a DivX/JPEG with your DVD player. (Please see the following section for files that can be played back.) 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys. the icon m or n is highlighted. Folders are skipped if they contain no files. # You can also skip back or forward to another file by pressing c or d (TRK). Insert a disc in the unit. playback commences with folder 02. # You cannot select a folder that does not have a DivX/JPEG file recorded in it. touch f. When this happens. # When playing JPEG file.) ! This unit can play back a JPEG file recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM or USB storage device. # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.) 5 To perform fast forward or reverse. When DivX disc is playing.) ! Playback is carried out in order of file number. Refer to page 104. (Please see the following section for files that can be played back. 32 En . Touching o once skips to the start of the current file.

touch Back. ® % If the message is displayed after loading a disc containing DivX VOD content. # To return to the previous list (the folder one level higher). ! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. Key f o p What it does Starts the slideshow. touch Stop. However. touch and hold Back. 10 tration code. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example. and no message will be displayed. # You can start playback throughout the selected list by touching . That selection will begin to play. The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabetical order. if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files. Playing DivX/JPEG files Playing DivX® VOD content Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content may only be playable a fixed number of times. Rental Expired. pauses the slideshow or restarts a paused disc. Important ! In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit. touch Next Play. The table below shows the controls for viewing a slideshow. # To skip to the next file. 1 Touch List. is displayed. Playback of the DivX VOD content will start. a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. ! Playable number of times is displayed with Remaining Views:. Rotates the displayed picture 90° clockwise. registered devices. Displays the previous picture. then you may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you like. the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays). ! If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays. # To return to folder 01 (ROOT). When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content. you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider. This restricts playback of content to specific. touch Play. or stopping. Selecting files from the file name list File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. refer to Displaying your DivX VOD registration code on page 49. 3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. Displays the next picture. playback commences with folder 02. About your regis- 2 Touch your favorite file name (or folder name). Repeat this operation to select the desired file name. # When you have selected a folder. # If you do not want to play the DivX VOD content.Section Playing DivX/JPEG files Viewing a JPEG slideshow When loading a CD/CD-R/RW containing JPEG picture files. this unit automatically starts a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. content that has zero remaining plays). En 33 .

Images can be stored in this unit. pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. 34 En . Each time you touch Audio it switches between audio systems. 1 Touch Search. 0 and 0 in that order. Searching for the part you want to play You can use the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. % Touch Media to switch between media file types. convert the time into 071 minutes 00 seconds and touch 0. 3 Touch . Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) You can switch subtitle language during playback when playing file recorded with subtitles in one or more languages. 7. you can switch between media file types to play. touch f again. Each time you touch Subtitle it switches between subtitle languages. ! This function is available for JPEG disc. those characters will not be displayed. # Touching Subtitle during fast forward/fast reverse. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. # Touching Audio during fast forward/fast reverse. % Touch Subtitle during playback. Capture an image in JPEG files Image data can be captured in order to use it for wallpaper. # To cancel the inputted numbers.Section 10 Playing DivX/JPEG files Displaying text information on DivX/JPEG disc Text information recorded on a DivX/JPEG disc can be displayed. This starts playback from the selected part. # To select 1 hour 11 minutes. 1. Switching the media file type If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3. % Touch INFO. ! This function is available for DivX disc. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired number. Touch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Folder Name (folder name)—File Name (file name) # If the characters recorded on the disc are not compatible with this unit. Pausing playback % Touch f during playback. and recall easily. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 16. ! This function is available for DivX disc. ! This function is available for DivX disc. touch C. % Touch Audio during playback. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) You can switch audio language during playback when playing a file recorded with dialog in two or more languages.

touch Yes. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 3 When Do you save this image? is displayed. # If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during File. After stored completely. 10 Playing tracks in random order When playing a JPEG disc. touch Back. is displayed. Folder and Disc. Playing DivX/JPEG files Repeating play For DivX video file playback. % Touch Repeat on the function menu to select the repeat range. Image saved is displayed. touch Random again. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. # To return to the previous display. ! Disc – Repeat all files ! Folder – Repeat the current folder ! File – Repeat just the current file En 35 . the repeat play range changes to Disc. Saving the image Don't switch off the battery. File (file repeat) and Disc (repeat all files). # To cancel the strorage process. random play lets you play back files in a random order within the repeat range. 1 Touch f to pause the slideshow when the desired image is displayed. # When Folder is selected. # To turn random play off. 2 Touch Capture.Section Playing DivX/JPEG files ! This unit can store only one image data. Introduction of advanced DivX/JPEG operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. there are three repeat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat). there are two repeat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat) and Disc (repeat all files). the repeat play range changes to Folder. touch No. Captureing the image is displayed. For JPEG picture file playback. # If you select another folder during repeat play. While storing the image to this unit. it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder. % Touch Random on the function menu to turn random play on. Files will play in a random order within the previously selected Folder or Disc ranges. Old image is overwitten with new one. ! This function is available for JPEG disc.

! If an error message or icon is displayed. 1 Source icon Shows the media type currently playing. ! When the USB portable audio player having battery charging function is connected to this unit and the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. # You can also skip back or forward to another file by pressing c or d (TRK). touch o or p. ! Last four-digit can be displayed as the file number. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRK). you can display it by touching the screen. Touching it again will skip to the previous file. refer to Error messages on page 96. # When the source icon is not displayed. 2 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. ! If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files. those characters will not be displayed. ! You can disconnect the USB portable audio player/USB memory anytime you want to finish listening to it. Refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 30. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch USB to select the USB. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current file. keep touching o or p. 5 Song information Shows detailed information of currently playing song. Touching p skips to the start of the next file. playback commences with folder 02. 5 For details about the supported device. ! Text information may not be correctly displayed depending on the recorded environment. 3 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. 4 To perform fast forward or reverse. ! If the characters recorded on the audio file are not compatible with this unit. Touching o once skips to the start of the current file. 2 # You cannot select a folder that does not have a compressed audio file recorded in it. Touch a or b to select a folder. Notes ! Optimum performance of this unit may not be obtained depending on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memory. Selecting files from the file name list The operation is the same as that of the builtin DVD player. 36 En . Operation of JPEG in a USB storage device is the same as JPEG on a disc.Section 11 Playing songs in a USB storage device Basic Operations 1 2 3 4 3 To skip back or forward to another file. refer to Portable audio player compatibility on page 9. the battery is charged.

Using advanced sound retriever Advanced sound retriever function automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound. % Touch ASR repeatedly to select the desired setting. If a USB portable audio player/USB memory contains compressed audio files and JPEG file. ! When Folder is selected. Take care when you increase the volume for ASR2 and then switch to Off. the repeat play range changes to Folder. the repeat play ranges you can select are different from that of the built-in DVD player. ! If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during File. Refer to Scanning folders and tracks on page 31.Section Playing songs in a USB storage device Pausing compressed audio playback % Touch f during playback. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 11 Introduction to advanced operations 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. ! After file or folder scanning is finished. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. Function name Operation Refer to Repeating play on page 31. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 16. because the volume will suddenly seem much louder. Switching the media file type The operation is the same as that of the builtin DVD player. the volume will become slightly lower. the repeat play range changes to All. you can switch between media file types to play. # To return to the previous display. En 37 . normal playback of the files begins again. touch Back. The volume will become much lower for ASR2 than it will for ASR1. The repeat play ranges of the USB portable audio player/USB memory are: ! File – Repeat just the current file ! Folder – Repeat the current folder ! All – Repeat all files Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 31. touch f again. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. Random and Scan operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player. Playing songs in a USB storage device Repeat Random Scan Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play. Function and operation Repeat. Note When you use this unit with a multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) and switch the advanced sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2. However. Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2 # ASR2 is more effective than ASR1. it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder.

touch o or p to select a chapter. PIONEER. 3 To perform fast forward or reverse. Refer to page 104. 5 Song information Shows detailed information of currently playing song. 3 Song number indicator Up to 65 535 can be displayed as the song number. ! The iPod is turned off about two minutes after the ignition switch is set to OFF. disconnect the headphones from the iPod. ! Connect directly the dock connector cable to the iPod so that this unit works properly. which is sold separately. 2 To skip back or forward to another song/video.Section 12 Using iPod Basic Operations 12 3 4 # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. When video is playing. Accessory Attached or (check mark) is displayed on the iPod. ! If an error message or icon is displayed. 5 ! You can use this unit to control an iPod by using a cable (e. you can enjoy the video contents of the iPod as the iPod source. Refer to Switching the auxiliary setting on page 50. While connected to this unit. CD-IU50). you can display it by touching the screen. In this case. # Depending on the model of iPod or the data size in the iPod. ! When the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. When this happens. the iPod cannot be turned on or off. ! If specific information is not recorded on the iPod. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. Notes ! Read the precautions for iPod in the following section. To resume playback at a desired point. keep touching o or p. if you keep touching o or p for five seconds. 2 Repeat indicator Shows when repeat range is set to or . 4 Shuffle indicator Shows when random play is set to Songs or Albums. # You can also skip back or forward to another song/video by pressing c or d (TRK).g. # When removing the iPod from this unit. No Name). ! If an iPod with video capabilities is connected to this unit via interface cable (e. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRK). 38 En .g. which is sold separately. the icon m or n is highlighted. touch f.. ! While the iPod is connected to this unit. there may be a delay to start playing after connection. use touch panel keys to select the iPod.g. # When the source icon is not displayed. this unit is turned off. set the AUX1 to iPod. No xxxx will be displayed (e.. 4 When playing a file with chapter. # Before connecting the dock connector of this unit to the iPod. the iPod’s battery is charged while the iPod is connected to this unit. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch iPod to select the iPod. CD-IU50V). # After the iPod has been connected to this unit. refer to Error messages on page 96. touch o or p. fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release o or p.

Refer to Operating this unit’s iPod function from your iPod on page 41. — Time display and actual time may not match. before you display the video screen. it is not possible to display the video on the PAL monitor. ! iPod video image is not displayed on the PAL rear monitor. — When the control mode is set to iPod. functions may not work properly. — When the control mode is set to this unit. those characters are not displayed. ! For details. ! This unit can display the album art. Using iPod When browsing for a video 3 Touch a list title that you want to play. 4 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. While loading the album art information from iPod. 2 Touch one of the categories in which you want to search for a song/video. touch Music.Section Using iPod ! If the characters recorded on the iPod are not compatible with this unit. see the following section. En 39 . “Video Podcast” and “TV show” which are downloaded from iTunes store. — For about control mode. # To return to the previous menu. loading may take long time. Repeat this operation until you find the desired song/video. 12 Browsing for a song/video Operations to control an iPod with this unit is designed to be as close to the iPod as possible to make operation and song/video search easy. — List operation may not function promptly. it is possible to change the signal between PAL and NTSC from iPod. “Music videos”. touch Back. 3 Play video on the iPod. If many songs and album art have been stored in iPod. 1 2 Touch MENU to display iPod menus. ! If the characters recorded on the iPod are not compatible with this unit. ! This unit can play back “Movies”. those characters are not displayed. touch MENU. ! To pause video playback. refer to the iPod’s manuals. Touch Video. ! Change the video setting on the iPod so that the iPod can output the video to an external device. When browsing for a song ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Playlists (playlists) Artists (artists) Albums (albums) Songs (songs) Podcasts (podcasts) Genres (genres) Composers (composers) Audiobooks (audiobooks) Video Playlists (video playlists) Movies (movies) Music Videos (music videos) Video Podcasts (video podcasts) TV Shows (TV shows) Playing video This unit can play video if an iPod with video capabilities is connected. Searching songs/videos by category 1 Touch MENU to display iPod menus. # You can start playback throughout the selected list by touching . # To return to the music operation screen.

(repeat there are two repeat play ranges: one song/video) and (repeat all songs/videos in the list). ! While repeat play range is set to . % Touch ASR repeatedly to select the desired setting. # To refine the search with a different letter. The volume will become much lower for ASR2 than it will for ASR1.g. # To return to the previous menu. Searching flashes. the volume will become slightly lower. touch panel key operation is not available. touch Back. 40 En . Note When you use this unit with a multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) and switch the advanced sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2. Song Title (song title)—Artist Name (artist name)—Album Title (album title) # If specific information is not recorded on the iPod. While searching. No Name). touch Cancel. Repeating play For playback of the songs/videos on the iPod. Alphabet search mode is displayed. Take care when you increase the volume for ASR2 and then switch to Off. touch f again. Using advanced sound retriever Advanced sound retriever function automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound. % Touch ! ! Displaying text information on iPod Video % Touch INFO. 4 Touch to show entries starting with the letter you chose.. those characters are not displayed.) 2 When a list for the selected category is displayed. However. you cannot select the other songs/videos. # If the characters recorded on the iPod are not compatible with this unit. 5 Touch a list title that you want to play. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. touch ABC to switch to alphabet search mode. In this condition. # You can start playback throughout the selected list by touching .Section 12 Using iPod Searching by alphabet in the list 1 Select a category. because the volume will suddenly seem much louder. – Repeat just the current song/video – Repeat all songs/videos in the selected list Pausing playback % Touch f during playback. you can select other songs/videos while browsing. 3 Touch c or d to select the first letter you are looking for. No xxxx will be displayed (e. to select the repeat range. Repeat this operation until you find the desired song/video. (Refer to Searching songs/videos by category on the previous page. Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2 # ASR2 is more effective than ASR1.

Link Play. ! Albums – Plays songs related to the currently playing album.Section Using iPod Playing songs/videos in a random order (shuffle) For playback of songs/videos on the iPod. fast forward/reverse and Changing audiobook speed While listening to an audiobook on iPod. ! Albums – Play back songs/videos from a randomly selected album in order. 2 Touch a desired mode. Using iPod Operating this unit’s iPod function from your iPod This unit’s iPod function can be operated from your iPod. En 41 . it is possible to display the text information while playing back video. even if the ignition key is turned off.. In this condition. 3 Display returns to the ordinary display and playback begin. flashes. Sound can be heard from the car’s speakers. # Touching switches the control mode to this unit. to switch the control mode While searching the song. there may be a delay when displaying a list. # Even if this function is performed. there are two random play methods: Songs (play back songs/videos in a random order) and Albums (play back albums in a random order). to select the random play play/pause can be operated from this unit. — Album list of currently playing artist — Song list of currently playing album — Album list of currently playing genre ! Depending on the number of files in the iPod. Playing all songs in a random order (shuffle all) This method plays all songs on the iPod randomly. repeat# To cancel the random play. 1 Touch Link Play. ! Artists – Plays songs related to the currently playing artist. ! Songs – Play back songs/videos in the selected list in random order. % Touch method. # If the related albums/songs are not found. Selecting songs from lists related to the currently playing song Lists related to the currently playing song are displayed. and operation can be conducted from your iPod. playback speed can be changed. Link play selection screen is displayed. ! Genres – Plays songs related to the currently playing genre. to turn shuffle all on. chapter up/down. operate the iPod. touch edly until the shuffle icon is turned off. touch panel key operation is not available. 1 Touch to iPod. ! While this function is in use. 12 2 Operate the connected iPod to select a song/video and play. the iPod will not be turned off. % Touch All songs on the iPod play randomly. Also. track up/ down. To turn off power. Not Found is displayed. You can select songs from the following lists.

touch Wide Screen again. ! Faster – Playback faster than normal speed ! Normal – Playback in normal speed ! Slower – Playback slower than normal speed Changing the screen mode While video is playing.Section 12 Using iPod % Touch AudioBooks to select your favorite setting. # To switch to standard (4:3) screen. 42 En . you can select the display mode between widescreen (16:9) and standard (4:3) screen. % Touch Wide Screen.

1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Audio Menu to display the audio function names. # When the rear output setting is Subwoofer. # When selecting FM as the source. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # FR: 0/LR: 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 50. 2 Touch c or d on EQ Select to select the equalizer. You can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (curve characteristics) of each currently selected curve band (Low/Mid/High). ! The actual range of the adjustments are different depending on which equalizer curve is selected. 1 Touch Parametric EQ on the audio function menu. Front:15 to Rear:15 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. 13 Audio Adjustments 1 Audio display Shows the audio adjustment status. you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. Level (dB) Q=2N Center frequency Frequency (Hz) Q=2W 2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. refer to Introduction of DSP adjustments on page 83. En 43 . Display Powerful Natural Vocal Equalizer curve Powerful Natural Vocal Using balance adjustment You can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide the ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. # To return to the previous display. the audio function will be changed to the multi-channel processor’s audio menu. 3 Touch c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match the car’s interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Important If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit.Section Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 2 Touch a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. you cannot switch to Source Level Adjuster. 1 Touch Fader/Balance on the audio function menu. # When selecting Bluetooth telephone as the source. you can only switch to Fader/Balance. touch Back. For details. Left:15 to Right:15 is displayed as the left/ right speaker balance moves from left to right.

Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off frequencies in the following order: 50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the selected range are outputted from the subwoofer. # Custom is an adjusted equalizer curve that you create. Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high) 44 En . 2 Touch c or d to select a desired level.and high-sound ranges at low volume. # To turn subwoofer output off. 2Wide—1Wide—1Narrow—2Narrow 6 Touch a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. 0 to +6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Low: 40Hz—80Hz—100Hz—160Hz Mid: 200Hz—500Hz—1kHz—2kHz High: 3. +6 to –24 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased.Section 13 Audio Adjustments Custom Flat Super Bass Custom Flat Super bass Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off. 4 Touch c or d next to Level to adjust the output level of the subwoofer. If you make adjustments to an equalizer curve. 5 Touch c or d next to Frequency to select cut-off frequency. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer curve. 1 Touch Bass Booster on the audio function menu. 3 Touch c or d next to Phase to select the phase of subwoofer output. 2 Touch d next to Subwoofer to turn subwoofer output on. ! When the subwoofer output is on. # You can then select another band and adjust the level. 3 Touch c or d on Band to select the equalizer band to adjust. Touch c to select reverse phase and Reverse appears in the display. 1 Touch Loudness on the audio function menu. touch c. you can adjust the cut-off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer. Boosting the bass Bass boost function boosts the bass level of sound. Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high) 4 Touch c or d on Frequency to select the frequency to adjust. # When Flat is selected. 2 # To turn loudness off. Touch d to select normal phase and Normal appears in the display.Factor to select the Q factor. +12dB to -12dB is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Touch d to turn loudness on. no supplement or correction is made to the sound. 3 Touch c or d to select a desired level. 1 Touch Subwoofer on the audio function menu. touch c.5kHz 5 Touch c or d on Q. the equalizer curve setting is memorized in Custom.15kHz—8kHz—10kHz—12.

En 45 . ! Video CD.Section Audio Adjustments Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers. compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. which remains unchanged. touch c. +4 to –4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. ! iPod and USB storage device are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. 1 Touch High Pass Filter on the audio function menu. Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the source volume. Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. CD. Notes ! The AM volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. 2 Touch Source Level Adjuster on the audio function menu. 2 Touch d next to High Pass Filter to turn high pass filter on. turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switching between sources. Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off frequencies in the following order: 50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. 13 Audio Adjustments 3 Touch c or d next to Frequency to select cut-off frequency. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level. # To turn high pass filter off. 3 Touch c or d to adjust the source volume.

subtitle. The audio language is set. 2 Touch Setup. An audio language menu is displayed. Setup will be displayed instead of Menu. 1 Touch Audio Language on the DVD setup menu. 2 Touch the desired language. Setting the audio language You can set the preferred audio language. 1 Touch g. 2 Touch . When you select Others When you select Others. ! You can also switch the subtitle language by touching Subtitle during playback. refer to When you select Others on this page. 1 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. 3 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. the language specified on the disc is outputted. Setting the subtitle language You can set a desired subtitle language. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc. touch Back. 46 En .) ! Even if you use Subtitle during playback to switch the subtitle language. a language code input display is shown. refer to When you select Others on this page. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD. 1 Touch Subtitle Language on the DVD setup menu. touch C. this does not affect the settings here. 2 Touch the desired language. # If you have selected Others. subtitles are displayed in that language. A subtitle language menu is displayed. A subtitle language is set. Please see the following section to input the four-digit code of the desired language. the language specified on the disc is displayed. # If you have selected Others. The DVD setup function names are displayed. (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) on page 22.Section 14 Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc. # To return to the previous display. parental lock and other DVD settings. 1 Touch 0 to 9 to input the language code. # To cancel the inputted numbers. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 107. You can use this menu to change audio.

! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. the unit’s display changes to the same setting. the language specified on the disc is displayed. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark.) ! Even if you use Audio during playback to switch the audio language. For details. this function is set to on. select either Letter Box or Pan Scan. touch Multi Angle again. ! 16 : 9 – Wide screen picture (16:9) is displayed as it is (initial setting) ! Letter Box – The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! Pan Scan – The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify Pan Scan. Note If the selected language is not recorded on the disc. this does not affect the settings here. Setting the slide show interval Slide show is possible when JPEG files are playing with this unit. ! Initially. In this setting. refer to When you select Others on the previous page. A menu language menu is displayed. % Touch Slide Show on the DVD setup menu to select the slide show interval. A wide screen display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9. % Touch TV Aspect on the DVD setup menu to select the TV aspect. Touch Slide Show repeatedly until the desired setting appears in the display. # If you have selected Others. ! When using a regular display. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 21. refer to the disc’s instructions. 1 Touch Menu Language on the DVD setup menu. interval of slide show can be set.Section Setting up the DVD player ! You can also switch the audio language by touching Audio during playback. Setting up the DVD player Setting the menu language You can set the preferred language for displays of menus recorded on a disc. Selecting 16 : 9 may result in an unnatural picture. 14 of 4:3. The menu language is set. % Touch Multi Angle on the DVD setup menu to turn angle icon display on. 2 Touch the desired language. playback is with Letter Box even if you select Pan Scan setting. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to V OUT. while a regular display has a TV aspect En 47 . ! If you select the TV aspect. ! 10sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of 10 seconds ! 20sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of 20 seconds ! 30sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of 30 seconds Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display. Setting the angle icon display You can set it up so that the angle icon appears on scenes where the angle can be switched. # To turn the angle icon display off. Touch TV Aspect repeatedly until the desired TV aspect appears in the display.

letting you register a new one. # To cancel the inputted numbers. % Touch DivX Subtitle on the DVD setup menu to select the desired subtitle setting. included literature or on the disc itself. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock. Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult-oriented scenes. # If you input an incorrect code number. The new parental lock level is set. Parental lock of this unit is not possible if 4 Touch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired level. Changing the level You can change the set parental lock level. The playback of those scenes will be skipped. ! The DivX subtitles will be displayed even when Custom is selected if no DivX external subtitle files exist. The code number is set. the icon is displayed. 3 Touch . This enters the code number. ! With some discs. 1 Touch Parental on the DVD setup menu. 3 Touch . ! 8 – Playback of the entire disc is possible (initial setting) ! 7 to 2 – Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! 1 – Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! We recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. Setting the DivX subtitle file You can select whether to display DivX external subtitles or not. 4 Touch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired level. 1 Touch Parental on the DVD setup menu. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Refer to Changing the level on this page. The parental lock level is set. In this case.Section 14 Setting up the DVD player ! Manual – JPEG images can be switched manually a parental lock level is not recorded in the disc. 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the registered code number. and touch C 10 times. ! Original – Display the DivX subtitles 48 En . and you can now change the level. The registered code number is canceled. playback will begin when the correct code number is input. # If you forget your code number. the parental lock may be active only on the scenes with certain levels. Touch C and input the correct code number. You can set the parental lock to your desired level. and you can now set the level. Look for the level indication written at the disc package. 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input a four digit code number. code number input indications may be displayed. For details. touch C. Setting the code number and level You need to have registered a code number for playing back discs with parental lock. refer to If you forget your code number on this page. refer to the instruction manual that came with the discs. If you forget your code number Please see the following section.

Setting for digital output Audio which is outputted from digital output of this unit can be selected. the excess characters will not be displayed. the line breaks and the characters are displayed on the next line. you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code. which you submit to your provider. there is no need to change settings. If more than 42 characters are set. set to Stream. ! Stream – The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is output as it is (initial setting) En 49 . ! Linear PCM – The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is converted to and output as a linear PCM signal 14 Setting up the DVD player Displaying your DivX® VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this unit.Section Setting up the DVD player ! Custom – Display the DivX external subtitles Notes ! Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one line. (Refer to Selecting audio output on page 23. Your 8-digit registration code is displayed. ! Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider. % Touch DivX VOD on the DVD setup menu. If more than 126 characters are set. Normally. ! Selecting Linear PCM enables you to switch the output channel if playing the following type of discs. ! Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one screen.) — Dual mono mode DVD video discs % Touch Digital Output on the DVD setup menu to select the desired digital output setting. If this unit’s digital output is not used.

Using the initial settings. 4 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. # To return to the previous display. CDV150M) ! Audio – auxiliary device connected with stereo mini plug cable ! iPod – an iPod with video capabilities connected with CD-IU50V ! Off – No auxiliary device is connected 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. the unit is set for rear full-range speaker connection (Full). 1 Touch Rear Speaker on the initial menu. 2 Touch c or d next to Rear Speaker to switch the rear output setting. Switching the auxiliary 2 setting % Touch AUX2 on the initial menu to turn auxiliary 2 setting on. ! Video – auxiliary video device connected with 4-pole mini plug cable (e. touch Back. Touch c to select full-range speaker and Full appears in the display. ! When the multi-channel processor (DEQP8000) is connected to this unit. For more information about connecting or using auxiliary devices. you can connect other full range speakers (Rear) or a subwoofer (Subwoofer) to the RCA rear output. Set each AUX source to ON when using. 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys.Section 15 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings Switching the auxiliary 1 setting % Touch AUX1 on the initial menu to select desired setting. 50 En ..g. you cannot operate this function. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. Switching the auxiliary setting Auxiliary devices connected to this unit can be activated individually. When rear output is connected to full range speakers (when Full is selected). Touch d to select subwoofer and Subwoofer appears in the display. refer to Using the AUX source on page 58. Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit’s rear output (rear speaker leads output and RCA rear output) can be used for fullrange speaker (Full) or subwoofer (Subwoofer) connection. Initially. you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliary amp. you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal performance from this unit. 3 Touch AV Menu and then touch Initial Menu to display the function names. # To turn auxiliary 2 setting off. touch AUX2 again. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Off to turn this unit off. If you switch the rear output setting to Subwoofer.

select Subwoofer (subwoofer). Touching c or d will switch between Subwoofer and Rear and that status will be displayed. are possible. ATT is displayed and no audio adjustments. You can change the language of the cautions at this setting. you may be required to enter the Bluetooth audio player PIN code in advance to set this unit for a connection. CD-BTB200) is connected to this unit. 15 Switching the sound muting/attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenuated automatically when the signal from the equipment with mute function is received.g.Section Initial Settings # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output. select Full (full-range speaker). you need to enter PIN code on your phone to verify the connection. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. Changing languages for CAUTION Some operations on this unit are prohibited while driving or needs to be paid a careful attention when operating. The default code is 0000. % Touch TEL on the initial menu to select the setting. ! If you change this setting. Mute is displayed and no audio adjustments are possible. Notes ! Even if you change this setting. you cannot operate the following procedure. ! Sound from this system returns to normal when the muting or attenuation is canceled. a caution appears on the display. ! With some Bluetooth audio players. except volume control. subwoofer output in the audio menu will return to the factory settings. Each time you touch Caution Language it selects languages for CAUTION in the following order: English (English)—Español (Spanish)— Français (French) Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection To connect your cellular phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology. Initial Settings 3 Touch c or d next to Preout to switch the subwoofer output or rear output. # When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output. ! Both rear speaker lead outputs and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting. % Touch Caution Language on the initial menu to select your desired language. En 51 . # When the rear output setting is Subwoofer. Touch TEL until the desired setting appears in the display. there is no output unless you turn the subwoofer output on (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 44). but you can change this in this function. ! The sound is attenuated. ! You can only operate this function when Bluetooth adapter (e. ! Mute – Muting ! ATT -20dB – Attenuation (ATT -20dB has a stronger effect than ATT -10dB) ! ATT -10dB – Attenuation ! Off – Turn the sound muting/attenuation off Notes ! The sound is turned off. In such case.

Refer to Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 90 Resetting the audio functions You can reset all audio functions except volume. Normally. you can operate this function. Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and autoequalizing) The auto-time alignment is automatically adjusted for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. leave the setting at High to ensure quality sound. you can operate this function. Touch Reset. 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player.Section 15 Initial Settings 1 Touch PIN Code Input on the initial menu. touch C. # To cancel resetting the audio functions. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit. ! High – High quality sound ! Low – Minimize distortion sound 3 Touch Reset again to reset audio functions. PIN code input display appears. Please see the following section for Auto TA and EQ operation. you can operate this function. and then creates the auto-equalizer curve based on that information. # To cancel the inputted numbers. Correcting distorted sound You can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer curve settings. The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics. % Touch Digital ATT on the initial menu to switch the digital attenuator setting. Touch Digital ATT repeatedly until the desired setting appears in the display. 52 En . If high sound is crippled or distorted. 1 2 Touch Audio Reset on the initial menu. try switching to Low. 3 After inputting PIN code (up to 16 digits). The PIN code you entered is stored in this system. touch . ! Only when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit. touch Cancel. Setting an equalizer level high can cause distortion.

ideal for a cinemasized picture (wide screen picture) where captions lie outside. 2 Touch ESC to return to the display of each source. The system function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. Touch the desired wide mode setting. # To return to the previous display. ! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio. Normal (normal) A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is. Full (full) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direction only. ! The video image will appear coarser when viewed in Cinema or Zoom mode. ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public viewing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author’s rights protected by the Copyright Law. Notes ! Different settings can be memorized for each video source. Zoom (zoom) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizontally. touch Back. ideal for a cinema-sized picture (wide screen picture). it may appear different.Section System settings Introduction of system adjustments without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen. Changing the wide screen mode You can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal picture) without any omissions. giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture En 53 . 16 System settings 1 1 System menu display Shows the system function names. Cinema (cinema) The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between Full and Zoom in the vertical direction. 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch System Menu to display the system function names. Just (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally to the ends. 1 2 Touch Wide Mode on the system menu.

the display is automatically dimmed when the car’s headlights are turned on. 1 Touch Picture Adjustment on the system menu. Each time you touch c or d it moves cursor towards the left or the right. (Refer to Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) on the next page.Hue (hue). # Temperature can be adjusted from +3 to –3. To switch between groups of touch panel keys. % Touch AV Input on the system menu to select the AV input setting. 1 Touch Picture Adjustment on the system menu. The farther the cursor moves to the right. Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the level of selected item. touch NEXT or PREV. the brighter the screen becomes. ! Off – No video component connected ! Video – External video component (such as portable video player) ! EXT-Video – External video unit (such as Pioneer products available in the future) ! TV – TV tuner connected with RCA cable 3 Touch c or d to adjust the selected item. # Black Level can be set on or off. +24 to –24 54 En . Setting the AV input You can switch the setting according to the connected component. Dimmer (dimmer). ! Select EXT-Video to watch video of a connected video unit as EXT source. Contrast and Black Level for the audio source. Contrast (contrast). you cannot adjust Hue. 2 Touch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. ! ! ! ! is displayed as the level is increased or decreased.) # If color system is set to PAL/PAL-M/SECAM. picture adjustment may not be possible. Brightness – Adjusts the black intensity Contrast – Adjusts the contrast Color – Adjusts the color saturation Hue – Adjusts the tone of color (red is emphasized or green is emphasized) ! Dimmer – Adjust the brightness of display ! Temperature – Adjusts the color temperature. The adjustment function names are displayed. ! Select TV to watch TV pictures from a connected TV tuner as TV source. ! Select Video to watch video of a connected component as AV source. ! You cannot adjust Color. # With some rear view cameras. 4 Touch c or d to adjust the brightness. Hue. You can turn the dimmer on or off.Section 16 System settings Changing the picture adjustment You can adjust the Brightness (brightness). resulting in a better white balance ! Black Level – Emphasizes dark portion on images so that the difference between brightness and darkness becomes more distinct ! Rear View/Source – Switch the picture adjustment modes # You cannot adjust the picture adjustment for rear view camera when Camera Polarity is set to Off. The level indicates the brightness of the screen being adjusted. The adjustment function names are displayed. Temperature (temperature) and Black Level (black level) for each source and rear view camera. 2 3 Touch NEXT. Touch Dimmer. Color (color) . Adjusting the dimmer To prevent the display from being too bright at night.

10:36 becomes 11:00. # To turn the clock display off.. ! Battery – When the polarity of the connected lead is positive while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! Ground – When the polarity of the connected lead is negative while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! Off – When a rear view camera is not connected to this unit System settings 3 Touch c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. 4 Touch a or b to put a clock right. rear view camera image can be displayed. Each time you touch c or d it will select one segment of the clock display: Hour—Minute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will be highlighted. change the rear view camera setting. the minutes are rounded up. touch On/Off again. ! Even while driving. refer to Selecting a source on page 12. move the gear shift in REVERSE (R) and confirm if a rear view camera video can be shown on the display. the video automatically En 55 . (For more details. the clock display appears on the display. 1 Touch Clock Adjustment on the system menu. press and hold MUTE. 2 Touch On/Off to turn the clock display on. In this case. This unit features a function that automatically switches to the rear view camera video (V IN jack) when a rear view camera is installed on your vehicle. % Touch Camera Polarity on the system menu to select an appropriate setting. ! If the display should be switched to a rear view camera video by error while you are driving forward. Notes ! You can match the clock to a time signal by touching Just.g. (e. Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images.) — If 30 to 59. otherwise screen image may appear reversed. touch RearView again to turn off the rear view camera. When the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position. (e. — If 00 to 29. consult your dealer.) ! After you set up the rear view camera setting..Section System settings Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock.) ! Even when the sources are off. For details. the minutes are rounded down.g. To do this. 10:18 becomes 10:00. ! To end watching a rear view camera video and return to the source display. touch RearView source icon. 16 switches to a rear view camera video.

Section 17 Entertainment settings Introduction of entertainment settings ! AV Input – Video image from the external video unit that is connected to this unit # When the AV (AV input) is not set to Video. see the following section. ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! BGP1 – Background picture 1 BGP2 – Background picture 2 BGP3 – Background picture 3 BGP4 – Background picture 4 BGV1 – Background visual 1 BGV2 – Background visual 2 BGV3 – Background visual 3 Photo – JPEG image stored in this unit Customizing the illumination color 1 Touch Illumination Color on the entertainment menu. 56 En . ! While scanning all colors. Selecting the background display You can switch background displays while listening to each source. touching Scan can stop the scanning. # To return to the previous display. 2 Touch the desired setting. Selecting the illumination color This unit is equipped with multiple-color illumination. (Refer to page 54. you cannot select Photo. Direct selection from preset illumination color You can select an illumination color from the color list. 2 Touch ESC to return to the display of each source. To store JPEG image in this unit. ! ! ! ! ! ! Blue (blue) Red (red) Amber (amber) Green (green) White (white) Scan (scanning all colors) Notes ! Scan setting cycles continuously through all the colors. You can select one from the following list. 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Entertainment Menu to display the entertainment function names. 1 Touch Illumination Color on the entertainment menu. you can select the displayed color as the background. 1 Touch Background on the entertainment menu. You can select one from the following list. Refer to Capture an image in JPEG files on page 34.) # If no JPEG image has been stored in this unit. The entertainment function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. touch Back. When this is done. 1 1 Entertainment menu display Shows the entertainment function names. AV Input cannot be selected. 2 Touch one of the color list.

Section

Entertainment settings
2 Touch Custom to display the customizing menu. 3 Press +/– (VOL) to customize the color.

17

4 To store the customized color in memory, touch and hold one of preset keys (Memo1, Memo2 or Memo3) until the beep sounds. The customized color has been stored in memory. The next time you touch the same preset key, the color is recalled from memory.

Entertainment settings

Selecting the OSD color
You can change the OSD color. 1 Touch Screen Color on the entertainment menu. 2 Touch one of the color list. You can select one from the following list.
! ! ! ! ! Blue (blue) Red (red) Amber (amber) Green (green) White (white)

En

57

Section

18

Other Functions Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (Touch Panel Calibration)
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response positions of the touch panel. There are two adjustment methods: 4-point adjustment, in which you touch four corners of the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen. ! Make sure to use the supplied pen for adjustment, and gently touch the screen. If you press the touch panel forcefully, the touch panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen. Otherwise the screen is damaged. ! If touch panel adjustment cannot be performed properly, consult your local Pioneer dealer. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Off to turn this unit off.
# When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # To cancel the adjustment, press and hold MUTE.

6 Gently touch the center of the + mark displayed on the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. After you touch all the marks, the adjusted position data is saved.
# Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data.

7 Press and hold MUTE to complete the adjustment.

Using the AUX source
A separately sold auxiliary device such as VCR or portable device can be connected to this unit. When connected, auxiliary device is automatically recognized as AUX source and assigned to AUX.

About AUX connection method
You have two methods to connect auxiliary device to this unit.

2 Press and hold h (eject). The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen appears. 3 Touch each of the arrows on the four corners of the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen.
# To cancel the adjustment, press and hold MUTE.

Mini pin plug cable (AUX-1)
When connecting auxiliary device using a mini plug cable iPod and portable audio/video player can be connected to this unit via mini plug cable. ! If an iPod with video capabilities is connected to this unit via 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) cable (e.g., CD-V150M), you can enjoy the video contents of the iPod. ! It is possible to connect a portable audio/ video player by using a 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) to RCA cable, which is sold separately. However, depending on the cable, reverse connection between red (right side audio) cable and yellow (video) cable is required. Otherwise, audio and video may not be correctly reproduced.

4 Press DISP OFF to complete the 4-point adjustment. The adjusted position data is saved.
# Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data.

5 Press DISP OFF to proceed to the 16point adjustment. The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen appears.

58

En

Section

Other Functions
% Insert the stereo mini plug into the AUX input jack on this unit. For more details, refer to What’s what on page 11. 4 Touch c or d to move the cursor.

18

5 Touch OK to store the entered title in memory. 6 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display.

IP-BUS-RCA interconnector (AUX-2)
When connecting auxiliary device using an IPBUS-RCA Interconnector (sold separately) % Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) to connect this unit to auxiliary device featuring RCA output. For more details, refer to the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector owner’s manual.
# You can only make this type of connection if the auxiliary device has RCA outputs.

Using the external unit
External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as ones available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions with this unit. Two external units can be controlled with this unit. When two external units are connected, the external unit is automatically allocated to external unit 1 or external unit 2 by this unit. Basic operations of the external unit are explained below. Allocated functions are different depending on the connected external unit. For details concerning functions, refer to external unit’s owner’s manual.

Other Functions

Selecting AUX as the source
% Touch the source icon and then touch AUX-1/AUX-2 to select AUX as the source.
# If the auxiliary setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. For more details, refer to Switching the auxiliary setting on page 50.

Selecting the external unit as the source
% Touch the source icon and then touch EXT-1/EXT-2 to select external unit as the source.

Setting the AUX title
The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. ! Each title can be up to 10 characters long. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, touch AV Menu and Function Menu and then touch Name Edit.
# When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen.

Basic operation
Functions allocated to the following operations are different depending on the connected external unit. For details concerning functions, refer to the connected external unit’s owner’s manual. % Touch Band. % Keep touching Band. % Touch c or d. % Keep touching c or d. % Touch a or b.

2 Touch ABC to select the desired character type. Touch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character types: Alphabet (upper case)—Alphabet (lower case)
# You can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123.

3 Touch a or b to select a letter of the alphabet.

En

59

The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. ! ! ! ! ! Function1 (function 1) Function2 (function 2) Function3 (function 3) Function4 (function 4) Auto/Manual (auto/manual) 2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. Advanced operations 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. touch Back. 60 En . Touch any of 1 to 6 to select a function.Section 18 Other Functions Using the functions allocated to 1 to 6 keys 1 2 Touch NEXT. # To return to the previous display.

# To return to the disc list. ! Only functions described in this section can be operated. refer to the multi-CD player owner’s manual. Selecting discs from the disc title list Disc title list lets you see the list of disc titles and select one of them to playback. which is sold separately. Touching p skips to the start of the next track. 19 3 To skip back or forward to another track. 4 To perform fast forward or reverse. 1 Touch List to display the disc list. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch M-CD to select the multi-CD player. touch Back. Touching it again will skip to the previous track. No Disc is displayed. En 61 . 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 5 Title indicator Shows the disc title and disc artist name of the currently playing disc only when playing CD TEXT discs. 2 Touch your favorite disc title (track title). 3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. Also. Available accessories Pausing CD playback Pause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. Ready is displayed. ! Only functions described in this manual are supported by 50-disc multi-CD players.Section Available accessories Multi-CD Player Listening to a CD 1 2 3 4 2 Touch a or b to select a disc. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player magazine. 2 Disc number indicator Shows the number of the disc playing. 5 You can use this unit to control a multi-CD player. briefly touch o or p. # To turn pause off. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRK). % Touch f to turn pause on. 3 Track number indicator Shows the number of the track playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. # You can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d (TRK). Touching o once skips to the start of the current track. # If no title is entered for a disc. ! If an error message is displayed. No Title is displayed. keep touching o or p. Notes ! When multi-CD player completes preparatory operations. touch f again. ! Only 12 disc title can be displayed even if the 50-disc multi-CD player is connected to this unit. shows the track title and track artist name of the currently playing track only when playing CD TEXT discs. Playback of the current track pauses.

# To return to the previous display. the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. the repeat play range changes to Disc. the repeat play ranges you can select are different from that of the built-in DVD player. you cannot operate this function. ! If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during Track.Section 19 Available accessories Introduction to advanced operations You can only use these functions with a multiCD player that supports them. Function name Operation Refer to Repeating play on page 28. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. When you are using Multi-CD. touch Back. However. While you are using Disc. the repeat play range changes to Multi-CD. you cannot operate this function. Random and Scan operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player. ! After track or disc scanning is finished. normal playback of the tracks begins again. Refer to Scanning tracks of a CD on page 28. Repeat Random Scan Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play. Touch Compression repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Off—COMP1—COMP2—Off—DBE 1— DBE 2 # If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE. Function and operation Repeat. Using compression and bass emphasis You can only use these functions with a multiCD player that supports them. the beginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. % Touch Compression on the function menu to select your favorite setting. 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. ! If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE. The repeat play ranges of the multi-CD player are: ! Multi-CD – Repeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! Track – Repeat just the current track ! Disc – Repeat the current disc Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 28. COMP (compression) and DBE (dynamic bass emphasis) functions lets you adjust the sound playback quality of the multi-CD player. 62 En .

Section

Available accessories XM tuner
Listening to XM Satellite Radio
1 2 34 5
1 Touch the source icon and then touch XM to select the XM. 2 Touch Band to select an XM band. Touch Band repeatedly until the desired XM band is displayed, XM1, XM2 or XM3. 3 Touch c or d to select a desired channel. The channels move up or down step by step. Channels that cannot currently be selected are skipped, and the next channel is selected.

19

6
You can use this unit to control an XM satellite digital tuner (GEX-P920XM), which is sold separately. For details concerning operation, refer to the XM tuner’s operation manuals. This section provides information on XM operations with this unit which differs from that described in the XM tuner’s operation manual. ! This unit does not have the text scroll function. ! With this unit, you can operate one additional function: XM channel direct selection. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 XM band indicator Shows which band the tuner is tuned to. 3 XM channel select setting indicator Shows what channel select setting has been selected. 4 XM preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 5 XM channel number indicator Shows which channel has been selected. 6 Detail information Shows the detail information of the broadcast channel currently being received.

# If you touch and hold c or d, you can increase or decrease the channel number continuously. # You can also select a channel by pressing c or d (TRK). # You can also perform tuning from a desired channel category. (Refer to Selecting a channel in the channel category on the next page.)

Available accessories

Storing and recalling broadcast stations
You can easily store up to six broadcast stations for later recall. ! Six stations for each band can be stored in memory. 1 Touch List to display the preset list.

2 When you find a station that you want to store in memory keep touching one of preset tuning keys P1 to P6 until the beep sounds. The selected station has been stored in memory. The next time you touch the same preset tuning key P1 to P6 the station is recalled from memory.
# When P1 to P6 are not displayed, you can display them by touching List. # You can also use a and b to recall stations assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6 when the ALL-CH mode is selected.

3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display.

En

63

Section

19

Available accessories
Switching the XM channel select mode
You have two methods for selecting a channel: by number and by category. When selecting by number, channels in any category can be selected. Select by category to narrow your search down to only channels in a particular category. % Touch Mode to select the desired channel select mode. Touch Mode repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: ALL-CH (channel number select setting)— Category (channel category select setting) 2 Touch the desired channel that you want to listen to.
# When the Category mode is selected, touch a or b to switch to another category.

Selecting an XM channel directly
You can select an XM channel directly by entering the desired channel number. 1 Touch Direct.

2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired channel number.
# To cancel the input numbers, touch C.

Selecting a channel in the channel category
1 Touch Mode to select the channel category select mode. Touch Mode repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: ALL-CH (channel number select setting)— Category (channel category select setting) 2 Touch a or b to select the desired channel category. 3 Touch c or d to select the desired channel in the selected channel category.

3 Touch . The XM channel of entered number is selected.

Using the MyMix function
The MyMix function allows you to make the MyMix song playlist. When the song in the MyMix playlist is being broadcast on a station other than the one you are listening to, you will be alerted, and you can tune to the station to listen to that song. ! This function is available for GEX-P920XM. ! A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the song title and the artist name are memorized.

Selecting a channel from the XM channel list display
The list content can be switched so you can search for the track you want to listen to not only by the channel name but also by the artist name or song title. ! This function is available for GEX-P920XM. ! The channel list shows all the channels during the ALL-CH mode, and the channels included in the selected category during the Category mode. To switch the channel mode, touch Mode. 1 Touch . XM channel list appears in the display. Each touch of changes the following settings as follows: Channel name—Song title—Artist name

Making the MyMix playlist
You can add a song that is being broadcast to the MyMix playlist. When it is added, the song title and its artist name is memorized to this unit. The MyMix function will start on the song that matches the song title and its artist name in the MyMix playlist. 1 When a desired song is broadcast, touch and hold Memo. The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to are memorized, and a confirmation message appears.
# The song title and artist name of up to 12 tracks can be memorized. Trying to save more than 12 tracks will overwrite old ones. # You cannot memorize the song title or the artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is displayed on the title information.

64

En

Section

Available accessories
# You cannot memorize the song title or the artist name of the channel 000. # It is possible that the memorized title is not displayed correctly.

19
2 Touch Delete next to the song title you want to delete. That song will be deleted from the MyMix playlist.
# To delete all the songs in the MyMix playlist, touch Delete All.

2

Touch OK to confirm.
! To delete the song from the MyMix playlist, refer to Deleting the song from the MyMix playlist on this page.

3 A message will appear asking you to confirm to delete it. Touch Yes.
# To cancel the deleting, touch No.

When the song in the MyMix playlist is broadcast
As soon as the song in the MyMix playlist starts broadcast on a different station, a message is displayed. Touch Yes to switch to that station, and you can listen to that song. ! If you would rather not to tune to that station, touch No. ! If an alert for the song in the MyMix playlist is set up to off, no alert will be provided even when the song is broadcast. Refer to Setting up a song alert on page 68. ! If there is slight difference between the memorized title and the title of the song being broadcast, no alert will be provided even though they are the same song.

Displaying the Radio ID
Channel number select setting

Available accessories

If you select CH000, the ID code is displayed. % Touch c or d to select CH000.

Channel category select setting
RADIO ID is provided as a channel category for displaying the ID code. % Touch a or b to select RADIO ID from channel category. Display of the ID code repeats displaying RADIO ID and the ID code one after the other.
# If you select another channel, display of the ID code is canceled.

Setting up a song alert
You can set up an alert on or off by each song in the MyMix playlist. First, display the MyMix playlist and then change each alert setting. Set up an alert to on so you can receive the alert when the song is broadcast, or set it up to off to stop the alert for that song. 1 Touch Memo Edit. The MyMix playlist is displayed. 2 Touch the song title that you want to set up the alert to off. The check mark is removed, and the alert for that song is off.

Switching the XM display
! This function is available for GEX-P910XM. % Touch INFO to switch the XM display. Channel name—Artist name/feature—Song/ program title—Additional information—Channel number

Deleting the song from the MyMix playlist
You can delete each song in the MyMix playlist. 1 Touch Memo Edit. The MyMix playlist is displayed.

En

65

Storing and recalling broadcast stations You can easily store up to six broadcast stations for later recall. some operations differ slightly from those described in the SIRIUS operation manual. 3 SIRIUS channel select setting indicator Shows what channel select setting has been selected. 2 When you find a station that you want to store in memory keep touching one of preset tuning keys P1 to P6 until the beep sounds. (Refer to Selecting a channel in the channel category on the next page. # If you touch and hold c or d. Refer to Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly on the next page. This means that if the broadcast station you stored has been assigned to a different channel by SIRIUS. The selected station has been stored in memory. 4 SIRIUS preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected.Section 19 Available accessories SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio 1 2 34 5 1 Touch the source icon and then touch SIRIUS to select SIRIUS. SIRIUS2 or SIRIUS3. you can operate one additional function: SIRIUS channel direct selection. and the next channel is selected. 3 Touch c or d to select a desired channel. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. ! Six stations for each band can be stored in memory. ! This unit does not have the text scroll function. The next time you touch the same preset tuning key P1 to P6 the station is recalled from memory. This manual provides information on these points. For all other information on using the SIRIUS tuner. # You can also select a channel by pressing c or d (TRK). The channels move up or down step by step.) # It may take a few seconds before you can hear anything while this unit acquires and processes the satellite signal. 5 SIRIUS channel number indicator Shows which channel has been selected. you can still recall the same broadcast station (though a different channel number may appear in the display). When the SIRIUS tuner is used together with this unit. # When P1 to P6 are not displayed. please refer to the SIRIUS operation manual. ! Channels are stored and recalled on a broadcast station basis. # You can also perform tuning from a desired channel category. ! With this unit. 6 You can use this unit to control a SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner. 1 Touch List to display the preset list. which is sold separately. SIRIUS1. you can display them by touching List. 66 En . Channels that cannot currently be selected are skipped. 2 SIRIUS band indicator Shows which band the tuner is tuned to. you can increase or decrease the channel number continuously. 2 Touch Band to select a band. Touch Band repeatedly until the desired SIRIUS band is displayed. 6 Detail information Shows the detail information of the broadcast channel currently being received.

and you can tune to the station to listen to that song. The MyMix function will start on the song that matches the song title and its artist name in the MyMix playlist. # To cancel the input numbers. Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by entering the desired channel number. e. # The song title and artist name of up to 10 tracks can be memorized. 3 Touch c or d to select the desired channel in the selected channel category. ! A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the song title and the artist name are memorized. When you try to save more than 10 tracks. % When a desired song is broadcast. When the song in the MyMix playlist is broadcast As soon as the memorized song starts broadcast on a different station. touch C. 3 Touch . Available accessories Making the MyMix playlist You can add a song that is being broadcast to the MyMix playlist. When it is added. 3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. Touch Mode repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: ALL-CH (channel number select setting)— Category (channel category select setting) Using the MyMix function The MyMix function allows you to make the MyMix song playlist. a song alert is displayed. Touch Mode repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: ALL-CH (channel number select setting)— Category (channel category select setting) 2 Touch a or b to select the desired channel category. 19 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired channel number. Full is displayed and that song being broadcast cannot be saved. 1 Touch Mode to select the channel category select mode. En 67 . Select by category to narrow your search down to only channels in a particular category. When selecting by number.g. Rock. Jazz. the song title and its artist name is memorized to this unit. Classic. 1 Touch Direct. You can specify channels by selecting the desired category. Selecting a channel in the channel category Channels are organized into various program categories. you will be alerted. Touch Jump to switch to that station.Section Available accessories # You can also use a and b to recall stations assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6 when the ALL-CH mode is selected. The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to are memorized. ! This function is available for CD-SB10/SIRPNR2/SIR-PNR2C. The SIRIUS channel of entered number is selected. # You cannot memorize the song title or the artist name of the channel 000. Selecting the SIRIUS channel select mode You have two methods for selecting a channel: by number and by category. % Touch Mode to select the desired channel select mode. When the song in the MyMix playlist is being broadcast on a station other than the one you are listening to. touch and hold Memo. channels in any category can be selected. # It is possible that the memorized title is not displayed correctly. and you can listen to that track. and a confirmation message appears.

display the MyMix playlist and then change each alert setting. Touch Yes. Full is displayed and additional team selection is not possible. 1 Touch Memo Edit. ! If there is slight difference between the memorized title and the title of the song being broadcast. To restart. # To turn the MyMix function on. touch No. 2 Touch c or d to select the song title that you want to turn the alert off. 2 Touch c or d to select the song title that you want to delete. The selected song is deleted. The display is switched to the memo edit mode. Selecting teams for Game Alert 1 Touch Team Set. # To turn the Game Alert off of the selected team. 1 Touch Memo Edit. Setting up a song alert You can set up an alert on or off by each song in the MyMix playlist. First. 1 Touch Memo Edit. Deleting the song from the MyMix playlist You can delete each song in the MyMix playlist. touch On/Off again. ! This function is available for CD-SB10/SIRPNR2/SIR-PNR2C. ! The MyMix function is on at the default setting. 4 Touch On/Off to store the selected team in memory. touch Stay. Teams in the selected category are switched in the display. first delete the team selection and then try again. 4 A message will appear asking you to confirm to delete it. On is displayed with the selected team. 68 En . 2 Touch c or d on League to select a desired league.Section 19 Available accessories ! If you would rather not to tune to that station. 2 Touch Alert Off to turn the MyMix function off. In this case. no alert will be provided even though they are the same song. Using the Game Alert function This system can alert you when games involving your favorite teams are about to start. Turning the MyMix function on or off You can turn the MyMix function off and stop this unit to alert you for all the songs in the MyMix playlist. ! If an alert for the song in the MyMix playlist is set up to off. # When you have already made 12 team selections. Refer to Setting up a song alert on this page. or set it up to off to stop the alert for that song. touch Alert On. and the Game Alert function will start on that team. 3 Touch Delete. 5 Repeat these steps for selecting other teams. 3 Touch On/Off to turn the alert off. To use this function you need in advance to set up a game alert for the teams. The alert for the song is turned off. League names are switched in the display. The song title in the MyMix playlist is displayed. 3 Touch c or d on Team to select a desired team. turn this function on. Set up an alert to on so you can receive the alert when the song is broadcast. no alert will be provided even when the song is broadcast. Up to 12 teams can be selected. The MyMix function is now off. The display is switched to the memo edit mode. # To cancel the deleting.

Touch Jump to switch to that station. 3 Touch Tune To to switch to that station to listen to the game. # To select CH000. % Touch Instant Replay. — When Live is touched — When another source is selected Available accessories Displaying game information If games of your selected teams are currently playing. touch Alert Off. touch Stay. tuner exits from the Instant Replay mode. % Select a track Touch c or d. SIRIUS plug-and-play unit with Instant Replay Function is required. ! The Game Alert function is on at the default setting. About the channel select setting. the ID code is displayed. you need to turn the Game Alert function on.Section Available accessories Switching the Game Alert on or off Once you made team selections. CD-SB10) is required. % Touch c or d to select CH000. Now. ! For details. No Game is displayed. followed by more detailed game information. refer En 69 . The game information of your selected team is displayed. and you can listen to that game. to Selecting the SIRIUS channel select mode on page 67. Displaying the Radio ID If you select CH000. ! To use this function. you can display information of the games and tune to the broadcast channel. Instant Replay mode is deiplayed. % Pause and play Touch f. ! If you would rather not to tune to that station. Channel name—Artist name/feature—Song/ program title—Channel category 2 Touch Alert On to turn the Game Alert on. refer to SIRIUS plug-and-play unit’s manuals. Pioneer SIRIUS bus interface (e. # In the following conditions. The Game Alert function is now on. Not Set is displayed. # To turn the Game Alert function off. a game alert is displayed. # If you have not made any team selections. Following functions can be operated during the Instant Replay mode. 2 Touch PREV or NEXT to select a game. ! To use this function. set the channel select setting to ALL-CH. Instant Replay mode can be performed. 1 Touch Game INFO. % Touch INFO to switch the SIRIUS display. # When games involving your favorite teams are not currently playing.g. Using Instant Replay function When the game of the selected team starts When a game of the selected team is about to start (or is currently playing) on a different station. ! Game score will be updated automatically. The game is displayd. 19 Switching the SIRIUS display ! This function is available for SIR-PNR1. % Fast forward or reverse Touch and hold c or d for about one second and release. 1 Touch Team Set.

AM or FM. (Refer to Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies on page 17. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip stations. FM2. % Touch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Call sign—artist name—song title—program type 7 70 En . Touch Band until the desired band (FM1. # You can also perform manual tuning by pressing c or d (TRK). Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the key. is disis displayed. briefly touch c or d. 5 7 6 8 9 You can use this unit to control an HD Radio tuner (GEX-P10HD). For details concerning operation. played. / (signal reception status) indi5 cator When digital signal is received. 6 (HD station) indicator Shows when the tuner is tuned to HD radio station. which is sold separately. refer to the HD Radio tuner’s operation manual. (radio field strength) indicator Shows the radio field strength. keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # You can also perform seek tuning by pressing and holding c or d (TRK). 3 To perform manual tuning. 4 To perform seek tuning. Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies The operation is the same as that of the tuner. Otherwise. / (reception mode) 9 indicator Shows the setup value of reception mode. FM3 for FM or AM) is displayed. 2 Touch Band to select a band. 4 Frequency indicator Shows the frequency to which the tuner is tuned. # You can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d.) Displaying text information Desired information can be displayed. 2 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch HD Radio to select the HD Radio.Section 19 Available accessories HD Radio™ tuner Listening to HD Radio 1 2 3 4 / (seek mode) indica8 tor Shows the seek mode status. 3 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected.

En 71 . 1—2—3—4 Larger setting number is higher level. default display is changed into station name instead of frequency. % Touch Blending on the function menu to select your favorite setting. touch c. 19 Switching the seek mode There are two method of seek tuning settings. (Refer to Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies on page 18. Blending is changed to D/A Auto. the tuner can not receive broadcasts.) Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. ! When Blending is set to Analog. if you switch Seek from All to HD. reception will be conducted within an analog broadcast. All—HD Introduction of advanced tuner operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names.Section Available accessories # Only when the tuner has been tuned in to an HD Radio broadcasting. % Touch Seek on the function menu to select your favorite setting. 1 2 Touch Local on the function menu. Seek is changed to All. If this function is Analog. 3 Touch c or d on Level to select the desired level. the seek mode or reception mode is changed automatically as follows: ! When Seek is set to HD. touch Back. In this case. D/A Auto—Analog Note If Seek is set to HD and Blending is set to Analog. Available accessories Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies The operation is the same as that of the tuner. The highest level setting allows reception of only the strongest stations. display can be changed. the tuner switches between digital broadcast and analog broadcast automatically. # When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD Radio broadcasting. Switching the reception mode If a digital broadcast reception condition gets poor. # To return to the previous display. # To turn off. Touch d on Local to turn on. while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 2 Touch ESC to return to the frequency display. If this function is set to D/A Auto. one is HD (Digital broadcasting stations seek) and the other is All (normal seek). if you switch Blending from D/A Auto to Analog. this unit automatically switches to the analog broadcast of the same frequency level.

! If you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e. ! Information about songs (e..) cannot be displayed on this unit.g. song title. 3 Device name Shows the device name of the connected Bluetooth audio player (or Bluetooth adapter).g. the signal from your cel- For details concerning operation. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. CDBTB200) to this unit. ! In some countries. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your Bluetooth audio player as well as this manual while operating your player on this unit. (Refer to Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on the next page. etc. Important ! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player connected to this unit. If you use your cellular phone. etc. # For this unit to control your Bluetooth audio player it needs to establish a Bluetooth wireless connection. ! While you are listening to songs on your Bluetooth audio player. operations with your Bluetooth audio player using this unit vary extensively. To control your audio player using this unit. which slightly differs or is abbreviated from that described in the Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. This section provides brief information on Bluetooth audio player operations with this unit. 2 Connection indicator Shows the Bluetooth wireless connection status. CD-BTB200 is not sold on the market. you can control Bluetooth audio players via Bluetooth wireless technology.Section 19 Available accessories Bluetooth Audio Basic Operations 1 2 3 lular phone may cause noise on the song playback. CD-BTB200) to this unit. ! Even if you are listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio player and you switch to another source. song playback from your Bluetooth audio player connected to this unit is muted. are possible. ! Even though your audio player does not contain a Bluetooth module. you can still control it from this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology. refer to the Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. the elapsed playing time. ! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch BT Audio to select the Bluetooth audio source. selecting songs. song playback continues. pausing. song index.g. ! When you are talking on a cellular phone connected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology. refrain from using on your cellular phone as much as possible. the operations available with this unit are limited to the following two levels: — A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile): Only playing back songs on your audio player is possible. — AVRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile): Playing back. connect a product featuring Bluetooth wireless technology (available on the market) to your audio player and connect the Bluetooth adapter (e.) 72 En .

5 To stop playback. 2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. # To return to the previous display. Connection Waiting is displayed. briefly touch o or p. look for the code on the player or in its accompanying documentation. 3 To skip back or forward to another track. touch d. touch g. Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player % Touch Disconnect on the function menu. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. After the disconnection is completed. If your player requires a PIN code to establish a connection. connection to this unit is automatically established. Available accessories Pausing playback % Touch e during playback. touch Back. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 51. Playback starts. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) information % Touch Device Information on the function menu to display the BD address.Section Available accessories 2 Touch d. Connecting a Bluetooth audio player % Touch Connection Open on the function menu to turn the connection open on. Note Before you can use audio players you may need to enter the PIN code into this unit. If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRK). 4 To perform fast forward or reverse. This unit is now on standby for connection from Bluetooth audio player. keep touching o or p. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. ! ! ! ! Device Name (device name of this system) BD Address (address of Bluetooth device) System Version (system version) BT Module Version (version of Bluetooth module) Introduction to advanced operations 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. En 73 . 19 # You can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d (TRK). No Connection is displayed. Various information regarding the Bluetooth wireless technology are displayed.

74 En . using this unit without running the engine can result in battery drainage. For details concerning operation. nothing is displayed in the battery strength indicator area. is displayed. 5 Voice recognition indicator Shows when the voice recognition function is on (for more details. telephone indicator is flashing. 2 User number indicator Shows the registration number of the cellular phone. refer to the Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. 8 Battery strength indicator Shows the battery strength of cellular phone. etc. This section provides brief information on the hands-free phoning operations with this unit which slightly differs or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. ! In some countries. ! While connecting automatically. wireless calls. 4 Automatic answering/Automatic rejecting indicator Shows when the automatic answering function is on (for more details.g.Section 19 Available accessories Bluetooth Telephone Basic Operations 1 2 3 4 5 6 Shows when the automatic rejecting function is on (for more details. When you need to use these advanced operations. ! Incoming call notice is not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit. stop your vehicle in a safe place. 9 Incoming call notice indication Shows when an incoming call has been received and not checked yet. refer to Setting automatic rejecting on page 80). 3 Device name Shows the device name of the cellular phone. refer to Connecting a cellular phone on page 76). 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. refer to Setting automatic answering on page 80). the signal level indicator does not appear. ! Advanced operations that require your attention such as dialing numbers on the monitor. ! The level shown on the indicator may differ from the actual battery strength. using phone book. even while driving. you can connect a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology to this unit for hands-free. are prohibited while you are driving. Important ! Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phone via Bluetooth wireless technology. CDBTB200). CD-BTB200 is not sold on the market. 6 Signal level indicator Shows the signal strength of cellular phone. refer to Voice recognition on the next page). ! The level shown on the indicator may differ form the actual signal level.. 98 7 ! If you use a Bluetooth adapter (e. ! Depending on the cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology. ! If your cellular phone is out of service. ! If the battery strength is not available. 7 Telephone indicator Shows when a phone connection using Bluetooth wireless technology is established (for more details. In this case. radio field intensity is not available. ! This unit is not compatible with registration for guest phone.

to make best use of the technology. When adjusted. 2 To end the call. Taking a phone call Answering an incoming call 1 When a call comes in. both you and your caller need to hang up the phone. # To cancel the voice recognition function. the volume level of your cellular phone remains muted even after the cellular phone is disconnected. Rejecting an incoming call % When a call comes in. you cannot perform the operation in the following section. touch . # You can also perform the same operation by pressing d (TRK). 1 Connection For detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology. # Before disconnecting the cellular phone from this unit. When the multi-channel processor is connected to this unit. # While your callers hold the line. proper level. When selecting the phone source. and adjusting the volume level. If the volume is muted (zero level) on your cellular phone. Setting up for hands-free phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you must set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. Refer to Recalling equalizer curves on page 89. hands-free phoning may not be performed. # The caller you have been talking to is now on hold. Note The equalizer curve for the phone source is fixed. refer to Registering a connected cellular phone on the next page. Voice dial icon appears on the information bar. # You can also perform the same operation by pressing c (TRK). overall volume level may become unstable. we recommend you register the phone to this unit. # You can also perform the same operation by pressing c (TRK). To end the call. . En 75 . This entails establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection between this unit and your phone. Voice recognition function is now ready. 2 Touch to end all calls. you can operate the equalizer function even when selecting the phone source. 2 Registration To register your temporarily connected phone. # Your phone should now be temporarily connected. % Touch the source icon and then touch TEL to select the telephone. make sure to adjust the volume to a # You can also perform the same operation by pressing d (TRK). # If the difference between the ring volume and caller’s voice volume is big. refer to Connecting a cellular phone on the next page. However. # If private mode is selected on the cellular phone. touch . Answering a call waiting 1 Touch to answer a call waiting. # Caller’s voice volume and ring volume may vary depending on the type of cellular phone. the volume level is recorded in this unit as the default setting. touch again. Available accessories 2 Pronounce the name of your contact. registering your phone with this unit.Section Available accessories ! This unit does not have the name edit function of a Phone Book entry. touching switches between callers. 3 Volume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume on your cellular phone for comfort. touch The call is rejected. 19 Making a phone call Voice recognition 1 Touch to turn the voice recognition function on. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 43.

to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 51. 2 Touch Search to search for available cellular phones. # To return to the previous display. Connecting a cellular phone Searching for available cellular phones 1 Touch Phone Connect on the function menu. # PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. Not Found is displayed. If the registration is succeeded. # To cancel this function. Connection Waiting flashes and the unit is now on standby for connection from a cellular phone. touch Connection Open again. the device name of the connected phone is displayed in the selected assignment. Registration assignments for user phone 1. No Connection is displayed. Registering a connected cellular phone 1 Touch Phone Register on the function menu. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. Searching flashes. 2 Touch Disconnect to disconnect the currently connected cellular phone from this unit. touch Back. While searching. 2 Touch Connection Open. 3 Touch the device name you want to connect. To complete the connection. To return to the device name. Rejecting call waiting % Touch to reject a call waiting. While connecting. 2 Touch ESC to return to the telephone standby display. Refer 76 En . Connecting flashes. # Up to five peripheral cellular phones are displayed. check the device name (Pioneer BT unit) and enter the link code on your cellular phone. You can change this code in the initial setting. 2 Touch and hold one of the registration assignments to register the currently connected phone. device name or Name Not Found (if names cannot be obtained) is displayed. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 51. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection 1 Touch Phone Connect on the function menu. 2 and 3 appear on the display. You can change this code in the initial setting. # You can display the BD address by touching BD ADDR.Section 19 Available accessories # You can also perform the same operation by pressing d (TRK). 3 Use cellular phone to connect to this unit. After disconnection is completed. When available cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology are found. # If this unit fails to find any available cellular phones. # You can also perform the same operation by pressing d (TRK). touch Phone Name. Introduction to advanced operations 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. Disconnecting a cellular phone 1 Touch Phone Connect on the function menu. # PIN code is set to 0000 as the default.

Section Available accessories # If the assignment is empty. # To turn automatic connection off. 19 Using the phone book Transferring entries to the phone book The Phone Book can hold a total of 500 entries. 1 Touch Phone Book Transfer on the function menu. 3 Use the cellular phone to perform phone book transfer. In this case. 150 from User 2. # If the registration failed. device name of the connected phone is not displayed in the selected assignment. 300 from User 1. the device name appears. Deleting a registered phone 1 Touch Phone Register on the function menu. first delete the current assignment. To use the Phone Book. A confirmation display appears. touch Phone Book Name View again. refer to the instruction manual that came with your cellular phone. 2 Touch Delete next to the device name you want to delete. connect to your cellular phone once again. touch Auto Connect again. 2 Touch Direct Connect. Note When the phone book transfer is complete. the device name is not displayed. En 77 . The Phone Book Transfer is now on standby. touch ESC. Connecting is flashing. return to step 1 and try again. Calling a number in the phone book Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. For more detailed instructions. # To change to the original order (Original). # To cancel the transferring process. # The display indicates how many entries have been transferred and the total number to be transferred. # To cancel deleting a registered phone. Touch OK to delete the phone. see Deleting a registered phone on this page. the connection to your cellular phone is off. Changing the phone book display order % Touch Phone Book Name View on the function menu to change the name view order. connection to this unit is automatically established. To replace an assignment with a new phone. # If connection fails. touch Cancel. Available accessories Connecting to a registered cellular phone Connecting to a registered phone manually 1 Touch Phone Connect on the function menu. 3 Touch the device name you want to connect. While connecting. Connecting to a registered phone automatically % Touch Auto Connect on the function menu to turn the Automatic Connection function on. referring to Connecting to a registered cellular phone on this page. touch Stop. Inverted is displayed and the name view order is changed. If your cellular phone is ready for Bluetooth wireless connection. Perform phone book transfer using the cellular phone. 4 When you are done transferring Phone Book entries. If the assignment is already taken. 2 Touch Start to turn the Phone Book Transfer function on. and 50 from User 3. Connection Error is displayed. For detailed instructions.

Touch Yes to delete the entry. “Brian” and “Burt” when “B” is selected). touch Clear. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. are stored in the Call History. 2 Touch c or d to select the first letter of the name you are looking for. Each phone number can be up to 24 digits long. Refer to Calling a number in the phone book on the previous page. touch Add “+” to add + to the phone number. 3 Touch Enter to show entries starting with the letter you chose. Using the call history Editing phone numbers Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. You can edit the numbers of Phone Book entries. received and missed. # For an international call. Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. 5 Touch phone number of the Phone Book entry you want to call. Refer to Calling a number in the phone book on the previous page. touch No. 7 To end the call. # If you do not want to clear a Phone Book entry that you have selected. You can browse the Call History and call numbers from it. 1 Touch Log to display the Call History. nothing is displayed. 3 Touch Delete to delete the Phone Book entry. The display is switched to the Phone Book detail display. Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section for how to do this. The 6 most recent calls made (dialed). 1 Touch to display the Phone Book. touch . A confirmation display appears. 3 Touch Edit next to the phone number you want to edit. Clearing a phone book entry Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. The display returns to the normal display and the Phone Book entry you selected is displayed on the information bar. 4 Touch 0 to 9 to input numbers. # If no phone numbers have been stored in the selected list. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to delete. # For an international call. 78 En .g. Touching Log repeatedly switches between the following call histories: Missed Calls (missed call)—Dialed Calls (dialed call)—Received Calls (received call) # You can switch between phone number and name (if entered) by touching ABC/123. The display shows the first six Phone Book entries starting with that letter (e. The display is changed to the Phone Book dial edit display. Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section for how to do this. # To refine the search with a different letter. touch Add “+” to add + to the phone number. If several phone numbers are entered to an entry. 4 Touch a Phone Book entry you want to call.Section 19 1 Available accessories Touch to display the Phone Book. “Ben”. Touch and hold Clear to delete all the input numbers. 1 Touch to display the Phone Book. 5 Touch OK to store the new number. touch one you want to call. 6 Touch to make a call. # Touch Clear to delete the number.

. The selected phone number should now be displayed on the information bar. you can replace it to the new one by keeping touching the assignment. Or directly enter a desired phone number. 3 4 Touch to make a call. 3 When you completed entering the number. touch . The display returns to the normal display and the phone number you entered is selected. 4 To end the call. 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input numbers. Preset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). 1 Touch Direct to display the direct dial display. 3 Keep touching one of preset assignments to store the phone number. Available accessories Assigning preset numbers Numbers that you dial frequently can be assigned to presets for quick recall. The display should now be the normal display and the selected phone number is displayed on the information bar. touch Making a call by entering phone number Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. To select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call History. Touch and hold Clear to delete all the input numbers. Clearing memory 1 Touch Clear Memory on the function menu. see the instructions explained in previous pages. The display returns to the normal display and the phone number you selected is displayed on the information bar. 2 Touch one of preset assignments. 1 Select a desired phone number from the phone book or the call history. touch Set here. Preset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). Using preset numbers Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. To end the call.Section Available accessories 2 Touch a phone number or name (if entered) you want to call. Select from the following: ! ! ! ! Phone Book (phone book) Dialed Calls (dialed call history) Received Calls (received call history) Missed Calls (missed call history) En 79 . 2 Touch List to display preset assignments. The phone number you selected is stored in presets. Refer to Making a call by entering phone number on this page. 19 Recalling preset numbers 1 Touch List to display preset assignments. # Touch Clear to delete the number. touch to make a call. # For an international call. please see the following section. # No Data is displayed for empty assignment. 4 To end the call. touch Add “+” to add + to the phone number. # If you want to store the entered phone number to preset assignment. # For an international call. touch Add “+” to add + to the phone number. Even if the assignment is taken. touch . 3 Touch to make a call. To directly enter a desired phone number. You can assign up to 6 frequently called phone numbers to number presets. 2 Touch Clear next to the item you want to delete from the memory. # Up to 24 digits can be entered.

touch Echo Cancel again. Displaying BD address of your cellular phone 1 Touch Phone Connect on the function menu. Setting automatic rejecting % Touch Refuse All Calls to turn the automatic call rejection on. 12-digit hexadecimal string is displayed. 2 Touch BD Address to display the BD address. # To return to the device name. Switching the ring tone % Touch Ring Tone to turn the ring tone on. # If you do not want to clear memory that you have selected. Echo canceling and noise reduction % Touch Echo Cancel to turn Echo Cancel function on. a confirmation display appears. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address Displaying BD address of this system % Touch Device Information to display the BD address.Section 19 Available accessories ! Dial Preset (preset phone numbers) ! System Version (version of this unit’s microprocessor) ! BT Module Version (version of Bluetooth module) After selecting a desired item. Touch OK to delete the memory. ! Device Name (device name of this system) ! BD Address (address of Bluetooth device) 80 En . touch Ring Tone again. touch Refuse All Calls again. # To turn the automatic call rejection off. touch Auto Answer again. Various information regarding the Bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. # To turn the ring tone off. Setting automatic answering % Touch Auto Answer on the function menu to turn the automatic answer on. dialed/received/missed call history list and preset phone number. touch Clear All. touch Cancel. # To turn echo canceling off. # If you want to clear all the Phone Book. # To turn the automatic answer off. touch Phone Name.

This section provides information on TV operations with this unit. Pioneer does not sell a digital TV tuner in the U.. which differs from that described in the TV tuner’s operation manual. briefly touch c or d. 3 Touch Band to select a band. the switch from analog TV to digital TV broadcasting is planned for August 31. in 2006. please read the important information below. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. the switch from analog TV to digital TV broadcasting is planned for February 17. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV. ! THIS MEANS THAT AFTER THE DATES SPECIFIED ABOVE (SUBJECT TO CHANGE). 19 Basic Operations 1 2 3 4 You can use this unit to control a TV tuner (e.S. and analog TV tuners are also no longer available in Canadian markets. which is sold separately. 2011. For details concerning operation.S. read this section. Touch Band repeatedly until the desired band is displayed. 3 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. YOU CAN NO LONGER USE THIS UNIT WITH AN ANALOG TV TUNER TO WATCH ALMOST ALL TV PROGRAMMING BROADCAST OVER-THEAIR. refer to the TV tuner’s operation manual. or in Canada. TV1 or TV2. # You can also perform manual tuning by pressing c or d (TRK). ! In Canada. 2 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to. If you are already using a Pioneer analog TV tuner. 2009. 4 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned. ! In the U.g. ! Pioneer stopped selling analog TV tuners in the U. However. such as the GEX-P5700TV.S. # When the source icon is not displayed.Section Available accessories TV tuner Important This manual describes analog TV tuner operation. GEX-P5700TV). Available accessories 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys. you can display it by touching the screen. 4 To perform manual tuning. En 81 .

2 Touch BSSM on the function menu to turn BSSM on. # To return to the previous display. keep touching c or d for about one second and release. # You can also perform seek tuning by pressing and holding c or d (TRK). # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. stored in order from the lowest channel up. Storing and recalling broadcast stations You can easily store up to 12 broadcast stations for later recall. The next time you touch the same preset tuning key the station is recalled from memory. 2 When you find a station that you want to store in memory. BSSM begins to flash.Section 19 Available accessories 5 To perform seek tuning. 3 Touch ESC to return to the frequency display. Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. The tuner will scan the channels until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # To cancel the storage process. The selected broadcast station has been stored in memory. touch BSSM again. BSSM stops flashing. keep touching one of preset tuning keys P01 to P12 until the beep sounds. # You can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. Note Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may replace broadcast stations you have saved using P01 to P12. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be 82 En . touch a or b. When finished. you can display them by touching List. # To switch between P01 to P06 and P07 to P12. touch Back. ! Six stations for each band can be stored in memory. 1 Touch List to display the preset list. # When P01 to P06 and P07 to P12 are not displayed.

which is sold separately. 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and autoequalizing) 4 Adjusting the time alignment 5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 6 Selecting a cross-over frequency 7 Adjusting the speaker output levels 8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Available accessories 2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. # To return to the previous group of function names. the feature will make the sound image more natural and offer a panoramic sound that envelops you.Section Available accessories Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustments # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency. to select a listening position as listed in the table. touch b. 1 DSP display Shows the DSP function names. Position. # To go to the next group of function names. # When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting. When used in conjunction with the SFC. c/d/a/b. # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency. you cannot switch to Time Alignment. Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image. By carrying out the following settings/adjustments in the order shown. 19 1 You can use this unit to control multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000). The position selector function lets you automatically adjust the speaker output levels and inserts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. touch a. 1 Touch Position on the DSP function menu. Auto EQ and Auto TA will be canceled. # To cancel the selected listening position. equalizer curve setting. The DSP function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # When playing other than the DVD disc. # When selecting FM as the source. # When neither Front-L nor Front-R is selected in Position. # To return to the previous display. 2 Touch c/d/a/b to select a listening position. touch Back. you cannot switch to Source Level Adjuster. you can create a finely-tuned sound field effortlessly. Key c d a b Display Front-L Front-R Front All Position Front seat left Front seat right Front seats All seats 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch DSP Menu to display the DSP function names. you cannot use audio functions. audio is outputted from front speakers only. touch the same key again. you cannot switch to Dynamic Range Control. you cannot switch to Dolby Pro Logic II. En 83 . Also. Touch one of these. putting you right in the center of the sound field.

Those factors are programed into the SFC circuitry to recreate the acoustics of various performance settings.e. Left:25 to Right:25 is displayed as the left/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. floors and ceilings. At a live performance you hear music in three stages: direct sound. 84 En . verberations. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. Each time you touch a or b it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear. we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic II off. Hall or Club). # FR: 0/LR: 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. Each time you touch c or d it moves the left/ right speaker balance towards the left or the right. which remains unchanged.. Jazz. when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i. On the other hand.Section 19 Available accessories Note When you make adjustments to the listening position. Front:25 to Rear:25 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear.e. walls. early reflections. 3 Touch c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. and late reflections. 2 Touch a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. 1 Touch Fader/Balance on the DSP function menu. Musical—Drama—Action—Jazz—Hall— Club—Off Display Musical Drama Action Jazz Hall Club Off Setting Musical Drama Action Jazz Hall Club Off Using balance adjustment You can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide the ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5. or reSLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switching between sources. Touch SFC until the desired setting appears in the display. % Touch SFC on the DSP function menu to select the setting. we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic II on. ! The acoustics of different performance environments are not the same and depend on the extent and contour of space through which sound waves move and on how sounds bounce off the stage. Musical. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level. Adjusting source levels Using the sound field control The SFC function creates the sensation of a live performance.. You can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels. the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels.1-channel audio (i. Drama or Action).

! When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting. ! Lt/Rt – Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). touch c. ! When playing other than the DVD disc. Touch c or d to select the desired level. ! AUX (auxiliary input) and AV (AV input) are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. 3 Touch c or d to adjust the source volume. you cannot switch to Dynamic Range Control.Section Available accessories 2 Touch Source Level Adjuster on the DSP function menu. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48 kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no effect on other types of source. Using the direct control You can override audio settings to check for effectiveness of your audio settings. Available accessories Touch d to turn the direct control on. Using the Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. En 85 . +4 to –4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. ! All audio functions are locked out when the direct control is on except VOL and Dolby Pro Logic II. 1 Touch Dolby Pro Logic II. 2 ! Lo/Ro – Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as surround components. you cannot switch to Dolby Pro Logic II. # To turn dynamic range control off. 1 Touch Digital Direct on the DSP function menu. touch c. 2 Touch d to turn the dynamic range control on. Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference between the largest and softest sounds. Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the source volume. ! Movie – The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! Music – The Music mode suitable for music playback ! Matrix – The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak ! Off – Turn Dolby Pro Logic II off Using the down-mix function The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. 19 1 Touch Down Mix on the DSP function menu. CD. ! Video CD. Notes ! The AM volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. 1 Touch Dynamic Range Control on the DSP function menu. The dynamic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. 2 Touch any of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. 2 # To turn direct control off.

0 places all center sound in the center speaker. 7 places all center sound equally in the left/right speakers. 6 Touch b to select Center Width and then touch c or d to adjust the center image. ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to Off. ! Panorama (Panorama) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting “wraparound” effect. ! Set the front or rear speaker to Large if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content. 5 Touch b to select Dimension and then touch c or d to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Adjusting the Music mode You can adjust the Music mode with the following three controls. 2 Touch Music and then touch Music Adjust. Each time you touch c or d selects the size in the following order: Off (off)—Small (small)—Large (large) 86 En . 1 Touch Speaker Setting. Otherwise select Small (small). The size needs to be set to Large (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below. Each time you touch c or d it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front left and right speakers over a range 0 to 7. or if no subwoofer is installed. 3 Touch c or d to select the correct size for the selected speaker. Each time you touch c or d it moves the sound towards the front or the rear. # To turn the panorama control off. 2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. ! Center Width Control (Center Width) allows center-channel sounds to be positioned between the center speaker and the left/right speakers. ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to Off and the front and rear speakers set to Small or Off. touch c. 1 Touch Dolby Pro Logic II. 3 Touch a or b to select Panorama (panorama). # You can operate Music Adjust only when Music has been selected. ! Dimension (Dimension) allows you to gradually adjust the sound field either towards the front or the rear. Setting the speaker setting You need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/adjustments depending on the installed speakers. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: Panorama (panorama)—Dimension (dimension)—Center Width (center width) 4 Touch d to turn the panorama control on. Each time you touch a or b selects the speaker in the following order: Front (front speakers)—Center (center speaker)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (subwoofer)—Phase (subwoofer setting) # You can switch to Phase only when the subwoofer has been set to On.Section 19 Available accessories ! Music Adjust – Adjust the Music mode # You can operate Music Adjust only when Music has been selected. +3 to -3 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. 3 is the default and it’s recommended for most recordings. It improves the left-center-right stage presentation for both the driver and the front passenger.

1 Touch Speaker Level. 2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. when Front (front speakers) have been selected. under which sounds are reproduced through a Large speaker or subwoofer. Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Dolby Pro Logic II turned on. 4 Touch b and then touch c or d to select the phase of subwoofer output. try changing the phase setting for the subwoofer. # You can switch Reverse (reverse phase) or Normal (normal phase). Touch d to select normal phase and Normal appears in the display. First. If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to Small. Touch c to select reverse phase and Reverse appears in the display. +10 to –10 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. 1 Touch Cross Over. when Subwoofer (subwoofer) has been selected. 19 Adjusting the speaker output levels Speaker level can be adjusted finely by listening to an audio output. Each time you touch a or b selects the speaker in the following order: En 87 . touch c. under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoofer. Each time you touch a or b selects the speaker in the following order: Front (front speakers)—Center (center speaker)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (subwoofer)—Phase (subwoofer setting) 3 # To turn subwoofer output off. To remove this problem. Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the equalizer level. 3 Touch c or d to adjust the speaker output level. Correcting the subwoofer’s phase If trying to boost the bass output of the subwoofer doesn’t do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky. # You can select On or Off.Section Available accessories # You cannot select Off. there may be occasions when the following will occur: ! No audio is outputted if the center speaker setting is Small or Large and no center speaker is installed. Selecting a cross-over frequency You can select a frequency. you can select a frequency. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on the previous page.) Available accessories 2 Touch a or b to select Subwoofer (subwoofer). ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is Small or Large. and then use this function to adjust finely. this may indicate that the subwoofer’s output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. Both provide the same results. Note To adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at Test Tone. Touch d to turn subwoofer output on. use test tone to adjust the approximate speaker level. 1 Touch Speaker Setting. Each time you touch a or b selects the speaker in the following order: Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)— Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer) # You cannot select speakers whose size is set to Off. 2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. when Phase (subwoofer setting) has been selected.

88 En .P (low-pass . # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set to Off. 1 Touch Time Alignment.Section 19 Available accessories Front (front speakers)—Center (center speaker)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (subwoofer) 3 Touch c or d to select cross-over frequency.) ! To adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at Speaker Level (speaker output level). (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 86. +10 to –10 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. 1 Touch Test Tone. Each time you touch c or d selects cross-over frequencies in the following order: 63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz—160Hz— 200Hz Note Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a crossover frequency of the subwoofer’s L. filter) and that of the Small speaker H. pass filter). If no adjustments are needed. Both provide the same results. Using the time alignment The time alignment lets you adjust the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at intervals of about two seconds. ! Initial – Initial time alignment (factory setting) ! Auto TA – Time alignment created by auto TA and EQ. 3 Touch c or d to adjust the speaker output level. select speakers and adjust their ‘absolute’ output levels.F. Notes ! If needed. Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)— Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer) Check each speaker output level. perform step 4 to stop the test tone. 4 Touch Stop to stop the test tone output. Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone This function allows you to easily get the overall balance right among the speakers. Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the equalizer level. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on the previous page. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. The test tone is outputted. # You cannot select TA Adjust when neither Front-L nor Front-R is selected in Position. 2 Touch Start to start the test tone output.) 2 Touch any of the following touch panel keys to select the time alignment.) ! Custom – Adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself ! Off – Turn the time alignment off ! TA Adjust – Adjust the time alignment as desired # You cannot select Auto TA if auto TA and EQ has not been carried out.P (high.F. (Refer to Auto TA and EQ (autotime alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 90. The cross-over frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to Off and other speakers are set to Large or Off.

Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer curves which you can easily recall at any time. Touch d repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: Powerful—Natural—Vocal—Flat—Custom1 —Custom2—Super Bass 3 Touch c or d to adjust the distance between the selected speaker and the listening position. 0. ! A Custom2 curve can be created common to all sources. 1 Touch Time Alignment and then touch TA Adjust. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 86.0inch to 200. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: Equalizer (equalizer)—SP-Select (speakers)— Band (bands)—Frequency (center frequency) —Level (equalizer level)—Q. ! When Flat is selected. Each time you touch c or d increases or decreases the distance.Section Available accessories Adjusting the time alignment You can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. ! A separate Custom1 curve can be created for each source. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer curve. Each time you touch a or b selects the speaker in the following order: Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)— Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer) # You cannot select speakers whose size is set to Off. rear and center equalizer curves separately by selecting a center frequency. Flat Custom1 Custom2 Super Bass Flat Custom 1 Custom 2 Super bass 19 2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted.) ! Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equalizer curves. you can adjust the front. Factor (Q factor) 3 Touch d to select the equalizer. Display Powerful Natural Vocal Equalizer curve Powerful Natural Vocal En 89 . Available accessories 2 Touch a or b to select the desired item. an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer For Custom1 and Custom2 equalizer curves. 1 Touch Parametric EQ. # You cannot select TA Adjust when neither Front-L nor Front-R is selected in Position. ! An adjusted time alignment is memorized in Custom. Here is a list of the equalizer curves. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match the car’s interior acoustic characteristics as desired.0inch is displayed as the distance is increased or decreased. no supplement or correction is made to the sound.

Rear (rear speakers)—Center (center speaker) —Front (front speakers) # You cannot select speakers whose size is set to Off. We recommend reproducing a 2ch. 90 En .25kHz —1. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers except for the center. Touch d repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: Powerful—Natural—Vocal—Flat—Custom1 —Custom2—Super Bass 4 Touch b and then touch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: Equalizer (equalizer)—SP-Select (speakers)— Band (bands)—Frequency (center frequency) —Level (equalizer level)—Q. Touch c or d until the desired speaker appears in the display. touch c. Touch d to turn the auto-equalizer on. 1 Touch Auto EQ.5kHz 7 Touch b and then touch c or d to adjust the equalizer level. and then reproducing a 5. 2 Touch a or b to select the desired item. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high) 6 Touch b and then touch c or d to select the center frequency of selected band. Note You can select a center frequency for each band. You can change the center frequency in 1/3-octave steps. Touch c or d until the desired frequency appears in the display. 5 Touch b and then touch c or d to select the equalizer band to be adjusted.6kHz—2kHz—2.3kHz—8kHz—10kHz—12. 40Hz—50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz —160Hz—200Hz—250Hz—315Hz—400Hz 2 # To turn auto-equalizer off. You can turn the auto-equalizer on or off.5kHz—3. —500Hz—630Hz—800Hz—1kHz—1. Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) The auto-time alignment is automatically adjusted for the distance between each speaker and the listening position.1-ch. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 86.) Using the auto-equalizer The auto-equalizer is the equalizer curve created by auto TA and EQ (refer to Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) on this page). Each time you touch c or d switches between the following Q factor: Narrow (narrow)—Wide (wide) # You can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way. 8 Touch b and then touch c or d to select the desired Q factor. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and adjusting the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other speakers. # You cannot use this function if auto TA and EQ has not been carried out. Factor (Q factor) 3 Touch d to select the equalizer.15kHz—4kHz —5kHz—6.Section 19 Available accessories ! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn’t easy. but you cannot select frequencies that have intervals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. 1 Touch Parametric EQ. +12 to -12 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the equalizer level.

— When the reflected sound within a vehicle is strong and delays occur. ! When front speaker is not connected. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto-equalizer curve. When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. Sounds other than the measurement tone (surrounding sounds. (Refer to page 84. (e.Section Available accessories The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics. and then creates the auto-equalizer curve based on that information. resulting in a drain on battery power. with the car engine and air conditioning switched off.. ! If you carry out auto TA and EQ when a previous setting of this already exists. telephones ringing etc.) — When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker’s maximum input power capability. auto TA and EQ cannot be carried out. — When speakers are incorrectly connected. never carry out auto TA and EQ while driving.) — It will be adjusted automatically to high pass filter setting for front. engine sound. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control. the setting will be replaced. — When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. Set the power amp’s input level to the standard position. ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time. the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circumstances. the cut-off frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency. auto TA and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. center and rear speaker. Using another microphone may prevent measurement.g. a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly before carrying out auto TA and EQ. Be sure to place the microphone in the specified location. or remove them from the car before carrying out auto TA and EQ. Before operating the auto TA and EQ function ! Carry out auto TA and EQ in as quiet a place as possible. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF. or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! The time alignment value calculated by auto TA and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. so please continue to use this value. However. In addition. 19 WARNING To prevent accidents. turn off the LPF on the power amp before carrying out auto TA and EQ. (Refer to page 89. ! Auto TA and EQ changes the audio settings as below: — The fader/balance settings return to the center position. ! Be sure to carry out auto TA and EQ using the supplied microphone. Available accessories CAUTION ! Carrying out auto TA and EQ under the following conditions may damage the speakers. En 91 . Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car.) — The equalizer curve switches to Flat.

The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers. 9 Plug the microphone into the microphone input jack on the multi-channel processor. (Refer to Understanding auto TA and EQ error messages on page 98. 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON or ACC. and then turn the engine off. 6 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys. engine noise may prevent correct auto TA and EQ. 8 Touch Auto EQ&TA to enter the auto TA and EQ measurement mode. Complete is displayed. # When all speakers are connected. facing forward. If desired. place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carry out auto TA and EQ. # To stop auto TA and EQ. an error message is displayed. turn it off.Section 19 Available accessories Carrying out auto TA and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible. using the belt (sold separately). 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the center of the headrest of the driver’s seat. Front-L is selected automatically. windows and the sun roof. # Press SRC/OFF to turn the source on if this unit is turned off. auto TA and EQ is completed in about nine minutes. Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto TA and EQ. touch Stop. If the car’s air conditioner or heater is turned on. 92 En . 4 Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. For details concerning operation. 12 When auto TA and EQ is completed. 7 Touch AV Menu and then touch Initial Menu to display the function names. refer to the multi-channel processor’s operation manual. If the engine is left running. close all doors. 5 Touch the source icon and then touch Off to turn this unit off. 11 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. and auto TA and EQ begins. # If no position is selected before you start auto TA and EQ. The auto TA and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. 10 Touch Start to start the auto TA and EQ. # To cancel auto TA and EQ on the way. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible.) 13 Touch ESC to cancel the auto TA and EQ mode. touch Back or ESC. Refer to Using the position selector on page 83.

high temperatures may cause distortion. color change or malfunction. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period. 19 En 93 Available accessories .Section Available accessories 14 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment.

94 En . Check by using another disc. slow motion or tion or frame-by-frame playback. (Page 100) Check what type the disc is. The remote control code is incorrect. and op. The disc is dirty. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. The picture is stretched. the aspect is incorrect. (Page 47) This is a normal operation. then replace the fuse. Some operations are prohibited with certain discs.After stopping playback once. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. The attenuator is on. Action (See) Confirm once more that all connections are correct. and apply the parking brake. Reading of data has become impos. (Page 10) the built-in microprocessor to operate incorrectly. frame-by-frame playback. Noise and other factors are causing Press RESET. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display. The volume level will not rise. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing. Be very sure to install a fuse with the same rating. Cables are not connected correctly. The fuse is blown. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. This operation is not possible. Adjust the volume level. start playback sible during playback. The unit does not operate correctly even when the appropriate remote control buttons are pressed. Volume level is low. The unit is performing still. There is no picture.Appendix Additional Information Troubleshooting Common Symptom Power doesn’t turn on. The volume level is low. Secure the unit firmly. The operation is not compatible with the disc’s organization. The parking brake cord is not connected. The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play. The remote control operation mode is incorrect. When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC). The unit is not firmly secured. The unit doesn’t operate. Connect the cables correctly. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated.The operation is prohibited for the eration is not possible. once more. Clean disc. Operation with the remote control isn’t possible. Battery power is low. disc. Load new battery.There is no sound during still. The icon is displayed. Switch to the correct remote control mode. slow mo. Turn the attenuator off. No sounds are heard. Make sure the remote control selection switch setting and code type setting are the same. Playback is not possible. This operation is not possible. Connect a parking brake cord. There is audio and video skipping. Connect a parking brake cord. the motor sounds. There is no sound. Select the appropriate setting for your display. The parking brake is not applied. Cause Leads and connectors are incorrectly connected. and apply the parking brake.

The Video CD playing features PBC. Parental lock is on. Cause The Video CD playing does not feature PBC.) back. Parental lock cannot be canceled. settings selected in Setup. The code number is incorrect. Switch using the disc menu. when playdistorted and dark during play. The touch panel keys cannot be used. Press and hold MUTE to return to the source display and then select the correct setting for Camera Polarity. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The DVD playing does not feature Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language selected in Setup. the picture may suffer from horizontal stripes or other imperfections when viewed on some displays. You cannot switch between multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes recorded from multiple angles. (Page 55) Nothing is displayed.Appendix Additional Information The rear view camera is not connected. En 95 . (Page 48) Input the correct code number.copying. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not recorded on the disc. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Page 112) Turn parental lock off or change the level. (Some discs may have ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copythis. You can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Connect a rear view camera. Cause The loaded disc has a different region number from this unit. (Page 7. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. A parental lock message is displayed and playback is not possible. This operation is not possible with Video CDs featuring PBC. Additional Information Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. You can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. (Page 48) You cannot switch among multiple languages if they are not recorded on the disc. You have forgotten your code number. Problems during DVD playback Symptom Playback is not possible. Action (See) Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. Camera Polarity is at incorrect setting. Switching to a selected language is not possible if the language selected in Setup is not recorded on the disc. (Page 48) Touch C 10 times to cancel the code number. Action This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. ing. Switching the viewing angle is not possible. Switch between multiple angles when watching scenes recorded from multiple angles. Switch using the disc menu. You are trying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremely unclear/ The disc features a signal to prohibit Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system.

96 En . Replace disc. Dirty disc Scratched disc The disc is loaded upside down Electrical or mechanical Clean disc.Replace the DVD video with one bearing the gion number as this unit correct region number. Update the iPod version. File Not Playable-High Definition All the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM The inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by DRM The temperature of this unit is outside the normal operating range The inserted disc that contains expired DivX VOD content. Unplayable Disc This type of disc cannot be played by this unit The inserted disc does not contain any files that can be played back Protect Skipped Temp Rental Expired. Replace nition DivX file. Replace the disc with one this unit can play. Action (See) Connect the cables correctly. Reset the iPod. Cause Optical cables are not connected correctly.ar PCM.This unit cannot play DivX HD file. Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to within normal operating limits. The volume level will not rise. be sure to have the error message recorded.Appendix Additional Information Problems during iPod playback Symptom iPod doesn’t operate correctly. The inserted disc contains high defi. Problems during multi-channel processor connection Symptom No sounds are heard. 2-channel audio is out. (Page 49) Digital output setting is set to LineEven if multi-channel audio is selected. Once iPod main menu is displayed. Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center. Replace disc. Built-in DVD player Message Different Region Disc Error-02-XX/FF-FF Cause Action The disc does not have the same re. Replace disc. put. the disc with one this unit can play. set the digital output setting to Stream. Press RESET. Cause Cables are incorrectly connected. Replace disc. Action Disconnect the cable from iPod. Normally. Check that the disc is loaded correctly. The iPod version is old. Replace disc. connect the cable again.

Check USB The USB connector or USB cable is Confirm that the USB connector or USB short-circuited. USB audio player/USB memory Message Unplayable File Cause Action This type of file cannot be played by Select the playable file. –Change to a different source. Select the playable file. –Disconnect the USB portable audio player/ USB memory. –Turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON. this unit. USB device is not formatted with FAT16 or FAT32 USB device should be formatted with FAT16 or FAT32. This unit’s DivX registration code has not been authorized by DivX VOD contents provider. files that are protected by Windows Media™ DRM 9/10 All the files on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memory are protected by Windows Media DRM 9/10 Transfer audio files not protected by Windows Media DRM 9/10 to the USB portable audio player/USB memory and connect. cable is not caught in something or damaged. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Error-02-9X/-DX Communication failure En 97 . It is not possible to write it in the flash. then to ACC or ON and then connect the compliant USB portable audio player/USB memory. return to the USB portable audio player/USB memory. Disconnect the USB portable audio player/ USB memory and do not use it. No songs USB memory with security enabled is connected Transfer the audio files to the USB portable audio player/USB memory and connect. (Page 49) Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played by Select the playable file.Appendix Additional Information This unit’s flash memory used for temporary storage area is full. Additional Information Follow the USB memory instructions to disable the security. this unit. Then. Perform one of the following operations. Skipped The connected USB portable audio Play an audio file not protected by Windows player/USB memory contains WMA Media DRM 9/10. The connected USB portable audio player/USB memory consumes more than 500 mA (maximum allowable current). Protect N/A USB The USB device connected to is not Connect a USB portable audio player or USB supported by this unit. Authorization Error Register this unit to DivX VOD contents provider. memory that is USB Mass Storage Class compliant.

Once iPod main menu is displayed. Once iPod main menu is displayed. Please check Rear speaker. The microphone cannot pick up the ! Confirm that the speakers are connected measuring tone of a speaker. iPod failure Error-02-67 No Songs Stop Old version of iPod No songs No songs in the current list Understanding auto TA and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto TA and EQ. ! Set the microphone correctly. Reset the iPod. Reset the iPod. Action Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. Error. Please check Rear-L speaker. and switch off the engine.. Please check noise. Disconnect the cable from iPod.. Error. an error message may appear on the display. Please check Rear-R speaker.Appendix Additional Information iPod Message Error-02-6X/-9X/-DX Cause Communication failure Action Disconnect the cable from iPod.. Error. connect the cable again. ! Set the microphone correctly.. Error. refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. After checking. Error. air conditioner or heater. Please check Front-R speaker. Update the iPod version.. try again. Error. connect the cable again. The surrounding noise level is too high. Please check Center speaker. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible.. Please check Subwoofer. correctly. 98 En . If an error message appears. Message Error. ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers.. Please check Front-L speaker. Transfer the songs to iPod. Cause Microphone is not connected. Please check MIC. Please check Front speaker. Error. Error. Select a list that contains the songs. Error.

otherwise screen image may appear reversed. Translation Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images. En 99 Additional Information .Appendix Additional Information Understanding messages Messages CAUTION: Screen image may appear reversed.

scratches or warping before playing. 100 En . non-round. CD ! If the heater is used in cold weather. Do not use such discs. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. scratches or are warped may not play properly. ! Do not attach labels. If you insert irregular. ! It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. Condensation may cause the DVD player to not operate properly. If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to allow it to dry out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. condensation may form on components inside the DVD player. shaped discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play properly. Video CD ! Check all discs for cracks. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. Discs that have cracks. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. write on or apply chemicals to the surface of the discs. wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ! To clean a disc.Appendix Additional Information Handling guideline of discs and player ! Use only discs featuring any of following logos. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs. ! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed) surface when handling the disc. DVD video ! Use only normal. it may not be possible to use certain functions. round discs.

Serious scratches can lead to playback problems on this unit.) ! For more information about recording mode. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics. a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject. etc. If inserted. However. condensation. scratches or dirt on the disc. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible. since the CD side of Dual Discs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard. (For details.) Compressed audio compatibility WMA ! Compatible format: WMA encoded by Windows Media Player ! File extension: . contact the manufacturer of the application. ! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/ DVD-RW discs. Voice: No MP3 ! File extension: .Appendix Additional Information DVD-R/DVD-RW discs ! Unfinalized DVD-R/-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode) cannot be played back. In some cases. or the storage conditions in the vehicle. ! Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc. condensation. high temperatures. on the lens of this unit. we recommend you refrain from using Dual Disc with this unit. ! Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. ! DVD-R/-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode) cannot be played back. VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz ! Windows Media Audio 9 Professional. etc. ! Please refer to the information from the disc manufacturer for more detailed information about Dual Discs. playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. depending on the application settings and the environment. please contact manufacture of DVD recorder or application. CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used. it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit.wma ! Bit rate: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR). or dirt. Lossless. Do not insert AVCHD discs. on the lens of this unit. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible. VBR En 101 . ! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight. because of disc characteristics. Dual Discs ! Dual Discs are two-sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other. depending on the application settings and the environment. scratches or dirt on the disc. the disc may not be ejected. Additional Information AVCHD recorded discs ! This unit is not compatible with discs recorded in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) format. Please record with the correct format.mp3 ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR). or dirt. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. Please record with the correct format. To prevent this.. contact the manufacturer of the application. (For details.

2. ! This unit may not operate correctly depending on the application used to encode WMA files. ! Do not leave the USB portable audio player/USB memory in direct sunlight for extended amounts of time. 1. ! This unit can play back files in the USB portable audio player/USB memory that is USB Mass Storage Class. ! Do not leave the USB portable audio player/USB memory in high temperature. where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. ! Compressed audio files are not compatible with packet write data transfer.x is given priority than Version 1.x. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files on a USB portable audio player/USB memory with numerous folder hierarchies. However. 44. this unit may not recognize the USB audio player/USB memory or audio files may not be played back properly.1. Compressed audio files on the disc ! ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2 compliant. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in USB portable audio player/USB memory malfunction due to the resulting high temperature. ! Regardless of the length of blank section between the songs of original recording. ! You cannot connect a USB portable audio player/USB memory to this unit via a USB hub. ! The text information of some audio files may not be correctly displayed. 48 kHz for emphasis) ! Compatible ID3 tag version: 1. 2. 102 En .1 kHz ! Transmission rate: 16 kbps to 320 kbps ! Apple Lossless: No USB audio player/USB memory CAUTION Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on the USB memory/USB portable audio player even if that data is lost while using this unit. mp3 PRO: No AAC ! Compatible format: AAC encoded by iTunes ! File extension: . Do not let the USB portable audio player/USB memory fall onto the floor. copyright protected files that are stored in above-mentioned USB devices cannot be played back. ! Only 32 characters from beginning can be displayed as a file name (including the file extension) or a folder name. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player.0. it may generate noise in the radio. Handling guideline and supplemental information ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data.m4a ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 44. compressed audio discs play with a short pause between songs.1.Appendix Additional Information ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz (32.) ! M3u playlist: No ! MP3i (MP3 interactive). 2. ! Depending on the USB devices connected to this unit.3 (ID3 tag Version 2. ! Depending on the kind of USB portable audio player/USB memory you use. ! Do not connect anything other than the USB portable audio player/USB memory. ! Multi-session playback is possible. ! Partitioned USB memory is not compatible with this unit. ! Firmly secure the USB portable audio player/USB memory when driving.

Appendix Additional Information ! Operations may vary depending on the kind of USB audio player and a USB memory. ! Up to 3 500 files on a DVD (-R/-RW) can be played back. numbers and specify the playback sequence with this unit. ! Up to 65 535 files on a USB portable audio player/USB memory can be played back.2) — iPod touch (software version 2.0) ! Depending on the generation or version of the iPod.3. iPod compatibility ! This unit supports only the following iPods. you cannot specify the file playback sequence.g.1. The user cannot assign folder En 103 . ! Up to 6 000 folders on a USB portable audio player/USB memory can be played back. ! When using an iPod.1) — iPod nano second generation (software version 1.3. 001xxx. ! 01 to 05 represent assigned folder numbers. Supported iPod software versions are shown below.mp3).0) — iPhone (software version 2. ! Up to 700 folders on a disc can be played back. ! Folder selection sequence or other operation may be altered depending on the encoding or writing software. The user cannot assign folder numbers.. Example of a hierarchy : Folder : Compressed audio file 1 2 3 5 6 4 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 However. 1 Create the file name including numbers that specify the playback sequence (e. 1 to 6 represent the playback sequence. 2 Put those files into a folder. ! Operations may vary depending on the software version of iPod.1. the sequence is different from that of USB memory and depends on the player. The sequence of audio files on USB memory For USB portable audio players.0) — iPhone 3G (software version 2. — iPod nano first generation (software version 1. ! To specify the playback sequence. depending on the system environment.2) — iPod fifth generation (software version 1. Older versions of iPod software may not be supported. ! Up to 999 files on a CD (-R/-RW) can be played back. iPod Dock Connector to USB Cable is required.0) — iPod classic (software version 1.1.mp3 and 099yyy. some functions can not be operated. 3 Record the folder containing files into the USB device.3) — iPod nano third generation (software version 1. Additional Information The sequence of audio files on the disc ! This unit assigns folder numbers. the following method is recommended. ! Playback sequence of the audio file is the same as recorded sequence in the USB device.

divx ! DivX Ultra format: No ! DivX HD format: No ! DivX files without video data: No ! Compatible audio codec: MP2.Appendix Additional Information ! Pioneer CD-IU50 interface cable is also available. MP3. ! DRM rental file cannot be operated until starting playing back. add the corresponding filename extension (. When you disconnect the iPod. ! Do not leave the iPod in a high temperature. DivX video files ! Depending on the file information composition such as the number of audio stream. refer to Displaying your DivX VOD registration code on page 49. DivX compatibility ! Compatible format: DivX video format implemented in relation to DivX standards ! File extensions: . consult your dealer. the EQ returns to the original setting.divx. Even if you set Repeat to off on the iPod. ! Some special operation may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files. (EXIF format is used most commonly with digital still cameras. ! There is no progressive JPEG compatibility. To prevent malfunctions.avi or .jfif). where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal.jpg. Do not let the iPod fall onto the floor.jpeg. Repeat is automatically changed to All when connecting the iPod to this unit. About handling the iPod CAUTION ! Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on the iPod even if that data is lost while using this unit. ! Files are compatible with Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2. ! This unit corresponds to a DivX file display up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds. Important ! When naming a JPEG picture file. About iPod settings ! When an iPod is connected. . . Dolby Digital 104 En . .jpe or . .jpeg. ! DivX files downloaded only from DivX partner site are guarantee of proper operation. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunction due to the resulting high temperature. ! Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for extended amounts of time. ! For more details about DivX. ! DivX VOD file playback requires ID code of this unit to DivX VOD provider. For details. Unauthorized DivX file may not operate properly. ! You cannot set Repeat to off on the iPod when using this unit.1 still image up to resolution of 8 192 × 7 680. playback is stopped on the way. About ID ® code. there may be a slight delay in the start of playback on discs. JPEG picture files ! JPEG is short for Joint Photographic Experts Group and refers to a still image compression technology standard. refer to the iPod’s manuals. visit the following site: http://www. ! If a file contains more than 4 GB.jpg. search operation beyond this time limit is prohibited. this unit changes the EQ (equalizer) setting of the iPod to Flat in order to optimize the acoustics.jfif) as a JPEG picture file.) ! EXIF format that processed by the personal computer may not be played back. do not use these extensions for files other than JPEG picture files. Also.jpe or .com/ For details. ! This unit plays back files with the filename extension (. ! Firmly secure the iPod when driving.

or repairs. ! Do not push the LCD screen forcefully as this may scratch it. or other failure. Also. ! The display should be used within the temperature ranges shown below. if the display is cooled down by the cooler. ! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station for internal inspection. or any other abnormal signs from the display. it will become very hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. You should avoid exposing the display unit to direct sunlight as much as possible. adjustments. The screen can scratch easily. Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside this unit. ! Never touch the screen with anything besides your finger when operating the touch panel function. etc. ! Do not disassemble or modify this unit. ! When using a portable phone. as there are high-voltage components inside which may cause electric shock. Image quality will improve with an increase in temperature. using the LED backlight may increase image lag and degrade the image quality because of the characteristics of the LCD screen. the screen may become dark. VBR Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz Compatible external subtitle file extension: . Additional Information Handling the display ! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the display when this unit is not being used. turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station. turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a problem with the display. Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! Heat from the heater may damage the LCD screen.srt Storage temperature range: -20 °C to +80 °C At temperatures higher or lower than the operating temperature range.Appendix Additional Information ! ! ! ! LPCM: No Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR). ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. ! At low temperatures. LED (light-emitting diode) backlight ! At low temperatures. display will darken in the following environment: En 105 . ! To protect the LED backlight. keep the antenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots. ! When the display is subjected to direct sunlight for a long period of time. Do not use the unit in this condition because doing so may result in fire. the display may not operate normally. Using this unit in this condition may result in permanent damage to the system. colored stripes. a strange noise or smell. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures. or the life span of the small fluorescent tube used inside the display may be shortened. the LCD screen may be dark for a while after the power is turned on. electric shock. Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it. ! If you notice smoke. ! The LCD screen is exposed in order to increase its visibility within the vehicle. and cool air from the cooler may cause moisture to form inside the display resulting in possible damage.

the screen will become dark and the image will no longer be projected. Changing the picture adjustment You can make the best adjustment to the picture display by the Brightness. take care not to scratch the surface. it may decrease if used in high temperatures. you can adjust the screen so that the screen can fit to the video image you are playing. — The fluorescent tube should last for approximately 10 000 hours. depending on operating conditions.) — When the fluorescent tube reaches the end of its useful life. You can also dim or brighten the overall picture the Dimmer. Contrast. the screen will be dark and the image will no longer be projected. Keeping the display in good condition ! When removing dust from the screen or cleaning the display. at low temperatures reduces the service life of the fluorescent tube. Small fluorescent tube ! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the display to illuminate the LCD screen. (Using the display 106 En . refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 53. ! When wiping the screen. then wipe with a soft dry cloth. For details concerning operation. refer to Changing the picture adjustment on page 54. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. Hue. If this happens. In this case. Color. Temperature and Black Level. ! If the LED backlight reaches the end of its product lifetime. consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station. For details concerning operation. Changing the wide screen size By changing the screen size from 4:3 to 16:9. However. first turn the system power off.Appendix Additional Information — In the direct sunlight — Near the heater vent ! The product lifetime of the LED backlight is more than 10 000 hours. please consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station.

1415 Occitan (oc). 1312 Mongolian (mn). 2215 Wolof (wo). 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm). 1412 Portuguese (pt). 0214 Tibetan (bo). 0625 Irish (ga). 1913 Shona (sn). 0215 Breton (br). 0821 Armenian (hy). 1912 Samoan (sm). 0315 Czech (cs). 1908 Sinhalese (si). 0319 Welsh (cy). input code Guarani (gn). 0209 Bengali (bn). 2515 Zulu (zu). 0714 Gujarati (gu). 1314 Moldavian (mo). 0119 Aymara (ay). 0520 Basque (eu). 1911 Slovenian (sl).Appendix Additional Information Language code chart for DVD Language (code). 0208 Bislama (bi). 0113 Arabic (ar). 0101 Abkhazian (ab). 1111 Greenlandic (kl). 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw). 1821 Korean (ko). Pushto (ps). 0207 Bihari (bh). 0118 Assamese (as). 1923 Tamil (ta). 1309 Macedonian (mk). 1201 Lingala (ln). 0825 Interlingua (ia). 0301 Corsican (co). 0618 Spanish (es). 1121 Kirghiz (ky). 1612 Language (code). 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd). 1215 Lithuanian (lt). 2015 Turkish (tr). 0809 Croatian (hr). input code Pashto. 2007 Thai (th). 1101 Kazakh (kk). 1921 Swahili (sw). 0911 Indonesian (in). 1405 Norwegian (no). 1503 Oromo (om). 1113 Kannada (kn). 2315 Xhosa (xh). 0102 Afrikaans (af). 0610 Faroese (fo). 1915 Albanian (sq). 1814 Romanian (ro). 1620 Swedish (sv). 1919 Sesotho (st). 0325 Danish (da). 2118 Uzbek (uz). 2009 Turkmen (tk). 0615 Frisian (fy). 0923 Yiddish (ji). 0205 Bulgarian (bg). 1125 Latin (la). 2014 Tonga (to). 2018 Tsonga (ts). 0201 Byelorussian (be). 0818 Hungarian (hu). 0126 Bashkir (ba). 1307 Maori (mi). 1619 Quechua (qu). 1311 Malayalam (ml). 1315 Marathi (mr). 2008 Tigrinya (ti). 1318 Malay (ms). 1320 Burmese (my). 1601 Polish (pl). 1918 Siswati (ss). 2111 Urdu (ur). 0920 Chinese (zh). 0218 Catalan (ca). 0515 Estonian (et). 2608 Dutch (nl). 0125 Azerbaijani (az). 1914 Somali (so). 0609 Fiji (fj). 2209 Volapük (vo). 1319 Maltese (mt). 1513 Oriya (or). 1920 Sundanese (su). 1222 Malagasy (mg). 0919 Hebrew (iw). 1325 Nauru (na). 0914 Icelandic (is). 0512 Afar (aa). 1112 Cambodian (km). input code Japanese (ja). 1220 Latvian (lv). 1823 Sanskrit (sa). 1917 Serbian (sr). 2621 En 107 Additional Information . 0106 Amharic (am). 0712 Language (code). 2023 Ukrainian (uk). 0519 German (de). 0405 Italian (it). 0521 Persian (fa). 2020 Twi (tw). 1023 Georgian (ka). 1909 Slovak (sk). 1009 Javanese (jw). 0721 Hausa (ha). 2408 Yoruba (yo). 1214 Laothian (lo). 1001 English (en). 2019 Tatar (tt). 0514 French (fr). 1401 Nepali (ne). 1813 Kirundi (rn). 0901 Interlingue (ie). 0426 Esperanto (eo). 2001 Telugu (te). 2126 Vietnamese (vi). 2011 Tagalog (tl). 0801 Hindi (hi). 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh). 1901 Sindhi (sd). 1518 Panjabi (pa). 0401 Bhutani (dz). 1115 Greek (el). 1904 Sangho (sg). 1922 Russian (ru). 1119 Kurdish (ku). 0905 Inupiak (ik). 0704 Galician (gl). 2012 Setswana (tn). 1114 Kashmiri (ks). 0601 Finnish (fi). 2005 Tajik (tg).

For details. WMA iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc. satellite. and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. registered in the U.S. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation.S. ! This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing. non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.Appendix Additional Information Copyright and trademark notice ! This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U. iPod is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. registered in the U.S. such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. iTunes iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc.com. and other countries..mp3licensing. Inc. iPhone Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. DVD video MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. broadcasting/streaming via internet. intranets and/ or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems.e. An independent license for such use is required. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. revenuegenerating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial. cable and/or any other media). please visit http://www. and other countries. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.. 108 En .

En 109 . Satellite radio will create and package over 100 channels of digital-quality music. Additional Information Manufactured under license under U. Pro Logic. Dolby. Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS.S. DivX Certified. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS Digital Out ! The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide listeners in their cars and at home with crystal-clear sound seamlessly from coast to coast. news. and are used under license.Appendix Additional Information Dolby Pro Logic II SAT Radio Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS. Inc.451. talk and children’s programming. sports. Inc.942 & other U. HD Radio Technology ! HD Radio™ and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Patent #: 5. and the doubleD symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DivX DivX. and associated logos are trademarks of DivX. All Rights Reserved.S.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front channels. you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. the year of production. the more information is available to reproduce the sound. providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Dynamic range control Dolby Digital has a function for compressing the difference between the loudest and softest sounds: Dynamic range control. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. Aspect ratio This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. the higher the rate. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. DivX Certified DivX Certified products are officially tested by the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all versions of DivX video. including DivX 6.com. EXIF (Exchangeable image file) A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still cameras. the music genre. and alternate audio tracks. the information can be viewed when the track is played back. or bps (bits per second) units. DivX files can also include advanced media features like menus.Appendix Additional Information Terms AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. This embedded information can include the track title. the artist’s name. the album title. subtitles. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. The higher the rate. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3). as well as the picture data. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode.1 independent channels. DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II can create five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources. 110 En . 1 center channel. Many DivX media files are available for download online. and you can create your own using your personal content and easy-to-use tools from DivX. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. the better the sound. comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 Tag editing functions. DivX media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size. time and thumbnail information. This control ensures sounds with an increased dynamic range are heard clearly even at low volume levels. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5. Inc. Although the tags are restricted as to the number of characters. and 2 rear channels. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date. With DVD video discs featuring chapters.

and is an international video image compression standard. JPEG This stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group. Number of quantization bits The number of quantization bits is one factor in the overall sound quality. MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a conventional disc. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation. Multi-angle With regular TV programs. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. However. letting you choose your viewing angle as desired. the higher the “bit-depth”. Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark “. DVDs can provide higher sound quality. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multiple languages.Appendix Additional Information ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the format logic of CD-ROM folders and files. there are regulations for the following two levels. the better the sound quality.. letting you choose as desired. MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. and is an international still image compression standard. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be recorded on a single DVD. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc. all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group. DVDs are recorded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. m3u Playlists created using the “WINAMP” software have a playlist file extension (. Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies.m3u). Therefore. Some DVDs feature digital audio compressed and recorded using this system. with a file-extension of three characters). Multi-session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions on one disc. increasing the bit-depth also increases the amount of data and therefore storage space required. Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles. which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that allows additional data to be recorded later. half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the “_” sign. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standards Organization). Generally. Level 1: The file name is in 8. only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV. MS ADPCM This stands for Microsoft adaptive differential pulse code modulation. which is the signal recording system used for the multimedia software of Microsoft Corporation.” and a file extension). When recording data on a CD-ROM. En 111 Additional Information . letting you choose as desired. For the ISO9660 format. etc. although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes. CD-R or CD-RW.3 format (the name consists of up to 8 characters.

for example. they are divided into title 1. Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (Version 2.0). With this kind of disc. at the time required for a file.Appendix Additional Information Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R. Playback of a DVD is not possible unless it features the same region number as the DVD player. Title DVD video discs have high data capacity. one disc contains three separate movies. it is possible to achieve compressionpriority sound quality. or these scenes will be skipped. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later. playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media™ Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.. etc. Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other functions. 112 En . You can also enjoy viewing high. just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs.and standard-resolution still images. title 2 and title 3. enabling recording of multiple movies on a single disc. if you set the unit’s parental lock level. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compression. If. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult-oriented scenes feature parental lock which prevents children from viewing such scenes.

. CD................ 0.....59/0........... –12 dB/oct Subwoofer (mono): Frequency ....0 full speed Maximum current supply .............0 and earlier) DivX decoding format ................... DVD video..59/0........× 3/8 in...................... 2 (stereo) MP3 decoding format ....... mono.........8 inch wide/16:9 (effective display area: 128.... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz Slope ...15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ......... 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding format .... 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding format ......... Ver......................... 4...... ±12 dB Mid Frequency .............. DVD-R/RW/RDL Region number ............. 10.. × 3-7/8 in....... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ....... 200/500/1k/2k Hz Q Factor .. 8.....8 µV/75 W......................... 7.. Video CD........ +6 dB to –24 dB Phase ..1....... ............15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain .......0 and earlier) FM tuner Frequency range ... AAC.................................................... both channels driven) Load impedance ............ 8....4 V DC (10.. 9. CD-R/RW...... 1..................................... 336 960 (1 440 × 234) Display method .......... CD......... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD.............................. 500 mA USB Class .) Nose ..... DivX.................0 V Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer): Low Frequency ...... × 6-1/2 in........0 A Dimensions (W × H × D): DIN Chassis ........59/0............................ 10....0 Vp-p/75 W (±0.................. 7......5k Hz Q Factor ......................... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ........... ±12 dB USB USB standard specification .... Ver.... at sampling frequency 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ...15k/8k/10k/12..........8 V to 15.....1 V allowable) Grounding system ...........7 lbs) HPF: Frequency .......... -20 °C to +80 °C Additional Information Audio Maximum power output ..................................95/1................. +12 dB to 0 dB DVD Player System ... 0.... 4..... FAT32 MP3 decoding format . Video CD....... 1..... 4 W to 8 W × 4 4 W to 8 W × 2 + 2 W × 1 Preout max output level ......... 50 W × 4 50 W × 2/4 W + 70 W × 1/2 W (for subwoofer) Continuous power output .m4a) (Ver...............1................... 5.................× 3-7/8 in....................35/0.... –18 dB/oct Gain ...7 kg (3................ 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A network) (RCA level) Output level: Video ..........) Weight ....................95/1....... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz Slope .. USB 1... 5... Normal/Reverse Bass boost: Gain .. 1 Frequency response ....... MPEG-4 AAC (iTunes encoded only) (.. Negative type Max................m4a) (Ver....................... DVD video....... MP3.. 9..........35/0...... 22 W × 4 (1 kHz..... 3. 3.35/0... MSC (Mass Storage Class) File system ......9 MHz to 107.. 8... 4 W load...... 10. S/N: 30 dB) En 113 ...............2 V) Number of channels .. 0.......... 7........... WMA.9 MHz Usable sensitivity ...........................1......2...........................95/1...... 9 dBf (0............ Home Theater Ver. USB 2............... current consumption ..1 × 71 mm) Pixels ..........15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ..... 6 (. ±12 dB High Frequency .. 8............Appendix Additional Information Specifications General Power source ............................divx) Display Screen size/aspect ratio ... JPEG system Usable discs ..... 178 mm × 100 mm × 165 mm (7 in.......... TFT active matrix Color system ............ 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Factor .......... NTSC Durable temperature range (power off) . 7.......... MPEG-4 AAC (iTunes encoded only) (..........avi................... FAT16........................ 14.... 5% THD.. 171 mm × 97 mm × 8 mm (6-3/4 in................ 87..................................

.......... 72 dB (IHF-A network) AM tuner Frequency range .... 114 En .... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 W) Note Specifications and the design are subject to modifications without notice due to improvements..Appendix Additional Information Signal-to-noise ratio ............................. 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity .......................................... 62 dB (IHF-A network) CEA2006 Specifications Power output . 14 W RMS × 4 Channels (4 W and ≦ 1 % THD+N) S/N ratio .................... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ...............................

......................................................................................................111 L Language code chart .....................21......................................110 H Hue ................................................................110 DivX Certified ...................110 DTS ...................................................112 R Region number ......54 J JPEG .........................................22...................................110 Code number ...................24 Playback control (PBC) ..................................................34...............................110 E EXIF ....................................................110 Dolby Digital .........111 Multi-angle .............................................................107 Linear PCM (LPCM) ......110 Audio language .......112 TV aspect ....7....................................34....................47 Aspect ratio ...........................................................109..111 Multi-audio .......54 C Chapter ....46 T Title .22........................................................110 Dynamic range control ...............................................................................................46 B Bookmark ..........................................110 Dolby Pro Logic II .......100 W Wide screen mode .......................54 Contrast .....54 D DivX ........................22..............................47 V Video CD ...............................15.........34..22..9....112 S Subtitle language ....................20 Brightness ....................47..34..........................................111 P Parental lock ....................................109...........................111 Multi-subtitle ...........53 En 115 ........47 MPEG ...............................................................................................................................................................9...............................................................................................48 Color ....111 M Menu language ....................Index A Angle icon ..............21..............................................................................................48...................112 PBC (playback control) ................................................

Belgium/Belgique TEL: (0) 3/570. B-9120 Melsele. Markham. Printed in Thailand <KOKZX> <09A00000> <CRB2864-B/N> UC . S. All rights reserved. U.PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1.Lomas de Chapultepec. Keetberglaan 1. 300 Allstate Parkway. 178-184 Boundary Road. INC. JAPAN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. Copyright © 2008-2009 by Pioneer Corporation. Mexico.V. Box 1540. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 先鋒股份有限公司 總公司 : 台北市中山北路二段44號13樓 電話: (02) 2521-3588 先鋒電子(香港)有限公司 香港九龍尖沙嘴海港域世界商業中心 9樓901-6室 電話: (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Corporation.S.O. 253 Alexandra Road. Ontario L3R 0P2. Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col. Braeside. P. LTD. #04-01.A. Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA.A.F. Victoria 3195. Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 TEL: 905-479-4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO. Long Beach. LTD.05. MEGURO 1-CHOME.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. Blvd. MEGURO-KU TOKYO 153-8654. de C. California 90801-1540. D. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful